Radar

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
MARINE RADAR/ARPA
FAR-28x7 Series
MODEL FAR-21x7(-BB) Series
Complies with
IMO MSC.192(79)
www.furuno.co.jp
IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the
screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system
configuration and equipment settings.
Save this manual for future reference.
Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by
FURUNO will cancel the warranty.
All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of
their respective holders.
How to discard this product

Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For
disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance
(http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery
Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery(ies), see
the chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery(ies) is used.
In the European Union
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of
batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash
site. Take the used batteries to a battery collection site
according to your national legislation and the Batteries Directive Cd
2006/66/EU.
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that
Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to
local laws. Ni-Cd Pb
In the other countries
There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols
can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future.
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The operator and installer must read the applicable safety instructions before attempting to
install or operate the equipment.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

DANGER will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION can result in minor or moderate injury.
Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action
WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be harmful,
particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance
while the radar ius in operation or eexpose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close
distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m 2 are given in the table
below.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your
administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution.
This is possible. Ask your FURUNO representive or dealer to provide this feature.
*1 2
Radar model Transceiver Magnetron Antenna 100W/m 50W/m 2 10W/m 2
XN12AF 0.3m 1.2m 3.7m
*2
FAR-2117/2817 RTR-078 MG4010 XN20AF 0.1m 0.7m 2.2m
XN24AF 0.1m 0.4m 1.5m
XN12AF 0.9m 2.6m 9.0m
FAR-2127/2827 RTR-079 MG5436 XN20AF 0.5m 1.7m 4.6m
XN24AF 0.2m 1.0m 3.3m
SN30AF 0.1m 2.4m
FAR-2137S/2837S RTR-080 MG5223F
SN36AF 0.1m 0.7m 2.0m
XN20AF 0.4m 1.0m 5.6m
FAR-2827W RTR-081 MG5436
XN24AF 0.2m 0.5m 3.4m
FAR-2837SW MG5223F SN36AF - 0.2m
RTR-082 1.9m
*1 XN12AF: 120cm, XN20AF: 198cm, XN24AF: 243cm, SN30AF: 309cm, SN36AF: 377cm
*2 OR MAF1425B
ii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Use the proper fuse.
Do not open the equipment.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
Only qualified personnel to the equipment or cause fire.
should work inside the
equipment. Keep heater away from equipment.
Turn off the radar power Heat can alter equipment shape and melt
switch before servicing the the power cord, which can cause fire or
antenna unit. Post a warn- electrical shock.
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be Do not place liquid-filled containers
turned on while the antenna near the equipment.
unit is being serviced.
Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid
Prevent the potential risk of spills into the equipment.
being struck by the rotating
antenna and exposure to Do not operate the equipment with wet
RF radiation hazard. hands.
Wear a safety belt and hard Electrical shock can result.

hat when working on the
antenna unit. Before servicing the radar, turn off
the appropriate external breaker.
Serious injury or death can
result if someone falls from Power is not removed from the radar simply
the radar antenna mast. by turning off its power switch.
Do not disassemble or modify the

equipment.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can

result.
Immediately turn off the power at the

ship's mains switchboard if water
leaks into the equipment or the equip-
ment is emitting smoke or fire.
Continued use can cause fatal damage to

the equipment.
iii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied The plotting accuracy and response of
upon for the safety of vessel and crew. this TT meets IMO standards.
The navigator has the responsibility to Tracking accuracy is affected by the
check all aids available to confirm following:
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational Tracking accuracy is affected by course
principles and common sense. change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
This TT automatically tracks abrupt course change. (The actual
automatically or manually acquired radar amount depends on gyrocompass
targets and calculates their courses and specifications.)
speeds, indicating them by vectors. Since The amount of tracking delay is inversely
the data generated by the auto plotter proportional to the relative speed of the
are based on what radar targets are target. Delay is on the order of 1530
selected, the radar must always be seconds for high relative speed; 3060
optimally tuned for use with the auto seconds for low relative speed.
plotter, to ensure required targets will not Display accuracy is affected by the
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea following:
returns and noise will not be acquired - Echo intensity
and tracked. - Radar transmission pulsewidth
- Radar bearing error
A target does not always mean a land- - Gyrocompass error
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels - Course change (own ship and target)
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes The data generated by TT, AIS and
with environment, the operator should video plotter are intended for
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN reference only.
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the Refer to official nautical charts for
radar screen. detailed and up-to-date information.
WARNING LABEL
Warning labels are attached to the
equipment. Do not remove any label.
If a label is missing or damaged,
contact a FURUNO agent or dealer
about replacement.
WARNING DISPLAY UNIT, PROCESSOR UNIT

To avoid electrical shock, do not Name: Warning Label (1)
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Type: 86-003-1011-1
Code No.: 100-236-231
WARNING ANTENNA UNIT

Radiation hazard. Only qualified
personnel should work inside scanner.
Name: Radiation Warning Label
Confirm that TX has stopped before
opening scanner.
Type: 03-142-3201-0
Code No.: 100-266-890
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ........................................................................................................ xi
PROGRAM NUMBER ......................................................................................... xv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.............................................................................. xvi
1. RADAR OPERATION.................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Turning on the Power................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Transmitter ON .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Control Unit................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.4 Main Menu................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.5 Operation by the On-Screen Boxes ........................................................................... 1-7
1.6 Cursor Menu............................................................................................................ 1-10
1.7 Monitor Brilliance ..................................................................................................... 1-11
1.8 Display Modes ......................................................................................................... 1-12
1.9 On-Screen Boxes and Markers................................................................................ 1-13
1.10 Tuning the Receiver................................................................................................. 1-15
1.10.1 Choosing the tuning method.......................................................................... 1-15
1.10.2 Initializing tuning............................................................................................ 1-15
1.10.3 Automatic tuning ........................................................................................... 1-16
1.10.4 Manual tuning................................................................................................ 1-16
1.11 Aligning Heading with Gyrocompass........................................................................ 1-16
1.12 Presentation Modes................................................................................................. 1-17
1.12.1 Choosing presentation mode......................................................................... 1-17
1.12.2 Description of presentation modes ................................................................ 1-18
1.13 Entering Own Ship's Speed ..................................................................................... 1-22
1.13.1 Automatic speed input by log or GPS navigator ............................................ 1-22
1.13.2 Manual speed input ....................................................................................... 1-23
1.14 Choosing a Range Scale ......................................................................................... 1-23
1.15 Choosing a Pulselength........................................................................................... 1-24
1.15.1 Choosing a pulselength................................................................................. 1-24
1.15.2 Changing pulselength.................................................................................... 1-25
1.16 Adjusting the Sensitivity ........................................................................................... 1-26
1.17 Reducing Sea Clutter............................................................................................... 1-27
1.17.1 Choosing method of adjustment .................................................................... 1-27
1.17.2 Automatic reduction of sea clutter ................................................................. 1-27
1.17.3 Manual reduction of sea clutter ..................................................................... 1-28
1.18 Reducing Rain Clutter.............................................................................................. 1-29
1.18.1 Automatic reduction of rain clutter ................................................................. 1-29
1.18.2 Manual reduction of rain clutter ..................................................................... 1-29
1.19 Measuring Range .................................................................................................... 1-31
1.19.1 Showing, hiding the fixed range rings............................................................ 1-31
1.19.2 Measuring range by the variable range marker (VRM) .................................. 1-32
1.19.3 VRM unit of measurement (B and C types) ................................................... 1-33
1.19.4 TTG to VRM indication .................................................................................. 1-33
1.20 Measuring Bearing................................................................................................... 1-34
1.20.1 Measuring bearing......................................................................................... 1-34
1.20.2 True or relative bearing ................................................................................. 1-35
1.21 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL ........................................................................ 1-36
1.21.1 How to assess risk of collision by the offset EBL ........................................... 1-36
1.21.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL ............................................. 1-37
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.22 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ..............................................1-38

1.23 Target Alarm .............................................................................................................1-39
1.23.1 How to set a target alarm ...............................................................................1-39
1.23.2 Acknowledging the target alarm .....................................................................1-40
1.23.3 Deactivating a target alarm ............................................................................1-40
1.23.4 Target alarm attributes ...................................................................................1-41
1.24 Off-Centering the Display .........................................................................................1-42
1.25 Interference Rejector................................................................................................1-43
1.26 Echo Stretch.............................................................................................................1-43
1.27 Echo Averaging ........................................................................................................1-44
1.28 Noise Rejector..........................................................................................................1-45
1.29 Wiper........................................................................................................................1-46
1.30 Target Trails..............................................................................................................1-47
1.30.1 True or relative trails ......................................................................................1-47
1.30.2 Trail time ........................................................................................................1-48
1.30.3 Trail gradation................................................................................................1-48
1.30.4 Saving, copying target trails ...........................................................................1-49
1.30.5 Trail level .......................................................................................................1-50
1.30.6 Narrow trails (B, C and W types)....................................................................1-50
1.30.7 Longer trails (B, C and W types) ....................................................................1-51
1.30.8 Temporarily removing trails from the display ..................................................1-51
1.30.9 Trail stabilization in true motion......................................................................1-51
1.30.10 Erasing trails ................................................................................................1-51
1.31 PI (Parallel Index) Lines ...........................................................................................1-52
1.31.1 Displaying, erasing PI lines ............................................................................1-52
1.31.2 Adjusting PI line orientation, PI line interval ...................................................1-53
1.31.3 PI line bearing reference................................................................................1-53
1.31.4 Maximum number of PI lines to display..........................................................1-54
1.31.5 PI line orientation ...........................................................................................1-54
1.31.6 Resetting PI lines...........................................................................................1-54
1.32 Origin Mark ..............................................................................................................1-55
1.32.1 Entering origin marks .....................................................................................1-55
1.32.2 Origin mark stabilization.................................................................................1-57
1.32.3 Deleting individual origin marks .....................................................................1-57
1.33 Zoom........................................................................................................................1-58
1.34 Markers ....................................................................................................................1-59
1.34.1 Heading line...................................................................................................1-59
1.34.2 Stern marker ..................................................................................................1-59
1.34.3 North marker..................................................................................................1-59
1.34.4 Own ship symbol ...........................................................................................1-60
1.34.5 Barge marker .................................................................................................1-61
1.34.6 INS marker ....................................................................................................1-61
1.35 Automatic Picture Setup According to Navigation Purpose.......................................1-62
1.35.1 Selecting a picture setup option .....................................................................1-64
1.35.2 Programming and saving picture setups ........................................................1-64
1.35.3 Restoring user settings ..................................................................................1-66
1.35.4 Restoring default picture setup options ..........................................................1-66
1.35.5 Disabling unnecessary picture setups ............................................................1-67
1.36 Function Keys ..........................................................................................................1-68
1.36.1 Activating function keys .................................................................................1-68
1.36.2 Programming function keys............................................................................1-68
1.37 Ships Position..........................................................................................................1-72
1.38 Second-trace Echoes ...............................................................................................1-74
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.39 Brilliance of Screen Data ......................................................................................... 1-75

1.40 Watch Alarm ............................................................................................................ 1-76
1.41 Nav Data ................................................................................................................. 1-77
1.42 Text Window ............................................................................................................ 1-79
1.43 Customizing Operation ............................................................................................ 1-81
1.44 Alert Box.................................................................................................................. 1-83
1.44.1 Alarm description .......................................................................................... 1-84
1.44.2 Alarm list ....................................................................................................... 1-87
1.44.3 Outputting alarm signals................................................................................ 1-88
1.44.4 Primary alarm................................................................................................ 1-89
1.45 Interswitch ............................................................................................................... 1-90
1.45.1 Displaying antenna information ..................................................................... 1-90
1.45.2 Presetting antenna and display combinations................................................ 1-91
1.45.3 Selecting an antenna..................................................................................... 1-93
1.46 Cursor Data ............................................................................................................. 1-93
1.47 Performance Monitor ............................................................................................... 1-94
1.47.1 Activating, deactivating the performance monitor .......................................... 1-94
1.47.2 Checking radar performance ......................................................................... 1-94
1.48 Own Ship Marker ..................................................................................................... 1-96
1.49 Color and Brilliance Sets.......................................................................................... 1-97
1.49.1 Selecting color and brilliance set ................................................................... 1-97
1.49.2 Presetting color and brilliance set.................................................................. 1-97
1.50 Reference Position .................................................................................................. 1-99
1.51 Switching Hub HUB-100 (option) ........................................................................... 1-101
1.52 Anchor Watch ........................................................................................................ 1-102
1.53 Drop Mark.............................................................................................................. 1-103
1.53.1 Activating the drop mark feature.................................................................. 1-103
1.53.2 Inscribing a drop mark................................................................................. 1-104
1.53.3 Erasing a drop mark .................................................................................... 1-104
1.54 Sub Monitor (B, C and W types)............................................................................. 1-105
2. RADAR OBSERVATION ............................................................................... 2-1

2.1 General...................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Minimum and maximum ranges....................................................................... 2-1
2.2 False Echoes............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder).................................................................. 2-5
2.3.1 SART description ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.2 Showing SART marks on the radar display ..................................................... 2-6
2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SARTs.............................................................. 2-7
2.4 RACON ..................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) ................................................................................... 2-8
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)............................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Usage Precautions .................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Controls for TT........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Activating, Deactivating TT ........................................................................................ 3-3
3.4 Entering Own Ship's Speed ....................................................................................... 3-3
3.4.1 Echo-referenced speed input .......................................................................... 3-3
3.5 Automatic Acquisition................................................................................................. 3-5
3.5.1 Enabling auto acquisition................................................................................. 3-5
3.5.2 Terminating tracking of targets (including reference targets)............................ 3-6
3.6 Manual Acquisition..................................................................................................... 3-7
3.6.1 Setting manual acquisition conditions.............................................................. 3-7
3.6.2 Manually acquiring targets............................................................................... 3-7
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.7 Lost Target ................................................................................................................ 3-9

3.7.1 Setting the lost target filter .............................................................................. 3-9
3.7.2 Enabling, disabling the lost target alarm.......................................................... 3-9
3.8 TT Symbols and Attributes .......................................................................................3-10
3.8.1 TT symbols ....................................................................................................3-10
3.8.2 Choosing TT symbol (B, C and W types) .......................................................3-11
3.8.3 TT symbol brilliance .......................................................................................3-11
3.8.4 TT symbol color .............................................................................................3-12
3.9 Displaying Target Data .............................................................................................3-13
3.9.1 Displaying target data ....................................................................................3-13
3.9.2 Target list .......................................................................................................3-15
3.10 Vector Modes ...........................................................................................................3-16
3.10.1 Description of vectors ....................................................................................3-16
3.10.2 Vector motion and length ...............................................................................3-17
3.11 Past Position Display................................................................................................3-18
3.11.1 Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past
position plot interval .......................................................................................3-18
3.11.2 Past position display attributes.......................................................................3-19
3.11.3 Past position display mode ............................................................................3-19
3.11.4 Stabilization in true mode ...............................................................................3-20
3.12 Set and Drift .............................................................................................................3-20
3.13 TT Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA)...............................................................................3-21
3.13.1 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges .................................................................3-21
3.13.2 Acknowledging the TT collision alarm ............................................................3-22
3.14 Acquisition Zone.......................................................................................................3-22
3.14.1 Activating an acquisition zone........................................................................3-22
3.14.2 Sleeping, deactivating an acquisition zone.....................................................3-23
3.14.3 Acknowledging the alarm ...............................................................................3-23
3.14.4 Acquisition zone reference.............................................................................3-24
3.14.5 Acquisition zone shape and stabilization........................................................3-24
3.15 TT System Messages...............................................................................................3-25
3.16 Trial Maneuver .........................................................................................................3-26
3.16.1 Types of trial maneuvers................................................................................3-26
3.16.2 Performing a trial maneuver...........................................................................3-27
3.16.3 Terminating a trial maneuver..........................................................................3-29
3.17 TT Performance Test ................................................................................................3-30
3.18 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking .................................................................3-32
3.19 Factors Affecting TT Functions .................................................................................3-34
4. AIS OPERATION........................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Controls for AIS ......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Showing, Hiding the AIS Display ............................................................................... 4-2
4.3 AIS Display Criteria ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.4 Activating Targets ...................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4.1 Activating specific targets manually................................................................. 4-5
4.4.2 Activating all targets........................................................................................ 4-5
4.5 How to Sleep Targets ................................................................................................ 4-6
4.5.1 Sleeping an individual target ........................................................................... 4-6
4.5.2 Sleeping all targets ......................................................................................... 4-6
4.6 Setting Up for a Voyage ............................................................................................ 4-7
4.7 Target Data................................................................................................................ 4-9
4.7.1 Basic target data ............................................................................................. 4-9
4.7.2 Detailed target data........................................................................................4-10
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.7.3 Removing a target data display ..................................................................... 4-10

4.7.4 Canceling tracking on a target from target data display ................................. 4-10
4.8 AIS Symbol Attributes .............................................................................................. 4-11
4.8.1 AIS symbol brilliance ..................................................................................... 4-11
4.8.2 AIS symbol size and color ............................................................................. 4-11
4.9 Past Position Display ............................................................................................... 4-12
4.9.1 Past position plot interval............................................................................... 4-12
4.9.2 Past position points ....................................................................................... 4-13
4.9.3 Past position display motion .......................................................................... 4-13
4.9.4 Stabilization in true motion............................................................................. 4-13
4.10 Lost Target............................................................................................................... 4-14
4.10.1 Lost target filter ............................................................................................. 4-14
4.10.2 Enabling, disabling the lost target alarm ........................................................ 4-15
4.11 ROT Setting............................................................................................................. 4-16
4.12 AIS Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA)............................................................................. 4-17
4.12.1 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges................................................................. 4-17
4.12.2 Enabling, disabling the AIS collision alarm .................................................... 4-17
4.12.3 Limiting the function of the collision alarm ..................................................... 4-18
4.13 Association of TT and AIS Targets ........................................................................... 4-19
4.14 Own Ships Data ...................................................................................................... 4-21
4.15 Messages ................................................................................................................ 4-22
4.15.1 Creating, saving messages ........................................................................... 4-22
4.15.2 Transmitting messages ................................................................................. 4-23
4.15.3 Viewing messages ........................................................................................ 4-24
4.16 AIS System Messages............................................................................................. 4-26
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION.................................................................... 5-1

5.1 General...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Display Modes ........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Presentation Modes................................................................................................... 5-2
5.4 Radar Map................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.4.1 Showing, hiding the radar map display ............................................................ 5-3
5.4.2 Inscribing radar map marks and lines.............................................................. 5-4
5.5 Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines......................................................................... 5-6
5.5.1 Erasing individual radar map marks and lines ................................................. 5-6
5.5.2 Erasing all radar map marks and lines............................................................. 5-7
5.6 Radar Map Corrections.............................................................................................. 5-8
5.6.1 Radar map correction...................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.2 Cursor data correction..................................................................................... 5-8
5.7 Chart Cards (A, B, C and W types) ............................................................................ 5-9
5.7.1 Displaying a chart............................................................................................ 5-9
5.7.2 Chart position correction................................................................................ 5-10
5.7.3 Correcting cursor data................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.4 Chart land color (B, C and W types) .............................................................. 5-11
5.8 Hiding, Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter Display ........................................... 5-12
5.9 Track ....................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.9.1 Plotting own ships track ................................................................................ 5-13
5.9.2 Plotting interval for other ships' tracks ........................................................... 5-14
5.9.3 Auto target track (A, B, C and W types)......................................................... 5-15
5.9.4 Choosing track color (A, B, C and W types) .................................................. 5-15
5.9.5 Erasing track from the menu, on the screen .................................................. 5-16
5.9.6 Erasing track with the cursor ......................................................................... 5-17
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.10 Waypoints ................................................................................................................5-18

5.10.1 Entering waypoints.........................................................................................5-18
5.10.2 Editing, erasing waypoints from the menu......................................................5-20
5.10.3 Erasing waypoints..........................................................................................5-21
5.10.4 Waypoint list ..................................................................................................5-22
5.10.5 Displaying waypoint name and number..........................................................5-23
5.11 Nav Lines .................................................................................................................5-24
5.11.1 Entering a new nav line..................................................................................5-24
5.11.2 Editing a nav line ...........................................................................................5-25
5.11.3 Nav line list ....................................................................................................5-26
5.11.4 Erasing a nav line ..........................................................................................5-27
5.11.5 Setting up nav lines........................................................................................5-28
5.11.6 Displaying nav line, waypoint mark ................................................................5-30
5.12 Recording Data ........................................................................................................5-32
5.12.1 Initializing memory (RAM) cards ....................................................................5-32
5.12.2 Recording data ..............................................................................................5-33
5.13 Replaying Data.........................................................................................................5-35
5.14 Deleting Files ...........................................................................................................5-36
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................... 6-1

6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................ 6-2
6.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts .................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Replacing the Fuse ................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4 Replacement of Battery on GC Board ....................................................................... 6-4
6.5 Trackball Maintenance .............................................................................................. 6-5
6.6 Easy Troubleshooting................................................................................................ 6-6
6.7 Advanced-level Troubleshooting................................................................................ 6-7
6.8 Diagnostics ..............................................................................................................6-10
APPENDIX ...................................................................................................... AP-1

1. Menu Tree ...................................................................................................................AP-1
2. Digital Interface............................................................................................................AP-8
3. Parts Lists and Parts Location ...................................................................................AP-32
4. Longitude Error Table (on 96 nm range scale) ...........................................................AP-48
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................... SP-1
INDEX............................................................................................................... IN-1
Declaration of Conformity
x
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the FAR-28x7/FAR-21x7(-BB)
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR-28x7/FAR-21x7(-BB) Series Radar
and TT. We are confident you will see why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality
and reliability.
For 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative
and dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by
our extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your radar is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed,
operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended
procedures for operation and maintenance.
We would appreciate hearing from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our
purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment.
Features
High-resolution 20.1-inch LCD (FR-21x7) or 23.1-inch LCD (FR-28x7).
This series of radar and TT* (Target Tracking) are available in the models shown in the
table below. "BB" indicates blackbox configuration (monitor to be supplied locally) is
available.
* Formerly called "ARPA".
X-band S-band
Model Output TR config. Model Output TR config.
FAR-2117(-BB) 12 kW UP FAR-2137S(-BB) 30 kW UP
FAR-2127(-BB) 25 kW UP FAR-2837S 30 kW UP
FAR-2817 12 kW UP FAR-2837SW 30 kW DOWN
FAR-2827 25 kW UP FAR-2837SW 30 kW DOWN
FAR-2827W 25 kW DOWN
Two types of trackball-equipped control units are available: RCU-014 (full keyboard) and
the RCU-015 (palm control). The trackball is easy to use thanks to the ergonomically
designed palm rest.
Simplified operation with point-and-click menu operation.
All functions are accessible by using the trackball alone.
Applicable to HSC (High Speed Craft)
xi
FOREWORD
TT, AIS, Radar Plotter and Interswitch supplied as standard.

Meets the requirements in IEC62388 (Marine navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems Shipborne radar Performance requirements, method of
testing and required test results) and IMO MSC.192(79).
Target alarm watches for targets entering or exiting an alarm zone
TCPA/CPA alarms
Electronic parallel index lines
42 rpm antenna for high speed craft
Compliance with MED and R&TTE Directive

This radar compiles with MED 96/98/EC and its amendment 2002/75/EC of September 2,
2002 and also complies with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. In accordance with Article 6-3
of the above-mentioned R&TTE directive, FURUNO intends to put this radar on the market
of the following countries in EU as well other markets: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Denmark,
Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta,
Poland, Portugal, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, The Netherlands, United Kingdom, Iceland,
Norway.
xii
FOREWORD
Radar Type and Function Availability

This radar series is available in five specification types to meet the requirements of Authorities,
and function availability depends on specification type. The table below shows those functions
that have limited availability. This manual provides descriptions for all functions in this radar
series, and we have endeavored to denote in the text those functions that have limited
availability. For detailed information on function availability, see the menu tree in the Appendix.
IMO: IMO compliant
A: Near-IMO specifications
B: Non-Japanese fishing vessels
C: Japanese fishing vessels
W: Washington state (USA) ferry
Specification type and function availability
Type
Function
IMO A B C W
TT symbol No No Yes Yes Yes
selection
TT w/o gyro No No Yes Yes Yes
Acquisition Yes No No No No
zone range
limitation
Auto target No Yes Yes Yes Yes
track
Chart display No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color echo No No Yes Yes Yes
Cursor range No No Yes Yes No
unit selection
Cursor size No No Yes Yes No
Dual radar No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Echo area No No Yes Yes Yes
configuration
Mark color No No Yes Yes Yes
Mark w/line No No Yes Yes Yes
Pop-up No No Yes Yes Yes
guidance
Range 0.125, 0.25, Same as IMO 0.125, 0.25, Same as B Same as B
0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 2,
3, 6, 12, 24, 1.5, 3, 4, 6, 8,
48, 96 12, 16, 24, 32,
48, 96, 120
Range unit nm only nm only nm, sm, km, nm, sm, km, nm, sm, km,
kyd kyd kyd
Sub display No No Yes Yes Yes
VRM unit No No Yes Yes No
Track-Other No Yes Yes Yes Yes
ship
xiii
FOREWORD
Specification type and function availability (con't)

Type
Function
IMO A B C W
Trail Eraser No No Yes Yes No
Trails-Color No No Yes Yes Yes
Trails-Hide No No Yes Yes Yes
Trails-Long No No Yes Yes Yes(12H/24H)
Trails-Narrow No No Yes Yes Yes
WPT marker No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Signal Processing Functions

This radar has the signal processing functions described in the table below. All signal
processing functions are set with the Picture feature. See section 1.35 for additional
information.
Signal processing function Description Section

Interference rejector Suppress interference transmitted by other 1.25
radars. Interference received simultaneously from
many radars can be difficult to reduce.
Echo stretch Enlarge target echoes, especially small echoes. 1.26
Suppress interference, sea clutter and rain clutter
before using echo stretch, to prevent the
enlargement of unwanted echoes.
Echo averaging The radar samples echoes with each scan. 1.27
Targets that show a large change with each scan
are judged as clutter and are reduced to display
only echoes from legitimate targets.
Noise rejector Suppress white noise and increase the S/N ratio 1.28
to improve picture clarity.
Wiper Suppress unwanted echoes that appear after the 1.29
sweep completes a scan (within one second).
xiv
PROGRAM NUMBER
PC Board Program No. Version No.
MAIN 035-9204 03.** (Merchant)
RFC 035-9202 01.**
KEY(REMOTE) 035-9203 01.**
ARPA 035-9212 01.**
** Minor modification
xv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
See page xvi for detailed information about antenna units and radiators.
With FURUNO-supplied monitor

FAR-2137S/2837S/2837SW FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2827W
ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT
(Performance Monitor PM-51* built in) (Performance Monitor PM-31* built in)
Waveguide
Waveguide or (For FAR-2827W)
Coax cable
(For FAR-2837SW)
TRANSCEIVER UNIT TRANSCEIVER UNIT
RTR-082 RTR-081
For FAR-2837SW For FAR-2827W
MONITOR UNIT
MU-201CR
(FAR-21x7)
*
or
MU-231CR 24 VDC
(FAR-28x7)
RU-3423
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-014 115/230 VAC
POWER SUPPLY UNIT (Keyboard)
PSU-007 or
(For FAR-2137S/2837S) RCU-015 24 VDC
OR (Trackball) or
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PSU-011* 115/230 VAC
Control Unit
(For FAR-2827W/2837SW) RCU-016
(Remote)
* Russian flag only PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-013
Sub Display
Alarm
VDR
External Monitor
IEC-61162-1 Serial Data
(Input/Output) Navigator (INS, GPS, etc.)
: Standard Speed Log
(Input)
: Option
Gyrocompass
: Dockyard supply
AD-100
Category of Units AIS 100-230 VAC
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Track Control Unit
All other units: Protected from weather
Memory Card OR Memory Card
Interface Unit Switching Hub
Interface Unit
CU-200 x 2 HUB-100
CU-200
HUB has ports for connection of up to 7 processor units
AC spec
DC spec * These monitors have been approved by the IMO,

MU-201CR for CAT2, MU-231CR for CAT1.
Rectifier Transformer Unit If a different monitor is to be used, its effective diameter
RU-3424 RU-1803 must meet the applicable Category requirements:
RU-1746B-2 CAT 1: effective diameter 320 mm or higher
CAT 2: effective diameter 250 mm or higher
For installation and operation of other monitor,
see its manuals.
xvi
Antenna unit
FAR-2117, RSB-096 (24 rpm)

FAR-2117-BB, RSB-097 (42 rpm)
FAR-2127,
FAR-2127-BB,
FAR-2827
FAR-2137S, RSB-098/099 (21/26 rpm, 200 VAC, 3, 50 Hz; 220 VAC, 3, 60 Hz; 380
FAR-2137S-BB VAC, 3, 50 Hz, 440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz)
RSB-100/101/102 (45 rpm, 220 VAC, 3, 50/60 Hz(HSC);
440 VAC, 3, /60 Hz(HSC))
FAR-2827W RSB-103 (24 rpm, powered by processor unit)
FAR-2837S Same as FAR-2137S
FAR-2837SW RSB-104/105 (21/26 rpm, 200 VAC, 3, 50 Hz; 220 VAC, 3, 60 Hz; 380
VAC, 3, 50 Hz, 440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz)
Radiator
FAR-2117, FAR-2117-BB, XN12AF (4 ft), XN20AF (6.5 ft), XN24AF (8 ft)

FAR-2127, FAR-2127-BB,
FAR-2827
FAR-2137S, FAR-2137S-BB SN30AF (10 ft), SN36AF (12 ft)
FAR-2827W XN20AF (6.5 ft), XN24AF (8 ft)
FAR-2837S SN30AF (10 ft), SN36AF (12 ft)
FAR-2837SW SN30AF (10 ft), SN36AF (12 ft)
xvii
Blackbox type
FAR-2137S-BB FAR-2117-BB/2127-BB
(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in (Performance Monitor PM-31 built in
FAR-2137S-BB) FAR-2117-BB, FAR-2127-BB)
CONTROL UNIT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT RCU-014
PSU-007 (Keyboard)
(For FAR-2137S-BB/2837S-BB) or
RCU-015
(Trackball)
Control Unit
RCU-016
(Remote)
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-013
Sub Display
Alarm
VDR
External Monitor
: Standard Speed Log
(Input)
: Option Gyrocompass
: Dockyard supply
AD-100
Category of Units AIS 100-230 VAC
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Track Control Unit
Memory Card OR Memory Card
Interface Unit Switching Hub
Interface Unit
CU-200 x 2 HUB-100
CU-200
HUB has ports for connection of up to 7 processor units
AC spec
DC spec
Rectifier Transformer Unit

RU-3424 RU-1803
RU-1746B-2
xviii
Console type RCN-001/RCN-002

FAR-2137S/2837S/2837SW FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2827W
(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in) (Performance Monitor PM-31 built in)
Waveguide
Coax cable
(For FAR-2837SW)
RTR-082 RTR-081
CONSOLE
Alarm
RCN-001/002
VDR
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PSU-007
For FAR-2137S/2837S
OR External Monitor
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PSU-011*
(For FAR-2827W/2837SW)
* Russian flag only

Speed Log
(Input)
Gyrocompass
PROCESSOR
UNIT AD-100
RPU-013
AIS
: Standard
: Option OR Track Control Unit
: Dockyard supply May also 100-230 VAC
be installed
externally. Memory Card
Category of Units
Memory Card Interface Unit
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Switching Hub
Interface Unit CU-200
All other units: Protected from weather HUB-100 (Max. 2 total)
CU-200
AC spec
Transformer Unit
RU-1803
100-115 VAC/ 440 VAC

220-230 VAC 1, 50/60 Hz
1, 50/60 Hz
xix
Console type RCN-003/RCN-004

FAR-2137S/2837S/2837SW FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2827W
(Performance Monitor PM-51 built in) (Performance Monitor PM-31 built in)
Waveguide
Coax cable
(For FAR-2837SW)
RTR-082 RTR-081
CONSOLE
Alarm
RCN-003/004
POWER SUPPLY UNIT

PSU-007 VDR
For FAR-2137S/2837S
OR
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PSU-011* External Monitor
(For FAR-2827W/2837SW)
* Russian flag only

Speed Log
(Input)
Gyrocompass
PROCESSOR
UNIT AD-100
RPU-013
AIS
: Standard
Switching Hub
: Option HUB-100 Track Control Unit
: Dockyard supply
Category of Units
Antenna unit: Exposed to weather Memory Card Memory Card
Interface Unit Interface Unit
CU-200 CU-200
(Max. 2 total)
AC spec
Transformer Unit
RU-1803
100-115 VAC/ 440 VAC

220-230 VAC 1, 50/60 Hz
1, 50/60 Hz
xx
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.1 Turning on the Power
The [POWER] switch ( ) is located at the left corner of the control unit. Open the
POWER switch cover and press the switch to turn on the radar system. To turn
off the radar, press the switch again. The screen shows the bearing scale and
digital timer approximately 30 seconds after power-on. The timer counts down
three minutes of warm-up time. During this period the magnetron (transmitter
tube) is warmed for transmission. When the timer has reached 0:00, the
indication "ST-BY" appears at the screen center, meaning the radar is now ready
to transmit pulses.
In the stand-by condition, markers, rings, map, charts, etc. are not shown.
Further, TT and AIS are not shown.
In the warm-up and stand-by conditions, ON TIME and TX TIME count in hours
and tenths of hour appear at the screen center.
Note 1: Do not turn the power on directly after it has been turned off. Wait
several seconds before you reapply the power, to be sure the radar
starts up properly.
Note 2: Parameters set on the menus are stored in a non-volatile memory (flash
memory), and are preserved when the power is turned off.
1.2 Transmitter ON
After the power is turned on and the magnetron has warmed up, ST-BY appears
at the screen center, meaning the radar is ready to transmit radar pulses. You
may transmit by pressing the [STBY/TX] key on the full keyboard, or use the
trackball to select the TX STBY box at the bottom left corner of the display then
push the left button (above the trackball). The label at the left-hand side of the
guidance box at the bottom right corner of the screen changes from TX to STBY.
TX
STBY STBY / Guidance
box
TX STBY box
Radar display
1-1
1. RADAR OPERATION
The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse length. Other
settings such as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and menu option selections are
also set to previous settings.
The [STBY/TX] key (or TX STBY box) toggles the radar between STBY and
TRANSMIT status. The antenna stops in stand-by and rotates in transmit. The
magnetron ages with time resulting in a reduction of output power. Therefore, it
is highly recommended that the radar be set to stand-by when not used for an
extended period of time.
How to stop antenna rotation

Antenna rotation can be stopped. One method is to turn off the antenna switch
on the radar. The other method is to stop rotation from the menu. For how to
stop rotation from the menu, see the installation manual.
Picture freeze
When the picture freezes the picture is not updated. 30 seconds after the picture
freezes, the buzzer sounds, the [ALARM ACK] key blinks and the alarm contact
signal is output. Reset the power to restore normal operation.
Quick start
Provided that the radar was once in use with the transmitter tube (magnetron)
still warm, you can turn the radar into TRANSMIT condition without three
minutes of warm-up. If the [POWER] switch was turned off by mistake or the like
and you wish to restart the radar promptly, turn on the [POWER] switch not later
than 10 seconds after power-off.
Echo area
The echo display area for the B, C and W types is available in three
configurations: round, wide, and full screen. You can select a configuration with 7
ECHO AREA on the ECHO menu.
Round Wide Full
1-2
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.3 Control Unit

Two types of control units are available: Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)
and Control Unit RCU-105 (palm control).
EBL rotary control VRM rotary control
Scrollwheel
Left button Right button
BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN
OFF ON OFF ON
1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE
4 5 6
F1 F2 OFF CU/TM INDEX MENU ACQ
CENTER RESET LINE
F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 TARGET
CANCEL ENTER
ACK TX TRAILS BRILL MARK
- CANCEL
Trackball Trackball
Module
Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)
Scrollwheel
Left button Right button
F1
Trackball
F2
F3
Trackball
F4 Module
Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control)
1-3
1. RADAR OPERATION
Control description
Control Description
Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)
POWER Turns the system on and off.
EBL and VRM rotary controls Adjust EBL and VRM, respectively.
EBL ON, EBL OFF Turns the EBLs on and off, respectively.
F1-F4 Execute menu short cut assigned.
ALARM ACK Silences audio alarm.
STBY TX Toggles between stand-by and transmit.
BRILL Adjusts display brilliance.
A/C RAIN Suppresses rain clutter.
A/C SEA Suppresses sea clutter.
GAIN Adjusts sensitivity of the radar receiver.
HL OFF Temporarily erases the heading line while pressed.
EBL OFFSET Enables, disables the offset EBL. In menu operation, switches
polarity from North to South and East to West and vice versa.
MODE Selects a presentation mode.
OFF CENTER Shifts own ship position.
CU/TM RESET Moves own ship position in 75% radius in stern direction.
Resets the heading line to 0 in course-up and true motion
modes.
INDEX LINE Turns parallel index (PI) lines on and off.
VECTOR TIME Selects vector time (length).
VECTOR MODE Selects vector mode, relative or true.
TARGET LIST Displays data for all tracked targets (AIS and TT).
CANCEL TRAILS Cancels all target trails. In menu operation it clears a line of
data.
ENTER MARK Enters marks; terminates keyboard input.
VRM ON, VRM OFF Turns the VRMs on and off, respectively.
MENU Opens and closes the MAIN menu; closes other menus.
ACQ Acquires a target for TT after choosing it with the trackball.
RANGE Selects radar range.
TARGET DATA Display or erase target data for TT or AIS target chosen with
trackball. For AIS, changes sleeping target to activated target.
TARGET CANCEL TT: Cancel tracking on target.
AIS: Sleep an activated target.
Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control)
POWER Turns the system on and off.
F1-F4 Execute menu short cut assigned.
1-4
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.4 Main Menu

You may access the MAIN menu from the full keyboard or by using the trackball.
In later sections only the procedure for menu operation by trackball is given.
Main menu operation by keyboard

1. Press the [MENU] key. The MAIN menu appears in the text area at the right
side of the screen.
[MAIN MENU]
1 [ECHO] Echo processing functions

2 [MARK] Mainly turns markers on/off.
3 [ALARM] Sets guard alarm functions; outputs alarm signal.
4 [TT AIS] Sets TT and AIS functions.
5 [PLOTTER] Chart and track functions
6 [CARD] Memory card functions
7 [NAV DATA] Turns nav data on/off.
8 [NAV LINE WPT] Processes nav lines and waypoints.
9 [CUSTOMIZE TEST] Customizes operation; executes diagnostics.
MAIN menu
2. Press the numeral key corresponding to the menu you wish to open. For
example, press the [2] key to open the MARK menu.
[MARK]
1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/MIN/SCALED
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 [PI LINE]
5 ANCHOR WATCH
OFF/ON
0.0NM
6 DROP MARK
OFF/ON
7 [INS MARK] *1
8 EBL OFFSET BASE
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]*2 *1 [BARGE MARK] depending on installation preset.
0 RING *2 IMO and A types show
OFF/ON 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL/TRUE)
MARK menu
3. Press the numeral key applicable to the item
you wish to set. Useful keys in menu operation
4. Consecutively press the same numeral key To clear a line of numeric data:
pressed at step 3 to select appropriate Use the [CANCEL TRAILS] key.
option then press the [ENTER MARK] key to Switch between plus and minus,
North and South or East and West:
confirm your selection. Use the [2] key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1-5
1. RADAR OPERATION
Main menu operation by trackball

1. Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen. The
guidance box at the bottom right corner (see the illustration at the bottom of
the next page for location) now reads "DISP MAIN MENU."
2. Push the left button to display the MAIN menu.
[MAIN MENU]
1 [ECHO] Echo processing functions

2 [MARK] Mainly turns markers on/off.
3 [ALARM] Sets guard alarm functions; outputs alarm signal.
4 [TT AIS] Sets TT and AIS functions.
5 [PLOTTER] Chart and track functions
6 [CARD] Memory card functions
7 [NAV DATA] Turns nav data on/off.
8 [NAV LINE WPT] Processes nav lines and waypoints.
9 [CUSTOMIZE TEST] Customizes operation; executes diagnostics.
MAIN menu
3. Roll the scrollwheel or trackball to select a menu and push the left button. For
example, select the 2 [MARK] menu.
[MARK]
1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/MIN/SCALED
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 [PI LINE]
5 ANCHOR WATCH
OFF/ON
0.0NM
6 DROP MARK
OFF/ON
7 [INS MARK] *1
8 EBL OFFSET BASE
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
MARK menu
4. Use the trackball to select a menu item and push the left button.
5. Roll the scrollwheel to select an option and push the left button to validate
your selection.
6. Push the right button consecutively to close the menu. (Several pushes may
be necessary depending on the menu used.)
Note: Hereafter all menu procedures are described using the trackball module
(trackball, scrollwheel, buttons). For sake of brevity we write, "Select [menu item]
(or [menu option])" where you roll the scrollwheel and push the left button (or
scrollwheel) to complete a task on the menu.
1-6
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.5 Operation by the On-Screen Boxes

All radar functions can be accessed by using the trackball alone. This is done by
choosing the appropriate on-screen box with the trackball and operating the
trackball module to select item and option. (See section 1.9 for location of all
on-screen boxes.) On-screen boxes come in two varieties: Function selection
and function selection w/pop-up menu. On-screen boxes of the latter type have
"" at the right side of their boxes, as in the MARK box shown below.
To operate the radar using on-screen boxes, do the following:
1. Use the trackball to place the trackball marker inside the box desired.
Note: The trackball marker changes its configuration according to its location.
It is an arrow when placed outside the effective display and a cursor
(+) when inside the effective display. See the illustration on the next
page for further details.
For example, select the MARK box, which is at the bottom left corner.
MARK
Mark type last
1
selected, mark -> +
number 162.5T 11.7 NM
Bearing and range from
own ship to mark
MARK box
When a box is correctly selected, its color changes from green to orange and
the guidance box at the bottom right corner shows operational guidance. The
operational guidance shows the function of the left and right buttons, with a
diagonal line separating the information. For the MARK box, for example, the
operational guidance is "MARK SELECT / MARK MENU." In this case you
would push the left button to select a mark or push the right button to open
the MARK menu.
Function of left button
Function of right button
MARK
MARK Box 1
>+
MARK
/
SELECT
MARK
MENU
Guidance box
Arrow
For choosing
on-screen box
Guidance box (Example: guidance for MARK box)
1-7
1. RADAR OPERATION
Trackball marker location and guidance box indication

The trackball marker is either a cursor (+) or an arrow ( ) depending
on whether it is within or outside the display area, respectively.
Further, the indication in the guidance box changes according to
trackball marker location.
Guidance box reads

"JUMP CURSOR / DISP MENU."
Push the left button to choose the on-screen
box closest to the arrow or push the right
button to display the MAIN menu.
To choose boxes successively, push the wheel

when the guidance box reads as above.
Then, the nearest box is selected and marked
Trackball marker is out of with the double-ended arrow ( ) and the
effective display area guidance box reads
(incl. text area) and "JUMP FORWARD / JUMP BACKWARD."
not selecting a box: Hit the left button to go to the box below or
The trackball marker is adjacent to the currently selected box or hit
an arrow the right button to go to the box above or
adjacent to the currently selected box.
Continue pushing a button to choose boxes
successively. This is convenient for operation
under heavy pitching and rolling. To cancel this
feature, push the wheel when the guidance box
reads as above.
Guidance box reads

"TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU."
In this condition you may access cursor-operated
functions, by hitting the left button for direct
+ selection of function or the right button to choose
desired functions from the CURSOR menu. For
further details about the CURSOR menu,
see section 1.6.
Trackball marker is within

effective display area:
The trackball marker is
a cursor.
2. Push the left button (or roll the scrollwheel depending on the box) until the
desired option is displayed in the box.
Note: When you selected an on-screen boxs option by rolling the
scrollwheel, the box and its contents turn orange. This simply indicates
that the selected setting is different from the currently active setting. To
change the setting, push the scrollwheel or the left button. If neither
the scrollwheel nor the left button is pushed within about 30 seconds
after operating the scrollwheel, the previous setting is automatically
restored.
1-8
1. RADAR OPERATION
3. The pop-up menu attached to the MARK box is the MARK menu. To open the
menu, push the right button. The menu opens in the text area at the right side
of the screen.
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00000.00 N
000000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
0 MAP MARK COLOR* * Not available on IMO
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/ or A type
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK menu
Note:Any menu may be operated from the full keyboard or with the trackball,
or a combination of the two in case of Control Unit RCU-014. Note
that in later sections only the procedure for menu operation by
the trackball is given.
4. Select item desired. Selected item is initially shown in reverse video and
changes to normal video and circumscribed when the scrollwheel or the left
button is pushed.
5. Select option desired. Selected option is initially shown in reverse video and
changes to normal video and circumscribed when the scrollwheel or the left
button is pushed.
6. Push the right button to close the menu. (On some menus several presses of
the right button are required to close the menu.)
1-9
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.6 Cursor Menu

Functions that require the use of the cursor, such
as EBL offset and zoom, may be activated directly [CURSOR MENU]
from the guidance box or from the CURSOR menu, 2
either method with the cursor inside the effective TARGET DATA & ACQ/
TARGET CANCEL/
display area. Below is the procedure for choosing a TT TGT DATA & ACQ/
cursor-related function from the CURSOR menu. In TARGET TRACK ON*1/
later sections only the procedure for selection from TARGET TRACK OFF*1/
REF MARK/
the guidance box is given.
EBL OFFSET/
OFFCENTER/
1. Put the cursor inside the effective display area. ZOOM/
MARK DELETE/
2. Roll the scrollwheel to show "TARGET DATA &
OWN TRACK DELETE/
ACQ / CURSOR MENU" in the guidance box. TGT TRACK DELETE*1/
3. Push the right button to show the CURSOR CHART ALIGN
menu. TRAIL ERASER*1, *2/
8
4. Select "2" then push the left button. 9 CURSOR*1, *2
5. Select function desired then push the left SMALL/LARGE
button. *1 Not available on IMO type
Note: For operation from the keyboard, you may *1 Not available on A type
press the [2] key to select a function in
top-to-bottom order or the [8] key to select in reverse order.
Cursor Menu item Description

TARGET DATA & ACQ TT: Acquires target; displays data for selected tracked target.
AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; display data for selected AIS
target.
TARGET CANCEL TT: Cancels tracking on selected tracked target.
AIS: Sleeps selected AIS target.
TT TARGET DATA & ACQ Acquires selected echo as tracked target.
TARGET TRACK ON Turns target track for TT on.
TARGET TRACK OFF Turns target track for TT off.
REF MARK Inscribes reference mark, for target-based speed input.
EBL OFFSET Offsets EBL to measure range and bearing between two targets.
OFF CENTER Shifts screen center to selected location.
ZOOM Zooms selected location.
MARK DELETE Deletes selected mark (plotter mark, origin mark or waypoint
mark).
OWN TRACK DELETE Deletes own ships tracks.
TGT TRACK DELETE Deletes other ships tracks.
CHART ALIGN Aligns chart with radar picture.
TRAIL ERASER Erases trails. (A, B and C types)
CURSOR SIZE Selects cursor size. (A, B and C types)
6. The guidance box shows "XX / EXIT." (XX = function selected). Use the
trackball to put the cursor where desired.
7. Push the left button to execute the function selected at step 5.
8. To quit the function selected, push the right button when the guidance box
shows "XX / EXIT." (XX = function selected at step 5)
1-10
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.7 Monitor Brilliance

The brilliance of the entire screen should be adjusted according to lighting
conditions. Monitor brilliance should be adjusted before adjusting relative
brilliance levels on the BRILL menu to be explained later.
Note: The brilliance of a commercial monitor cannot be adjusted from the radar.
See the owners manual of the commercial monitor for how to adjust its
brilliance.
By keyboard
Operate the [BRILL] control on the control unit to adjust brilliance. Turn it
clockwise to increase brilliance; counterclockwise to decrease brilliance. Watch
the BRILL box (see illustration below) to know current brilliance level.
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the brilliance level indicator in the
brilliance level indication box at the bottom left corner of the screen.
Brilliance bar
Shows brilliance level.
Place arrow inside box
to adjust screen brilliance.
BRILL1 26
Brilliance level
Brillance, color set no.

(For details, see para. 1.50.)
Brilliance level indicator
2. Roll the scrollwheel downward to increase brilliance or roll it upward to
decrease brilliance. The length of the brilliance bar increases or decreases
with operation of the scrollwheel.
Note: If nothing appears on the screen at power-up when using Control Unit
RCU-015 (palm control) or when the radar is in stand-by, press and hold
down any key except the power switch for four seconds to automatically
set up for medium display brilliance.
1-11
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.8 Display Modes

This radar has the following display modes:
IMO, A type: Radar, Radar + Plotter, Anchor (Watch)
B, C, W type: Radar, Radar + Plotter, Plotter
Select a display mode as below. Note that a display mode cannot be selected
when the menu is open.
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow in the DISPLAY MODE box at the top of
the screen.
DISPLAY
XX* * XX = display mode
DISPLAY MODE box

2. Push the left button to select appropriate mode.
Radar: Radar display
+Plotter Radar display, plotter display*
Plotter: Plotter display*
Anchor watch: Plotter display*
* Requires chart card.
Note 1: The radar echo related boxes (STBY/TX, PI line, target alarm, etc.) are
inoperative in the anchor watch and plotter modes.
Note 2: Changing to plotter or anchor watch stops radar transmission.
1-12
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.9 On-Screen Boxes and Markers

Trial Maneuver (Elapsed time shown
when trial maneuver is active.)
PICTURE Box, Main Picture Settings
Range, Bearing and TTG to cursor position
PULSELENGTH Box
ANTENNA Box Cursor Position Box
PRESENTATION MODE Box SET and DRIFT Boxes
RANGE Box GAIN Setting
REF POINT
Setting A/C SEA Setting
DISPLAY
MODE A/C RAIN Setting
Box TUNING Setting
NM DISPLAY GAIN
6 /1 RADAR REF POINT
ANT
SET 000. 0T
DRIFT 0. 0kn
SEA AUTO
25
22 HDG 000.0T Heading
HEAD UP TB RM 350 000 010
RAIN
TUNE AUTO
19
SPD 0.0kn LOG
BT
Speed, Source
ANT 1 X-BAND
340 020 SB 0.0kn Log Speed
3440. 649 N
PULSE S1 330 030 + 13518. 303 E COG 00.0T Course over Ground
GPS
PICTURE4
320 TTG 312.3R SOG 0.0kn Speed over Ground,
040 00:11 1.864NM OS POSN
IR OFF
3440.00N Source
ES OFF Heading TRIAL OFF DGPS 13524.00E Position
EAV OFF 310 Line 050
AUTO RAIN
OFF
AtoN MENU MENU Box
300 AIS +
060
PI Base ZOOM or TT
Line Station DATA BOX
290 070 Range (See next page.)
Rings
280 Acquisition 080 ZOOM, TT,
Zone
Cursor or AIS DATA BOX
270 No. 1 090 (See next page.)
EBL TARGET LIST Box
WATCH Box
260 100 Chart Align ON
Own Ship
No. 2 Marker TT,
250 EBL Drop 110
AIS DATA BOX
No. 2
No. 1 Mark VRM TT ACQ MODE Box
240 VRM CHART ASSOCIATION ON/OFF
120 ALIGN
PI 1 ON Stern North WATCH
11 : 28
AIS DISP Box
032. 0T 230 Marker Marker 130
5. 60NM
MARK MAP
TARGET
LIST
OFF TT < AIS
FILT
DISP
AIS Message Arrvl
VECTOR REL 30M
ON 220 140 AZ1 PAST POSN REL 3M
ORIGIN* AZ2
+ CPA LIMIT 0. 5NM 22MIN
210 150 ALARM1 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE OFF
190.0T, 5.75NM ALARM2 LOST TARGET ALARM OFF
BRILL1 26 200 160 TRUE-S TRAIL OFF
HL
190 180 170 00:00 CU/TM ALERT BOX
OFF EBL1 >280.9T< VRM1 >3.682NM< RESET (See next page.)
TX
DROP1 Origin Mark DROP2 ALARM TARGET
STBY EBL2 240. 8T 229.8T 4.532NM VRM2 5.221NM ACK DATA & ACQ
CURSOR
MENU
CU/TM Guidance Box

EBL2 Box Drop Mark RESET,
EBL1 Box data ALARM ACK LOST TARGET Box
* W-type only. Denotes mark
Box CPA AUTO Box
TX/STBY Box
selection:
HL OFF Box ORIGIN: Origin mark CPA LIMIT Box
BRILL Box MAP: Map mark PAST POSN Box
OS: Own ship shape VRM2 Box
MARK Box VRM1 Box (w/TTG) TT VECTOR Box
Bearing and range to mark TRAIL MODE Box
PI line number TARGET ALARM Box
PI line orientation AZ (Acquisition Zone) Box
PI line interval
Markers and indications
Viewing distance
The optimal viewing distances for the radar display units are as follows:
- MU-170C: 920 mm
- MU-201CR: 1080 mm
- MU-231CR: 1200 mm
1-13
1. RADAR OPERATION
Heading is TRUE
HDG 242.2T (variation-corrected gyro or
SPD 9.9kn BT WT
MAN
magnetic heading)
SB 0.1kn Speed data is LOG, MAN, etc.,
COG 30.2T showing sensor and types.
SOG 10.2.2kn GPS CTW when water tracking mode
is selected.
OS POSN
3440.00N STW when water tracking
Electronic Position-fixing
DGPS 13524.00E mode is selected.
System and position*
Depth DEPTH 22.30 m WIND 15.4 m/s Wind Speed and Angle*
45.1T (True or Relative angle)
20
N
Depth Echogram 40
60 Tide relative to North,
(See section 1.41.) 80 W E full scale 10 kn
-30 20 10
100 Wind direction relative to
S
CURRENT 2.3kn 69.9R own ship heading, full
Zoom display appears
TEMP 16C TTG 00:00:00 scale 100 kn.
in nav data box when WPT001 6.5NM 35.2R
nav data is turned off. DATE OCT/25/03 10:00 UTC Current speed and direction*
Water temperature, TTG,
TT Target Data WPT no., range and bearing
(or Zoom) to waypoint
Date, time
* Referenced to ship's heading

(relative) in head-up,
head-up TB and course-up.
Referenced to North (true) in
north-up and true motion.
TT TARGET For presentation mode
TT Target Data
No. 42 description, see section 1.12.
(See Chapter 3.)
BRG 25.5T
RNG 3.4NM EPFS shall meet the requirements
R COG 264.0T of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73).
* GPS, DGPS, R SOG 12.3KN
PPS, RTK, FRTK, CPA 2.9NM
DR. PPS, RTK TCPA 12.2MIN
and FRTK require BCR 1.7NM
BCT 20MIN
GGA sentence.
TT, AIS Functions Box
- - - - - SYSTEM ERROR - - - - - Alert Box

Messages for sensor error,
VIDEO
system error, alarms and
- - - - - - - - - WARNING - - - - - - - - warning.
FORMAT CARD DATA See section 1.44 for details.
Guidance Box
Data fields
1-14
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.10 Tuning the Receiver

1.10.1 Choosing the tuning method
The tuning method can be selected with the TUNE box at the top of the screen.
1. Select the TUNE box (TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN) at the top of the screen.
Tuning bar
Place arrow inside box

to adjust tuning, when
TUNE MAN is selected.
Tuning method (AUTO or MAN) TUNE AUTO
Tuning level
TUNE box
2. Push the left button or scrollwheel to display TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN as
appropriate.
3. If you used the scrollwheel to select tuning method, push the scrollwheel or
the left button to change setting.
1.10.2 Initializing tuning

Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation. However, if you feel that
automatic tuning is not working properly try re-initializing it as follows:
1. Left-click the MENU box to open the menu.

2. Select 1 [ECHO].
[ECHO]
1 BACK
ND
2 2 ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM*1
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
7 ECHO AREA*2 *1 Not available on FAR-2157/2167DS
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL *2 Not available on IMO or A type
8 [PICTURE SELECT]
9 STC RANGE
+00
ECHO menu
3. Select 3 TUNE INITIALIZE. (For operation from the keyboard, press the
[ENTER MARK] key.) "WARNING TUNE INITIALIZE" appears in the Alert
Box during the initialization.
4. Push the right button twice to close the menu.
1-15
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.10.3 Automatic tuning

Select automatic tuning following section 1.10.1. The TUNE box shows TUNE
AUTO.
1.10.4 Manual tuning

1. Select the 48-mile range from the RANGE box. Push the left button to lower
the range; the right button to raise the range.
2. Select manual tuning following the procedure in section 1.10.1.
3. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the tuning bar area in the TUNE box.
4. Roll the scrollwheel to adjust tuning. The best tuning point is where the bar
graph swings maximum. The arrow below the bar graph shows tuning control
position; not the tuning condition.
1.11 Aligning Heading with Gyrocompass

With connection of a gyrocompass, ship's heading is displayed at the right side
of the screen. Turn on the radar and match the on-screen GYRO readout with
the gyrocompass reading as shown below. Once you have set the initial heading
correctly, resetting is not usually required. This alignment is not necessary for
the FURUNO SC-60/120 Satellite Compass.
1. Right-click the HDG box at the top right corner of the screen.
[HDG MENU]
1 HDG SOURCE
AD-10/SERIAL
2 GC-10 SETTING
000.0
HDG menu
2. Roll the scrollwheel downward to select GC-10 SETTING.
Note: If the heading source selected is not suitable change it at 1 HDG
SOURCE to match your heading source.
3. Roll the scrollwheel to set the heading. (For entry through the keyboard, use
the numeric keys.)
4. Push the scrollwheel to finish.
5. Push the right button to close the menu.
1-16
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.12 Presentation Modes

This radar has the following presentation modes:
Relative Motion (RM)

Head-up: Unstabilized
Head-up TB: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing)
where the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading.
Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ships orientation at the time of
selecting course-up.
North-up: Compass-stabilized with reference to north
Stern-up: The radar image is rotated 180. Graphics and relative and true
bearings are also rotated 180.
True Motion (TM)

Land objects and sea are stationary. Requires compass and speed data.
1.12.1 Choosing presentation mode

By keyboard
Press the [MODE] key consecutively to select presentation mode desired. The
PRESENTATION MODE box shows the current presentation mode. (See the
illustration below.)
By trackball
Left-click the PRESENTATION MODE box at the top left corner of the screen to
select a presentation mode.
HEAD UP RM*
* = Other modes:
STERN-UP, HEAD UP TB RM, COURSE UP RM,
NORTH UP RM, NORTH UP TM
PRESENTATION MODE box
Loss of gyrocompass signal

When the compass signal is lost, "GYRO" appears in red in the Alert Box, the
presentation mode automatically becomes head-up, and TT and AIS targets,
map and chart are erased. After restoring the compass signal, "HEADING SET"
appears in the Alert Box. Then, select a presentation mode with the [MODE] key
or the PRESENTATION MODE box.
1-17
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.12.2 Description of presentation modes

Head-up mode
The head-up mode is a display in which the line connecting own ship and the top
of the display indicates own ships heading.
The target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions
relative to own ships heading.
A short line on the bearing scale is the north marker indicating heading sensor
north. A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the north marker to
disappear and the readout to show ***.* and the message HDG SIG MISSING
appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
Heading Line
North Marker
Note: When display is off-centered,

the heading mark appears at 000 degrees.
Head-up mode
Course-up mode
The course-up mode is an azimuth-stabilized display in which a line connecting
the center with the top of the display indicates own ships intended course
(namely, own ships previous heading just before this mode has been selected).
Target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions
relative to the intended course, which is maintained at the 0-degree position. The
heading line moves in accordance with ships yawing and course change. This
mode is useful to avoid smearing of picture during course change.
North Marker Heading Line
Course-up mode
1-18
1. RADAR OPERATION
Head-up TB (True Bearing) mode

Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the head-up mode. The
difference from normal head-up presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing
scale. The bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in
accordance with the heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ships
heading at a glance.
This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyrocompass.

If the gyrocompass fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of head-up mode.
North-up mode
The north-up mode paints target pips at their measured distances and in their
true (heading sensor) directions from own ship, north bearing maintained at the
top of the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to the ships
heading. Requires heading signal.
If the compass fails, the presentation mode changes to head-up and the north
marker disappears. Also, the HDG indication shows ***.*. And the message
HDG SIG MISSING appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
North-up mode
1-19
1. RADAR OPERATION
Stern-up mode
The stern-up mode rotates the head-up mode picture, relative and true bearings
and display graphics 180. This mode is useful on dual-radar tugboats when
backing up; one radar shows head-up and another shows stern-up. To enable
the stern-up mode, turn on STERN-UP on the 7 OPERATION menu.
Stern-up mode
1-20
1. RADAR OPERATION
True motion mode

Own ship and other moving objects move in accordance with their true courses
and speed. In ground stabilized TM, all fixed targets, such as landmasses,
appear as stationary echoes. In the sea stabilized TM without set and drift inputs,
the landmass can move on the screen. Note that true motion is not available on
the 72 nm (non-IMO type only) or 96 nm range scale. If COG and SOG (both
over the ground) are not available on TM mode, enter the set (tide direction) and
drift (tide speed) manually referring to the Tide Table.
When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 50% of the radius of the
display, own ship position is automatically reset to a point of 75% radius opposite
to the extension of the heading line passing through the display center. You may
also reset the own ship symbol manually by pressing the [CU/TM RESET] key,
or left-clicking the CU/TM RESET box at the bottom right corner of the display.
If the heading sensor fails, the mode is changed to the head-up and the north
marker disappears. The HDG readout shows ***.* and the message HDG SIG
MISSING appears in red at the lower-right corner of the screen.
Note: A part of the bearing scale is drawn differently depending on antenna

reference position.
ANT: Bearing scale interval is different when display is offcentered.
CONN: A part of the bearing scale is not displayed if the conning position is not
within the radar display area.
True motion mode

Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode
North
Heading marker
line
(a) True motion (b) Own ship has reached a (c) Own ship is automatically
is selected point 75% of display radius reset to 75% of radius
1-21
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.13 Entering Own Ship's Speed

The TT and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed input
and compass signal. The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS (SOG)
or manually on the menu. Note that FURUNO GPS Navigator GP-90 provides
COG and SOG.
1.13.1 Automatic speed input by log or GPS navigator

1. Right-click the SPD box at the top right corner of the screen.
[SPEED MENU]
1 SHIP SPEED
LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/
GPS/MANUAL/REF
2 MANUAL SPEED
0.0kn
3 SET DRIFT
OFF/ON
SPEED menu
2. Select 1 SHIP SPEED.
3. Select the appropriate source for automatic speed input then push the left
button.
LOG (BT): Log, speed over ground (SOG). Note that a log cannot
produce BT (Bottom Tracking) speed in deep waters without
set and drift entry.
LOG (WT): Log, speed thru water (STW)
GPS: Speed input by GPS navigator
Notes on speed input

IMO Resolution A.823(19) for TT recommends that a speed log to be
interfaced with a TT should be capable of providing through-the-water speed
(forward speed).
Be sure not to select a LOG option when a speed log is not connected. If the
log signal is not provided, the ship speed readout at the top of the screen will
be blank. In the event of a log error, enter speed manually.
Warning label SPD **.* and LOG appear if no log signal is present for 30 s
while the ships speed has been more than 5 kn.
With the serial speed inputs and SOG selection, if the type of data is changed
from SOG to STW the label SOG appears in red (at the upper right corner of
the display).
On the IMO type, MANUAL and REF are shown in gray to indicate they are
not available for selection.
A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from
the leeway direction.
1-22
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.13.2 Manual speed input

If the speed log is not working, enter speed manually as below. In this case the
speed data type is shown as MANUAL and is speed thru water (STW). Manual
speed input is not available on the IMO radar when the AIS feature is active.
1. Right-click the SPD box at the top right corner of the screen to display the
SPEED menu.
2. Select 1 SHIP SPEED.
3. Select MANUAL then push the left button.
4. Select 2 MANUAL SPEED.
5. Roll the scrollwheel to set speed. (For entry through the keyboard, use the
numeric keys.)
6. Push the left button to confirm setting.
1.14 Choosing a Range Scale

The selected range scale, range ring interval and pulselength are shown at the
upper left corner on the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce
the range scale so that it appears in 50-90% of the display radius.
By keyboard
Use the [RANGE] key to select range desired. Hit the "+" part of the key to raise
the range; the "-" part to lower the range.
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to select the RANGE box at the top left corner of the screen.
The guidance box shows "RANGE DOWN / RANGE UP."
0.125 NM0.025
RANGE box
2. Push the left button to lower the range; the right button to raise the range.
You may also select the range by rolling the scrollwheel then pushing it or the
left button.
1-23
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.15 Choosing a Pulselength

The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen using
the indications shown in the table below.
Label and pulselength
X-band 10, 25 kW, S-band 30 kW

Indication Pulselength (s)
S1 (Short pulse 1) 0.07
S2 (Short pulse 2) 0.15
M1 (Medium pulse 1) 0.3
L (Long pulse) 1.2
Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys.
If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength settings, you may change
them as shown below.
1.15.1 Choosing a pulselength

You can select the pulselength for the 0.5 to 24 nm range scales as below.
1. Right-click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to show the
PICTURE menu.
Note: The PICTURE box sets up the radar picture according to expected
usage, such as harbor navigation, long range, short range, etc. For
further details see section 1.35.
[PICTURE MENU]
1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON
5 AUTO STC
OFF/ON
6 AUTO RAIN
OFF/1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
1/2/3/4/
A/B/C
8 [PULSE]
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT
NO/SAVE/USER/
FACTORY PICTURE menu
1-24
1. RADAR OPERATION
2. Select 8 [PULSE].
[PULSE MENU]
1 BACK
2 0.5NM
S1/S2
3 0.75NM
S1/S2/M1
4 1.5NM
S1/S2/M1
5 3NM
S2/M1/M2/M3
6 6NM
M1/M2/M3/L
7 12-24NM
M2/M3/L
PULSE menu
3. Select a range then push the left button.

4. Select pulselength desired then push the left button.
1.15.2 Changing pulselength

1. Use the trackball to select the PULSELENGTH box at the left side of the
screen. The guidance box shows "PULSE SHORTER / PULSE LONGER."
PULSE XX*
* XX = Pulse width setting
PULSELENGTH box
2. Push the left button to shorten the pulselength or the right button to lengthen
the pulselength. You may also select the pulselength by rolling the
scrollwheel and pushing it or the left button.
1-25
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.16 Adjusting the Sensitivity

The gain control adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen.
If you set up for too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other
hand excessive sensitivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may
be missed because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the
background noise on the display.
To adjust receiver sensitivity, adjust the gain control so background noise is just
visible on the screen.
By keyboard
While monitoring the gain level indicator at the top of the screen, operate the
[GAIN] control to adjust the sensitivity.
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the gain level indicator at the top of
the screen.
Level bar
Place arrow inside
window to adjust gain.
GAIN 30
GAIN level indicator

2. Roll the scrollwheel downward to increase the gain or upward to decrease it.
100 levels (0-100) are available.
1-26
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.17 Reducing Sea Clutter

Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals
known as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above
the water, the further the clutter extends. When sea clutter masks the picture,
reduce it by the A/C SEA control, either manually or automatically.
Note 1: When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is
decreased more than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust
them carefully.
Note 2: The echo average (see 1.27) is useful for reducing reflections from the
sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than
stationary ones when the echo average is active.
1.17.1 Choosing method of adjustment

1. Use the trackball to select SEA AUTO or SEA MAN (whichever is shown) at
the top of the display.
Level bar
Place arrow inside window
to adjust A/C SEA.
SEA AUTO 30
A/C SEA adjustment

method (SEA AUTO or SEA MAN)
A/C SEA level indicator

2. Push the left button to display SEA AUTO or SEA MAN as appropriate.
1.17.2 Automatic reduction of sea clutter

Auto A/C SEA allows for fine tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within 20 dB.
Accordingly, with the bar reading set to 100, gain is not lowered to minimum as
with manual A/C SEA on close-in ranges. Further, the auto A/C SEA level is low
because the average value of the original input echo is low in areas where there
are no sea surface reflections. For example, when the ship is alongside a quay
and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and sea, you can observe
the size of the echoes because the STC curve changes with the size of the
echoes.
Note: The auto A/C function can erase weak target echoes. Adjust the control
carefully, watching the display.
By keyboard
1. Select SEA AUTO following the procedure in section 1.17.1.
2. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, adjust the A/C SEA with the [A/C
SEA] control. 100 levels are available.
1-27
1. RADAR OPERATION
By trackball
1. Select SEA AUTO following the procedure in section 1.17.1.
2. Use the trackball to place the arrow in the A/C SEA level indicator at the top
of the display.
3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, roll the scrollwheel downward to
increase the A/C SEA or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are
available.
1.17.3 Manual reduction of sea clutter

The A/C SEA control reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where
clutter is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range
increases, so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea
clutter.
The proper setting of the A/C SEA should be such that the clutter is broken up
into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable. If the setting is set too
low, targets will be hidden in the clutter, while if the setting is too high, both sea
clutter and targets will disappear from the display. In most cases adjust the
control until clutter has disappeared to leeward, but a little is still visible
windward. Be careful not to remove all sea clutter, because you may erase weak
echoes. Further, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you use
both A/C SEA and A/C RAIN to reduce clutter.
Sea clutter at A/C SEA adjusted;

screen center sea clutter suppressed
By keyboard
1. Select SEA MAN following the procedure in section 1.17.1.
2. Watching the A/C SEA level indicator at the top of the display, adjust the A/C
SEA with the [A/C SEA] control. 100 levels (0-100) are available.
By trackball
1. Select SEA MAN following the procedure in section 1.17.1.
2. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the A/C SEA level indicator at the top
of the display.
3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, roll the scrollwheel downward to
increase the A/C SEA or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are
available.
1-28
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.18 Reducing Rain Clutter

Use the AUTO RAIN and A/C RAIN to reduced rain clutter. AUTO RAIN reduces
rain clutter in the picture and A/C RAIN reduces clutter picked up by the antenna.
Note 1: When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced the sensitivity is
decreased more than when only one is adjusted. For that reason adjust
them carefully.
Note 2: The echo average (see 1.27) is useful for reducing reflections from the
sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than
stationary ones when the echo average is active.
1.18.1 Automatic reduction of rain clutter

Left-click the AUTO RAIN indication at the left side of the screen to select AUTO
RAIN setting desired. The higher the number, the greater the degree of rain
clutter reduction. OFF turns off the AUTO RAIN feature.
Note: AUTO RAIN can also be controlled from the PICTURE box.
1.18.2 Manual reduction of rain clutter

The vertical beam width of
the antenna is designed to
see surface targets even
when the ship is rolling.
However, by this design
the unit will also detect rain
clutter (rain, snow, or hail)
Unwanted echoes are A/C RAIN control adjusted.
in the same manner as displayed
normal targets.
The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control
does but rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting the
greater the anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets,
adjust the A/C RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled
pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier. Be careful remove all rain
clutter, because you can erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing
weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C RAIN and A/C SEA to reduce
clutter.
Keyboard
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor
in the A/C RAIN level indicator at Level bar
(Shows A/C RAIN level.)
the top right side of the display.
Place arrow inside window
2. While observing the A/C RAIN level to adjust A/C RAIN.
indicator, roll the scrollwheel
RAIN 30
downward to increase the A/C RAIN
or upward to decrease it. 100 levels
(0-100) are available.
1-29
1. RADAR OPERATION
Note: The detection range is reduced when the A/C RAIN is used to show
targets in rain. Generally, the amount of rain, TX pulse length and TX
frequency are factors in determining how the detection range is affected.
The figures shown below illustrate this occurrence.
4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
16
16 mm/h rain - short pulse
Reduction of Range of First Detection (NM)
14 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain (short pulse)

16 mm/h rain - long pulse
12
10
16 mm/h rain (long pulse)
48mm/h rain - short pulse
46mm/h rain - long pulse
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original Range of First Detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at S-band

16
Reduction of Range of First Detection (NM)

14 16 mm/h rain - long pulse
4 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
12
10
8
4
2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original Range of First Detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at X-band
The author thanks the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for permission to
reproduce Information from its International Standard IEC 62388 ed.1.0 (2007). All such extracts
are copyright of IEC, Geneva, Switzerland. All rights reserved. Further information on the IEC is
available from www.iec.ch. IEC has no responsibility for the placement and context in which the
extracts and contents are reproduced by the author, nor is IEC in any way responsible for the
other content or accuracy therein.
IEC 62388 ed.1.0 Copyright 2007 IEC Geneva, Switzerland.www.iec.ch
How to read the graph

Using the X-band graph as an example, here is how to read the graphs.
A radar target detected in rain on the 8 nm range scale can only be detected at
the ranges shown below:
4 mm/h rain (short pulse): approx 7.5 nm
16 mm/h rain (short pulse): approx 5.6 nm
4 mm/h rain (long pulse): approx 2.6 nm
16 mm/h rain (long pulse): approx 0.9 nm
1-30
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.19 Measuring Range

The range to a target may be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings,
with the cursor, or with the VRM.
Use the fixed range rings to get an estimate of the range to a target. The rings
are the concentric solid circles on the display. The number of rings is
automatically set by the current range scale. The distance between the rings is
the range ring interval, and the current interval appears at the upper-left position
on the screen. To measure the range to a target with the range rings, count the
number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the
range ring interval and estimate the distance of the echo from the inner edge of
the nearest ring.
1.19.1 Showing, hiding the fixed range rings

2. Select 2 [MARK].
[MARK]
1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/MIN/SCALED
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 [PI LINE]
5 ANCHOR WATCH
OFF/ON
0.0NM
6 DROP MARK
OFF/ON
7 [INS MARK] *1
8 EBL OFFSET BASE
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
MARK menu
3. Select 0 RING.
4. Select OFF or ON as appropriate then push the left button.
1-31
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.19.2 Measuring range by the variable range marker (VRM)

There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you
can distinguish them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be
distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the
dashes on the No. 2 VRM are longer.
350 000 010
340 020
330 030
No. 1 320 040 Target
VRM 310 050 blip
300 060
290 070
280 080
270 090
260 100
250 110
No. 2
240 120
VRM
230 130
220 140
210 150
200
190 180 170
160
45:02 VRM1 >0.66NM<
99:59 VRM2 1.18NM
TTG to VRM
Measuring range with VRMs

By keyboard
1. Press the [VRM ON] key to display either of the VRMs. Successively
pressing the [VRM ON] key toggles the active VRM between No. 1 and No. 2.
The currently active marker is enclosed with >...<.
2. Operate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with
the inner edge of the target of interest and read its distance at the lower-right
corner of the screen. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance
when you operate the [RANGE] key or the RANGE box. This means that the
apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range
scale.
3. Press the [VRM OFF] key to erase each VRM.
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow in the VRM1 or VRM2 VRM1
box, whichever VRM you want to use. VRM2
2. The guidance box reads "VRM ON/." Push the left button
to turn on the VRM. The guidance box now reads "VRM SET L = DELETE /."
3. Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display
area. The guidance box now reads "VRM FIX / EXIT."
4. Use the trackball (coarse adjustment) or scrollwheel (fine adjustment) to
align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of
interest and read its distance at the lower-right corner of the screen. Each
VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the
[RANGE] key. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes
in proportion to the selected range scale.
5. Push the left button to anchor the VRM and fix its readout, or push the right
button to return the VRM to its previous location (range).
6. To erase a VRM, select the appropriate VRM readout box then push the left
button until the VRM disappears from the screen.
1-32
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.19.3 VRM unit of measurement (B and C types)

2. Select 2 [MARK].
3. Select 9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET] then push the scrollwheel.
4. Select VRM1 or VRM2 as appropriate and push the scrollwheel.
5. Select unit of measurement desired then push the scrollwheel.
1.19.4 TTG to VRM indication

You can show the TTG to VRMs as follows:

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZETEST] to open the CUSTOMIZETEST menu.
3. Select 7 [OPERATION].
4. Select 0 NEXT.
5. Select 3 VRM TTG.
6. Select OFF, 1, 2 or 1+2 as applicable and push the left button.
OFF: NO VRM TTG display
1: TTG to VRM1
2: TTG to VRM2
1+2: TTG to VRM1 and VRM2
7. Push the right button four times to close the menu.
TTG indication 00:00
VRM1 >3.682NM<
VRM and TTG indications
1-33
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.20 Measuring Bearing

Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) to take bearings of targets. There are
two EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out
from the own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture. The two
EBLs can be distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their
dashes; the dashes on the No. 2 EBL are longer.
Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at right angles.
Its distance from the EBL origin is indicated at the VRM readout whether or not
the corresponding VRM is displayed. The range marker changes its position
along the EBL with the rotation of the VRM control. To operate this marker, rotate
the VRM rotary control on the full keyboard, or put the cursor in the applicable
VRM box and roll the scrollwheel.
1.20.1 Measuring bearing

By keyboard
1. Press the [EBL ON] key to display either of the EBLs. Successive presses of
the [EBL ON] key toggle the active EBL between No. 1 and No. 2. The
currently active marker is enclosed with >...<.
2. Operate the EBL rotary control clockwise or counterclockwise until the active
EBL bisects the target of interest, and read its bearing at the lower-left corner
of the screen.
3. Press the [EBL OFF] key to erase each EBL.
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow in the EBL1 or EBL2 box, whichever EBL
you want to use.
EBL1
EBL2
EBL boxes
2. The guidance box reads "EBL ON/." Push the left button to turn on the EBL.
The guidance box now reads "EBL SET L=DELETE /."
3. Push the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the effective display
area. The guidance box now reads "EBL FIX L=DELETE/."
4. Use the trackball (coarse adjustment) or scrollwheel (fine adjustment) to
bisect the target with the EBL.
5. Push the left button to anchor the EBL and fix its readout, or push the right
button to return the EBL to its previous location (bearing).
6. To erase an EBL, select the appropriate EBL readout box then push the left
button until the EBL disappears from the screen.
1-34
1. RADAR OPERATION
350 000 010
No. 2 320 330

340 020
030 Target
EBL 310
040
blip
050
300 060
290 070
280 080
270 090
260
Range markers
100
No. 1
250
on EBLs
110
EBL
240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
EBL1 >128.0T< VRM1 >10.2NM<

EBL2 100.8T VRM2 12.1NM
Measuring bearing with EBLs
1.20.2 True or relative bearing

The EBL readout is affixed by "R" (relative) if it is relative to own ship's heading,
"T" (true) if it is referenced to the north. Select desired bearing reference as
follows:
1. Left-click the MENU box to open the [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]
menu.
2. Select 2 [MARK] to open the MARK 1 BACK
menu. 2 EBL1
REL/TRUE
3. Select 9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET] (B, 3 EBL2
C and W types) or 9 EBL CURSOR REL/TRUE
BEARING (IMO and A types). For the B, 4 VRM1
C and W types the menu below appears; NM/SM/km/kyd
5 VRM2
go to step 4. For the IMO and A types go NM/SM/km/kyd
to step 5. 6 CURSOR BEARING
4. Select EBL1 or EBL2 as applicable. REL/TRUE
5. Select REL or TRUE as applicable. 7 CURSOR RANGE
NM/SM/km/kyd
6. Push the right button twice to close the 8 [ CURSOR SHAPE]*
menu.
Note: When the gyrocompass heading changes, the EBL and its indication
change as follows:
Head-up / relative EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged.

Head-up / true EBL indication does not change, however the EBL marker
moves accordingly.
Course-up / true EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged.
North-up / true EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged.
1-35
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.21 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL

The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable
measurement of range and bearing between any targets. This function is also
useful for assessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA
(Closest Point of Approach) by using a VRM as shown in (a) in the illustration on
the next page. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as shown
in (b) in the illustration on the next page, the target ship is on a collision course.
1.21.1 How to assess risk of collision by the offset EBL

By keyboard
1. Press the [EBL ON] key to display or activate an EBL (No. 1 or No. 2).
2. Put the cursor (+) on a target appearing as threatening (A in the illustrated
example on the next page) by operating the trackball.
3. Press the [EBL OFFSET] key, and the origin of the active EBL shifts to the
cursor position. Press the [EBL OFFSET key] again to anchor the EBL origin.
4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL rotary
control until the EBL bisects the target at the new position (A'). The EBL
readout shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative
depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.
Note: If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using a
VRM as shown in left-hand figure at the top of the next page. If the
EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the
right-hand figure at the top of then next page, the target ship is on a
collision course.
5. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, press the [EBL OFFSET]
key twice.
By trackball
1. Display an EBL, following steps 1-3 in "By trackball" in section 1.20.1.
2. With the cursor inside the effective display area, push the left button, roll the
scrollwheel to show "EBL OFFSET / EXIT" in the guidance box then push the
left button.
3. Use the trackball to place the offset EBL on a target appearing as threatening
(A in the illustrated example on the next page) then push the left button to
anchor the EBL origin.
4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL used in
step 1 until it bisects the target at the new position (A'). The EBL readout
shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative depending on
the EBL bearing reference setting.
To return the EBL origin to the screen center, show "EBL OFFSET / EXIT" in the
guidance window then push the left button.
1-36
1. RADAR OPERATION
350 000 010 350 000 010

340 020 340 020
330 030 330 030
320 040 320 040
310 050 310 050
300 A 060 300 A 060
290 070 290 070
280
A1
080 280 A1 080
270 090 270 090
260 100 260 100
250 250 110

110
240 240 120

120
230 230 130
130
No. 1
No. 1 220 140 220 140
210 150 (a) EBL 210 150
(b)
EBL 200
190 180 170
160 200
190 180 170
160
EBL1 >150.3T< VRM1 >3.85NM< EBL1 >138.2T< VRM1 >3.85NM<

Collision assessment by offset EBL
1.21.2 Point of reference for origin point of offset EBL

The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed),
north stabilized (true) or referenced to own ships heading (relative).

2. Select 2 [MARK] to open the MARK menu.
[MARK]
1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/MIN/SCALED
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 [PI LINE]
5 ANCHOR WATCH
OFF/ON
0.0NM
6 DROP MARK
OFF/ON
7 [INS MARK] *1
8 EBL OFFSET BASE
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
MARK menu
3. Select 8 EBL OFFSET BASE.
4. Select STAB GND, STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as applicable.
STAB GND: Reference to latitude and longitude. Reference position is
always fixed regardless of your ship's movement.
STAB HDG: Reference to your ship's position regardless of display
STAB NORTH: Reference to heading. Reference position changes with
heading.
1-37
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.22 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two

Targets
By keyboard
1. Press the [EBL OFFSET] key. Operate the trackball to place the origin of the
No. 1 EBL, for example, on a target of interest (target 1 in the illustrated
example).
2. Operate the EBL rotary control until the EBL passes through another target of
interest (target 2).
3. Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the
inside edge of target 2. The active VRM readout at the lower-right corner of
the screen indicates the distance between the two targets.
4. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and
4) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.
Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with
suffix "T" depending on EBL relative/true settings of EBL CURSOR BEARING in
the MARK menu. To return the EBL origin to the screen center, press the [EBL
OFFSET] key again.
By trackball
1. Display an EBL, following the
No. 2
steps 1-3 in section 1.20.1. Range
EBL
340
350 000 010
020
330 030
2. With the cursor inside the Marker 320 040

310 050
effective display area, push the 300
Target 2 Range 060
No.1 Target 4 Marker
left button, roll the scrollwheel EBL 290
R2
070
280 Target 1
to show "EBL OFFSET / EXIT"
080
270 090
in the guidance box then push EBL

260
Target 3
100
origin
the left button. 250 110
240
3. Use the trackball to put the

120
230 130
cursor on target 1 then push >140.0R<

EBL1
220
210
200>0.50NM< 150
140
VRM1
160
the left button. 335.2R

190 180 170
EBL2 0.98NM VRM2
4. Operate the No. 1 VRM until

the range marker on the EBL Range/bearing
Range/bearing
aligns with target 2. The active between targets 3 and 4
between targets
VRM readout at the lower-right 1 and 2
corner of the screen indicates the distance between the two targets.
5. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (targets 3 and
4) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.
To return the EBL origin to the screen center, show "EBL OFFSET / EXIT" in the
guidance window then push the left button.
1-38
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.23 Target Alarm

The target alarm serves to alert the navigator to targets (ships, landmasses, etc.)
entering a specific area, with audiovisual alarms.
CAUTION
The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls

should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
The target alarm zone has a fixed width of 0.5 nm in the radial direction (depth)
and is adjustable from 3.0 to 6.0 nm (guard zone 1) and any distance (guard
zone 2). On the Non-IMO radar the boundaries can be set at any distance. On
any radar type the sector of the zone can be set from 0 to 360 degrees in any
direction.
1.23.1 How to set a target alarm

The procedure below shows how to set a target alarm using the figure below as
an example.
1. Left-click ALARM1 or ALARM2 box, whichever alarm you wish to put the
cursor jumps into the effective display area and "SET" appears inside the
ALARM box selected.
ALARM 1
ALARM 2
ALARM boxes
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on point "A" then push the left button.
3. Use the trackball to put the cursor on point "B" then push the left button.
"WORK" replaces "SET" in the ALARM box. The target alarm zones lines are
shown in dashed lines.
350 000 010
Target alarm zone
340 020
330 030
320 040
310 050 Other alarm zone examples
300 060
Point A
290 A B
070
280 080
X
Point A Point B
270 090 X X
260 100
X X
250 110 Point B Point A X
240 120 Point B
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
Target alarm zone
1-39
1. RADAR OPERATION
Note 1: If you wish to create a target alarm zone having a 360-degree coverage
around own ship, set point "B" in almost the same direction as point "A."
Note 2: Two target alarm zones may be set. Note however that the 2nd target
alarm zone is available only when the 1st target alarm zone is active.
Note 3: When the target alarm zone is not within the range in use the indication
UP RNG appears to the right of the ALARM box. In this case select a
range that will display the target alarm zone.
1.23.2 Acknowledging the target alarm

A target in the target alarm zone produces both visual (flashing) and audible
(beep) alarms. To silence the audio alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the
full keyboard or select the appropriate ALARM box then push the left button. The
ALARM box shows "ALARMx ACK." This will deactivate the audio alarm but will
not stop the flashing of the offending target. To reactivate the audio alarm, press
the [ALARM ACK] key again or select the ALARM box then push the left button.
(When an external buzzer is connected, the audio alarm does not stop until the
alarm zone itself is deactivated.) The ALARM box shows "ALARMx WORK."
1.23.3 Deactivating a target alarm

Left-click ALARM1 or ALARM2 box, whichever alarm you wish to deactivate,
until the alarm status in the ALARM box disappears. In this radar deactivation of
the target alarm zone 1 deactivates target alarm zone 2
.
1-40
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.23.4 Target alarm attributes

You may select the echo strength level that triggers the alarm, the condition that
generates the alarm and the volume of the audio alarm as follows:

2. Select 3 [ALARM].
[ALARM]
1 BACK
2 TARGET ALARM MODE
IN/OUT
3 TARGET ALARM LEVEL
1/2/3/4
4 WATCH ALARM
OFF/6M/10M/
12M/15M/20M
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
6 [ALARM OUT1]
7 [ALARM OUT2]
8 [ALARM OUT3]
9 [ALARM OUT4]
0 [PRIMARY ALARM]
ALARM menu
3. Select 2 TARGET ALARM MODE.
4. Select IN or OUT as appropriate.
IN: Targets entering the zone trigger the alarms.
OUT: Targets exiting the zone trigger the alarms.
Inward target alarm Outward target alarm

Alarm types
5. Select 3 TARGET ALARM LEVEL.
6. Select echo strength level that will trigger the alarm. "1" is highest strength.
7. Select 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL.
8. Select audio alarm volume, among OFF, LOW, MID and HIGH.
Note: 5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL also sets the level of the audio alarm for the
watch alarm.
1-41
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.24 Off-Centering the Display

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field
without switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered
to the cursor position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is
set beyond 75% of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the
point of 75% of the limit.
This feature is not available on the 96 nm range or in the true motion mode.
If the conning position is outside the effective radar display, some parts of the
bearing scale are not shown. For details, see section 1.50.
To off-center the radar picture, do the following:
By keyboard
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor at a position where you wish to move the
sweep origin.
2. Press the [OFF CENTER] key. Then, the sweep origin is off-centered to the
cursor position.
3. To cancel off-centering, press the [OFF CENTER] key again.
By trackball
1. With the cursor inside the effective
display area, roll the scrollwheel to
display "OFF CENTER / EXIT" in
the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor
Cursor
where you want to locate the screen
center. Put cursor where desired Off-centered display
and do appropriate
3. Push the left button to off center the OFF CENTER procedure
sweep origin.
4. To cancel the off-center function, push the left button when the guidance box
reads "OFF CENTER / EXIT."
Note: When the conditions shown below are met, offcenter cannot be cancelled.
This is because the radar antenna position is located at a position greater than
75% of the effective radar display.
- Own ship marker is large
- The distance between antenna position and conning position is large
- Short-distance display range.
To cancel the offcenter first select a larger range then cancel the offcenter.
1-42
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.25 Interference Rejector

Mutual radar interference may occur in the vicinity of another shipborne radar
operating in the same frequency band. It is seen on the screen as a number of
bright spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usually curved
spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center to the edge of the picture.
Activating the interference rejector circuit can reduce this type of interference.
The interference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit. It compares the

received signals over successive transmissions and reduces randomly occurring
signals. There are three levels of interference rejection depending on the
number of transmissions that are correlated.
Interference
To adjust the interference rejector, left-click IR indication at the left side of the
screen to select rejection level. "3" provides the highest degree of reduction.
Note: The interference rejector can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box.
1.26 Echo Stretch

The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to
make them easier to see, and it is available on any range. There are three types
of echo stretch, 1, 2 and 3, and the higher the number the greater the amount of
stretch.
Note: The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns
(clutter) from sea surface, rain and radar interference. For this reason,
make sure these types of interference have been sufficiently reduced
before activating the echo stretch.
To set echo stretch, left-click the ES indication at the left side of the display.
Note: Echo stretch can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box.
1-43
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.27 Echo Averaging

The echo averaging feature effectively reduces sea clutter. Echoes received
from stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same
position every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such
as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over
successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames,
it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive
scans and its brilliance reduced, making it easier to discriminate real targets
from sea clutter.
Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the

true motion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such
as buoys will be shown while reducing random echoes such as sea clutter. True
echo averaging is not however effective for picking up small targets running at
high speeds over the ground.
Note 1: With echo average active it is harder to detect high-speed targets than
stationary ones.
Note 2: Do not use the echo averaging function under heavy pitching and
rolling; loss of targets can result.
Note 3: Echo averaging can be used without a heading sensor. For further
details, contact your dealer.
Note 4: Echo averaging requires heading, position and speed data.
Before using the echo averaging function, reduce sea clutter with the A/C SEA
control. Leave a little sea clutter on the screen so as not to erase weak targets.
Then, do as follows:
Left-click the EAV indication at the left side of the display.

OFF: Echo averaging OFF
1, 2: Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. "2" is more effective than "1" in
detecting targets hidden in strong sea clutter. However, "1" is more
effective than "2" in displaying high-speed targets. Select the setting
best suited to current conditions. For effective monitoring of
high-speed craft, you should use "2" together with Wiper.
3: Stably displays unstable targets; distinguishes high-speed craft from
sea clutter.
Note: Echo averaging can also be adjusted from the PICTURE box.
1-44
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.28 Noise Rejector

White noise may show itself on the screen as random "speckles" spread over
the entire radar image. You can remove this noise as follows:
1. Right-click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to open the
PICTURE menu.
[PICTURE MENU]
1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON
5 AUTO STC
OFF/ON
6 AUTO RAIN
OFF/1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
1/2/3/4/
A/B/C
8 [PULSE]
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT
NO/SAVE/USER/
FACTORY
2. Select 4 NOISE REJ.

3. Select ON or OFF as appropriate.
1-45
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.29 Wiper
The wiper feature automatically reduces the brilliance of weak signals (noise,
sea clutter, rain clutter, etc.) and unwanted signals such as radar interference to
clear the picture of unwanted echoes. Its effect depends on the wiper setting
used and whether each averaging is turned on or off, as described below.
Echo averaging and wiper states and wiper effect
Wiper setting 1 Wiper setting 2

Echo averaging OFF Condition A Condition A
Echo averaging ON (1/2/3) Condition A Condition B
Condition A: The brilliance of unwanted weak echoes, such as noise, sea

clutter and rain clutter, is reduced to clear up the picture. The difference between
wiper setting "1" and "2" is that brilliance is lowered more slowly in "2".
Condition B: Echo averaging is automatically activated when the wiper feature

is turned on, allowing you to instantly see how the picture is affected with echo
averaging turned off and turned on.
To activate the wiper feature, do the following:

2. Select 1 [ECHO] to open the ECHO menu.
[ECHO]
1 BACK
ND
2 2 ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
7 ECHO AREA*1 *1 Not available on IMO or A type
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL
8 [PICTURE SELECT]
9 STC RANGE
+00
ECHO menu
3. Select 6 WIPER.
4. Select OFF, 1 or 2 as appropriate.
1-46
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.30 Target Trails

The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be
displayed in the form of synthetic afterglow.
Target trails are shown either relative or true
and may be sea or ground stabilized. True
motion trails require a compass signal, and
position and speed data. (a) True target trails
(No smearing of
stationary targets)
1.30.1 True or relative trails
You may display echo trails in true or relative
motion. Relative trails show relative movements
between targets and own ship. True motion
trails present true target movements in
accordance with their over-the-ground speeds
and courses.
(b) Relative target trails
(Targets moving relative
Note: When true trail is selected on the RM to own ship)
mode, the TRAIL MODE box is shown in
blue. The reference for the past position
displays for AIS and TT is also switched
whenever trail reference is switched.
1. Right-click the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom right corner of the screen to
open the TRAIL menu.
[TRAIL MENU]
1 TRAIL MODE
REL/TRUE
2 TRAIL GRAD
SINGLE/MULTI
3 NARROW TRAIL*3
OFF/1/2
4 TRAIL LEVEL
1/2/3/4
5 TRAIL RESTART
OFF/ON
6 TRAIL COPY
OFF/ON
7 OS TRAIL
OFF/1/2
8 TRAIL LENGTH*1
*1 Shown when 8 TRAIL LENGTH
NORMAL/12H/24H/48H
is selected to other than "NORMAL".
9 TRAIL HIDE*1
Other than IMO and A types.
START 00:00
W-type does not show 48H.
END 00:00
*2 B and C types only
0 [TRAIL COLOR]*1,*2
*3 B, C and W types
2. Select 1 TRAIL MODE.

3. Select TRUE or REL.
1-47
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.30.2 Trail time

Trail time, the trail plotting interval, may be selected as follows:
1. Select the arrow in the TRAIL MODE box at the bottom right corner of the
screen.
* TRAIL **
* TRUE-S(or -G) or REL
S: Sea stablized
G: Ground stabilized
** Trail time setting
TRAIL MODE box

2. Push the left button to select the trail time as below.
Control Available setting
Left button OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min, 30 min,
CONT(inuous)
Scrollwheel OFF, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1-30 min (30 sec intervals),
CONT(inuous)
The timer above the TRAIL MODE box counts up the trail time and is erased
once the terminal count is reached. For example, if the trail time is six minutes,
the timer is erased when trails have been plotted six minutes. The maximum
time for continuous plotting is 99:59. When the timer counts to 99:59, the timer is
reset to zero, all target trails are erased then trails are restarted.
1.30.3 Trail gradation

The afterglow can be selected in a single tone or gradual shading.
Monotone Gradual shading

(Single) (Multi)
Trail gradation
1. Right-click the TRAIL MODE box to display the TRAIL menu.
2. Select 2 TRAIL GRAD.
3. Select SINGLE (single) or MULTI (multiple) as appropriate.
1-48
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.30.4 Saving, copying target trails

By turning on the functions TRAIL RESTART and TRAIL COPY, you may
continue painting target trails whenever the range scale is changed. The amount
of range change determines how the radar paints trails. See the table below for
details. Note however that if the previous range is restored within 10 seconds
and the amount of range change is within 1/3, trails continue as before.
If trails become difficult to view, you may delete them. For details, see section
1.30.10.
Amount of range change How trails are processed

Large (ex. 3 nm12 nm) Trails continue on targets that were within the
previous range scale. Trails are not initiated for
targets that were not within the previous range.
Within 1/3 of previous range Trails continue on targets that were in the
(ex. 3 nm1.5 nm) previous range scale.
Within 1/4 of previous range Trails are restarted.
(ex. 3 nm0.75 nm)
No trail generated
for target not within
previous range
(a) Previous range (b) New range

2. Select 5 TRAIL RESTART.
ON: Trails start extending on the newly selected range.
OFF: Trails extend only on the range where they were initiated.
4. Select 6 TRAIL COPY.
1-49
1. RADAR OPERATION
The relationship between trail restart and trail copy depends on their status, as
shown in the table below.
Trail restart Trail copy Trail status

ON ON Range changed while trail is ON: Trails continue on
targets within previous range.
ON OFF Range changed while trail is ON: Trails within the
previous range are erased then trails are restarted.
OFF OFF/ON Range changed while trail is ON: New trails not
initiated. (Trails from previous range are stored in
memory.)
Range returned to previous range: Trails continues
on targets stored in memory.
Trails turned ON: Trails stored in memory are
erased. (See section 1.30.10.)
(Trails stored in the memory are erased and trails are
then initiated on new range.)
1.30.5 Trail level

The level (intensity) of the afterglow that extends from radar targets may be
selected as below.

2. Select 4 TRAIL LEVEL.
3. Select level desired. The higher the number the greater the intensity of the
afterglow.
1.30.6 Narrow trails (B, C and W types)

Target trails may be painted with thinner lines if desired. This can be useful when
there are a lot of targets on the screen and it is hard to distinguish one from
another.

2. Select 3 NARROW TRAIL.
3. Select OFF, 1 or 2 as appropriate. "2" is thinner than "1".
1-50
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.30.7 Longer trails (B, C and W types)

In addition to the trail times mentioned in section 1.30.2, you may also extend
trails 12 ,24 or 48 hours.

2. Select 8 TRAIL LENGTH.
3. Select NORMAL, 12H, 24H or 48H as appropriate.
Note: 48H not available with W-type.
NORMAL: Trails are extended according to the setting made on the TRAIL
MODE box.
12H: Extend trails for 12 hours.
24H: Extend trails for 24 hours.
48H: Extend trails for 48 hours (not available on W type).
4. If you selected 12 hour, 24 hour or 48 hour, 9 TRAIL HIDE appears together

with start and end times. This item allows you to designate a time period in
which no trails will be extended. Enter time frame at START and END.
1.30.8 Temporarily removing trails from the display

You may wish to temporarily remove all trails from the display. Trails are
removed but are continued internally.
By keyboard
Press the [CANCEL TRAILS] key to show OFF in the TRAIL MODE box.
By trackball
Left-click the TRAIL MODE box to display OFF in the box.
1.30.9 Trail stabilization in true motion

True motion trails may be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The TRAIL box
shows current stabilization as TRUE-G or TRUE-S. To change stabilization mode,
open the SPEED menu and set SHIP SPEED to BT (ground stabilization) or WT
(sea stabilization).
1.30.10 Erasing trails

All trails may be erased (including those in the memory) and restarted to start
trails fresh.
Keyboard: Press and hold down the [CANCEL TRAILS] key until trails
disappear.
Trackball: Left-click the TRAIL MODE box until all trails disappear.
1-51
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.31 PI (Parallel Index) Lines

PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a
coastline or a partner ship when navigating. Up to six sets of PI lines are
available depending on the maximum number of PI lines selected on the menu.
Max. 1 PI line: Six sets of PI lines (PI1 - PI6)
Max. 2, 3 or 6 PI lines: Four sets of PI lines (PI1 PI4)
You may control the orientation and interval of the PI lines from the PI line box,
which is at the lower left corner.
PI
lines
PI lines
1.31.1 Displaying, erasing PI lines

By keyboard
1. With the menu closed, press the [INDEX LINE] key. The guidance box shows
"DISP PI LINE/."
2. While watching the PI line number box, press and hold the [INDEX LINE] key
to select a PI line. Press the key again to display or erase the PI line
selected.
PI line number PI 1 ON Status (ON or OFF)
PI line orientation 032.0T (Boxes not shown when
PI line interval 5.60NM PI line is OFF.)
PI line boxes
By trackball
1. Select the PI line number box and use the trackball to select a PI line
number.
2. Push the left button to turn the PI line on or off as appropriate.
1-52
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.31.2 Adjusting PI line orientation, PI line interval

1. If not already displayed, show a PI line, referring to section 1.31.1.
2. Use the trackball to place the arrow in
the PI line orientation box. PI 1 ON
3. Roll the scrollwheel to adjust the PI PI line orientation 032.0T
line orientation, between PI line interval 5.60NM
000.0-359.9(T). Enter a negative
value to move the PI line to the opposite side of the PI line passing through
the own ship position.
4. Use the trackball to put the cursor in the PI line interval box.
5. Roll the scrollwheel to adjust the PI line interval.
1.31.3 PI line bearing reference

PI line bearing reference may be relative to own ships heading (Relative) or
referenced to North (True) as below.

2. Select 2 [MARK].
3. Select 4 [PI LINE].
[PI LINE]
1 BACK
2 PI LINE BEARING
REL/TRUE
3 PI LINE
1/2/3/6
4 PI LINE MODE
PARALLEL/PERPENDIC.
5 RESET PI LINE
NO/YES
4. Select 2 PI LINE BEARING.

5. Select REL or TRUE as appropriate.
1-53
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.31.4 Maximum number of PI lines to display

The maximum number of PI lines to display may be selected from 1, 2, 3 or 6
lines as below. The actual number of lines visible may be less depending on line
interval. For the W specification radar, you may specify the number of lines for
two sets of PI lines the menu displays 4 PI LINE1 and 5 PI LINE2.

4. Select 3 PI LINE.
5. Select 1, 2, 3 or 6 as appropriate.
1.31.5 PI line orientation

PI lines orientation may be selected from parallel or perpendicular. This function
is available when 3 PI LINE in the PI LINE menu is set for other than "1".

4. Select 4 PI LINE MODE.
5. Select PARALLEL or PERPENDIC. as appropriate.
1.31.6 Resetting PI lines

You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation, 0-degrees for parallel
orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than doing it
manually.
From the menu

4. Select 5 PI LINE MODE.
5. Select YES.
From the PI line number box

Put the cursor on the PI line number box and long-push the left button.
1-54
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.32 Origin Mark

You can mark any prominent target or a point of particular interest using the
origin mark feature. Twenty origin marks may be entered: 10 standard origin
marks (with number) and one each of the 10 symbol origin marks. The marks
may be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or sea stabilized. To display the
origin marks, heading signal and own ship position data are required.
1.32.1 Entering origin marks

1. Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the screen. The
guidance box now reads "MARK SELECT / MARK MENU."
MARK
Mark type last selected, 1
mark number -> +
MARK box
2. Push the right button to open the MARK menu.
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00000.00 N
000000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK menu
3. Select 2 MARK KIND.
4. Select ORIGIN MARK (No.) or ORIGIN MARK (SYM) as appropriate. Select
ORIGIN MARK (No.) to inscribe standard origin mark ( ) plus mark number;
ORIGIN MARK (SYM) to inscribe desired origin mark symbol (no number).
5. Push the left button.
6. Push the right button to close the menu. The guidance box now reads
"MARK SELECT / MARK MENU."
1-55
1. RADAR OPERATION
7. With the cursor choosing the MARK box, Select mark number desired
("ORIGIN MARK(No.)" selected at step 4) or origin mark symbol ("ORIGIN
MARK(SYM)" selected at step 4) then push the left button. The following
origin marks are available.
Origin mark (symbols)

8. Push the left button again. The cursor jumps into the effective display area
and the guidance box now reads "MARK / EXIT."
9. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the location desired.
10. Push the left button to inscribe the origin mark at the cursor location. The
bearing and range from the origin mark to the cursor location are shown just
below the MARK box.
MARK
1
-> +
Bearing and range from 162.5T 11.7NM
origin mark to cursor
Mark box, showing bearing and range from origin mark

To inscribe a different standard origin mark number or symbol origin mark,
repeat steps 7-10. (ORIGIN MARK(No.) or (ORIGIN MARK(SYM) should be
preselected as appropriate.)
To quit entering origin marks, push the right button when the guidance box
reads "MARK / EXIT."
Origin mark data reads "- - -.-" when the cursor is placed outside the effective
display area.
"ORIGIN" appear to the right of the MARK box when an origin mark item is
selected.
1-56
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.32.2 Origin mark stabilization

Origin marks may be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or moving (sea
stabilized).
1. Right-click the MARK box to open the MARK menu.
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00000.00 N
000000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK menu
2. Select 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB then push the scrollwheel.
3. Select GND or SEA as appropriate.
1.32.3 Deleting individual origin marks

The procedure below shows how to delete individual origin marks. Note that
origin marks cannot be deleted collectively.
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the scrollwheel to
display "MARK DELETE / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the origin mark you wish to erase.
3. Push the left button or the scrollwheel to erase the mark.
4. To erase another mark, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To finish, push the right button when the guidance box reads "MARK
DELETE / EXIT."
1-57
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.33 Zoom
The zoom function enlarges an area of interest as large as twice the normal
viewing size, in the text window. To use the zoom display, it must be turned on in
the DATA BOX menu. For further details, see section 1.42.
Zoom is not available when the tracked target data setting is "LARGE".
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the scrollwheel to display
"ZOOM / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to select the location to zoom.
3. Push the left button or the scrollwheel. A rectangle inscribes the location
zoomed and the zoom display at the right side of the screen shows the
zoomed picture.
Zoom
Area Zoom display
(Appears in box above
when nav data is turned
off.)
Zoom area selected
with the cursor
Data Box
Zoom display
To quit the zoom display, push the left button when the guidance box reads
"ZOOM / EXIT."
1-58
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.34 Markers
1.34.1 Heading line
The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the
radar display area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up
mode; it changes the orientation depending on the ship orientation in north-up
and true motion modes.
Temporarily erasing the heading line

To temporarily extinguish the heading line to look at targets existing dead
ahead of own ship, press the [HL OFF] key on the keyboard, or use the
trackball to select the HL OFF box at the bottom left corner of the display then
push the left button. In addition to the heading line, the stern marker and all
graphics within the effective display are also erased. To redisplay the heading
line, etc., release the key or the left button.
1.34.2 Stern marker

The stern marker, which is a dot-and-dash line, appears opposite to the heading
line. To display or erase this marker do the following:
1. Left-click the MENU box to open the MAIN menu.

2. Select MARK to show the MARK menu.
3. Select 3 STERN MARK.
4. Select OFF or ON as appropriate.
1.34.3 North marker

The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the
north marker moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass
signal.
1-59
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.34.4 Own ship symbol

The own ship symbol marks own position on the display. It can be turned on or
off and its configuration selected from the MARK menu. Two configurations are
available: minimized symbol and scaled symbol. The scaled symbol is scaled to
indicate the length and beam of the vessel. If the largest dimension of the
symbol gets smaller than 6 mm, the symbol will disappear and own ship will be
with a minimized symbol. Ships dimensions should be entered at installation to
use the scaled ship symbol.
Antenna Heading line

Heading line
position X
Beam line
Beam line
Scaled symbol Minimized symbol

2. Select 2 to show the MARK MENU.
3. Select OFF, MIN or SCALED as appropriate.
1-60
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.34.5 Barge marker

You may mark the locations of barges on the display with icons. This feature is
available with an installation preset. Set up barge information as follows:

2. Select 2 [MARK] to show the MARK menu.
3. Select 7 [BARGE MARK].
[BARGE INFORMATION]
1 BACK
2 BARGE MARK
OFF/ON
3 BARGE SIZE
LENGTH 0ft
WIDTH 0ft
4 ARRANGEMENT
4
9
9
9
4
BARGE INFORMATION menu

4. Select 2 [BARGE MARK] and push the left button. Select ON and push the
left button.
5. Select 3 BARGE SIZE and push the left button. Enter length (three digits)
and width (two digits) of barge.
6. Select 4 ARRANGEMENT and push the left button. This item lets you set a
single barge or a barge chain. Select one of the five arrangements and push
the scrollwheel. Select number of barges (max. 9) to display. As you roll the
scrollwheel the squares light or extinguish and the number of barges
selected appears at the right side.
Barge
Far left is 1st row
X
1.35.5 INS marker

You can get predicted position data by connecting this radar to an INS.
1. Open the menu and select 2 [MARK].

2. Spin the scrollwheel to select 7 [INS MARK] and 7 PREDICTOR.
3. Select ON.
4. Push the right button three times to close the menu.
1-61
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.35 Automatic Picture Setup According to

Navigation Purpose
Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the
radar, which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar
settings case by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide
optimum settings for often encountered situations.
The radar's internal computer offers several picture setup options to be assigned
to each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one
of the functions is assigned the ship detecting function and labeled SHIP on the
on the PICTURE box. By choosing SHIP, the radar will be instantly set for
optimum detection of ships.
Four user-programmable setups are also provided (labeled

PICTURE1-PICTURE4), so that you may have the radar automatically adjusted
to those conditions that are not covered by the provided setup options.
Below are the preset picture setup options provided with this radar.
Picture setup options description
Label Description Label Description

NEAR Optimum setting for short range FAR Optimum setting for long range
detection using a range scale of 3 detection using a range scale of 6
nm or less on calm seas nm or larger
NEAR Optimum setting for detecting FAR Optimum setting for detecting
BUOY navigation buoys, small vessels BUOY navigation buoys, small vessels
and other small surface objects at and other small surface objects at
close range long range
HARBOR Optimum setting for short range COAST For coastal navigation using a
navigation in a harbor area, using range scale of 12 nm or less
a range scale of 1.5 nm or less
ROUGH Optimum setting for rough weather SHIP Optimum setting for detecting
SEA or heavy rain vessels
Each picture setup option defines a combination of several radar settings for
achieving optimum setup for a particular navigating situation. Those involved are
interference rejector, echo stretch, echo average, noise rejector, automatic
anti-sea and anti-rain clutters, video contrast, and pulselength and sea and radar
conditions.
Adjusting these features from the PICTURE menu changes the original function
key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular picture setup option,
it is necessary to select the default setting. For this reason, we recommended
that you use the user-programmable function sets when frequent adjustment of
the radar picture is necessary.
1-62
1. RADAR OPERATION
Picture setup options and default settings for X-band (12 kW/25 kW) and S-band (30 kW) radars
1 INT 2 ECHO 3 ECHO 4 NOISE 5 AUTO 6 AUTO 7 VIDEO
REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST
PICTURE 1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1-B
PICTURE 2 2 2 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
PICTURE 3 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF 1-B
PICTURE 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 2-A
NEAR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR 2 2 3 ON OFF OFF 3-B
NEAR BUOY 2 1 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR BUOY 2 2 3 ON OFF OFF 3-B
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF 2-A
SHIP 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
HARBOR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
COAST 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
8 PULSE 9 CONDITION
P/L on P/L on P/L on P/L on 3 P/L on 6 nm P/L on Sea Cond. Low Level Echo
0.5 nm 0.75 nm 1.5 nm nm 12-24 nm
PICTURE 1 S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L 2 0
PICTURE 2 S2 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 0
NEAR S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L 2 0
FAR S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 3 0
NEAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M2 L L 2 0
FAR BUOY S2 M1 M1 M3 L L 2 0
ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 4 0
SHIP S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 0
HARBOR S1 S1 S2 M1 M3 L 2 0
COAST S1 S2 M1 M2 M3 L 2 0
Picture setup options and default settings for X-band (50 kW) and S-band (60 kW) radars
1 INT 2 ECHO 3 ECHO 4 NOISE 5 AUTO 6 AUTO 7 VIDEO
REJECT STRETCH AVERAGE REJ STC RAIN CONTRAST
PICTURE 1 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1-B
PICTURE 2 2 2 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
PICTURE 3 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 1-B
PICTURE 4 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 2-A
NEAR 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF 3-B
NEAR BUOY 2 1 1 OFF OFF OFF 2-B
FAR BUOY 2 2 3 OFF ON OFF 3-B
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 OFF ON OFF 2-A
SHIP 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF 3-B
8 PULSE 9 CONDITION
P/L on P/L on P/L on P/L on 3 P/L on 6 nm P/L on Sea Cond. Low Level Echo
0.5 nm 0.75 nm 1.5 nm nm 12-24 nm
PICTURE 1 S S S M1 M2 L 2 0
PICTURE 2 S S M1 M2 L L 2 0
NEAR S S S M1 M2 L 2 0
FAR S S M1 M2 L L 3 0
NEAR BUOY S S M1 M2 M2 L 2 0
FAR BUOY S S M1 M2 L L 2 0
ROUGH SEA S S S M1 M2 L 4 0
SHIP S S M1 M2 L L 2 0
1-63
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.35.1 Selecting a picture setup option

You may select a picture setup options as follows:
Left-click PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select picture setup
option desired.
NEAR BUOY*
* Other possible indications:
NEAR, FAR, FAR BUOY,
ROUGH SEA, SHIP,
HARBOR, COAST,
PICTURE 1 - PICTURE 4
1.35.2 Programming and saving picture setups

User-programmable picture setups and they are provided in the PICTURE box.
Normally, PICTURE1-PICTURE4 are for programming but you may program any
other picture item as desired. You may program and save them as below.
1. Left-click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the item to
program.
2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.
[PICTURE MENU]
1 INT REJECT
OFF/1/2/3
2 ECHO STRETCH
OFF/1/2/3
3 ECHO AVERAGE
OFF/1/2/3
4 NOISE REJ
OFF/ON
5 AUTO STC
OFF/ON
6 AUTO RAIN
OFF/1/2/3/4
7 VIDEO CONTRAST
1/2/3/4/
A/B/C
8 [PULSE]
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT
NO/SAVE/USER/
FACTORY
PULSE menu
1-64
1. RADAR OPERATION
3. Set items 1-6 and 8 referring to the following sections:

1 INT REJECT: 1.25 5 AUTO STC: 1.17
2 ECHO STRETCH: 1.26 6 AUTO RAIN: 1.18
3 ECHO AVERAGE: 1.27 8 PULSE: 1.15
4 NOISE REJ: 1.28
4. Select 7 VIDEO CONTRAST.
5. Select 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Dynamic Range) or A, B, C (Curve) as appropriate. Refer
to the description below and the illustration on the next page.
1-4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the
narrowest dynamic range.
A: Mid-level in the curve is low, so this setting is suitable for reducing rain
clutter.
B: Curve between A and C.
C: Mid-level in the curve is high, so this setting is suitable for detecting
distant targets.
* *
4 3 2 1 C B A
PICTURE level
5 db
7 db * Default
9 db
11 db
VIDEO SIGNAL level
Video contrast settings

6. Select 9 [CONDITION] then push the scrollwheel to show the CONDITION
menu.
[CONDITION MENU]
1 BACK
2 SEA CONDITION
1/2/3/4/5
3 ANT HEIGHT
5/7.5/10/15/20/
25/30/35/40/45/
more50m
4 LOW LEVEL ECHO
0
CONDITION menu
7. Select 2 SEA CONDITION.
8. Select appropriate sea condition. The larger the number the rougher the sea
state.
1-65
1. RADAR OPERATION
9. Select 3 ANT HEIGHT.

10. Select appropriate radar antenna height (above the waterline).
11. If necessary, open the menu, select the ECHO menu and 9 STC RANGE to
adjust effective STC range. The setting range is 10 to +10. The larger the
number the longer the effective STC range becomes. Roll the scrollwheel to
set. (Note that the keyboard cannot be used to enter the setting.)
12. If necessary Select 4 LOW LEVEL ECHO to reject low level echoes. The
setting range is 0-8. The higher the figure the stronger the low level echo that
is erased.
13. To save a program, Select 0 DEFAULT.
14. Select SAVE and push the scrollwheel or left button.
Note: You may also program and save other picture setups.
1.35.3 Restoring user settings

If you get lost in operation while adjusting the settings for a picture setup, you
can easily restore user settings for that picture setup. Note that user settings are
deleted when default settings are restored.
1. Left-click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the picture
setup option for which you want to restore its user settings.
3. Select 0 DEFAULT.
4. Select USER and push the left button or scrollwheel.
1.35.4 Restoring default picture setup options

Any of the radar functions programmed with the picture setup options may be
adjusted as desired. If you get lost in operation and want to restore the default
settings for a particular picture setup operation, do the following:
1. Left-click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the picture
setup option for which you want to restore its default settings.
3. Select 0 DEFAULT.
4. Select FACTORY and push the left button or scrollwheel.
1-66
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.35.5 Disabling unnecessary picture setups

There are quite a few picture setups from which to select, some which you may
not require. You can disable unnecessary ones as follows:

2. Select 1 [ECHO].
3. Select 8 [PICTURE SELECT].
[PICTURE SELECT]
1 BACK
2 PICTURE SELECT
PICTURE1 OFF/ON
PICTURE2 OFF/ON
PICTURE3 OFF/ON
PICTURE4 OFF/ON
NEAR OFF/ON
FAR OFF/ON
NEAR BUOY OFF/ON
FAR BUOY OFF/ON
ROUGH SEA OFF/ON
SHIP OFF/ON
HARBOR OFF/ON
COAST OFF/ON
4. Select 2 PICTURE SELECT.

5. Select the picture setup you wish to disable and push the left button.
6. Select OFF or ON as applicable and push the left button.
1-67
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.36 Function Keys

Less-often used functions are provided in the menu. To avoid opening the
menus to set up the radar for a particular situation, function keys F1-F4 may be
assigned any of the functions shown in the CUSTOMIZETEST sub menu.
1.36.1 Activating function keys

To activate the function assigned to a function key, press the key to instantly set
the radar for the preset purpose. Further press the key to select option.
Function key Default setting

F1 Interference Rejector
F2 Echo Stretch
F3 Auto Rain
F4 Heading Line Off
1.36.2 Programming function keys

Do the following to program the function keys.

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZETEST] then push the scrollwheel.
[CUSTOMIZETEST]
1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]
CUSTOMIZETEST menu
3. Select 3 [F1], 4 [F2], 5 [F3] or 6 [F4], whichever function key you want to set,
For example, select 3 [F1] then push the left button.
[F1]
1 BACK
2 [ECHO]
3 [STD KEY]
4 [TTAIS]
5 [OPERATION]
6 [PICTURE]
F1 menu
1-68
1. RADAR OPERATION
4. Select appropriate category, ECHO, STD KEY, TTAIS, OPERATION or

PICTURE. Refer to the menus below to select appropriate category.
[ECHO] [STD KEY]
1 BACK 1 BACK
2 2
PICTURE/ ALARM ACK/
IR STBY TX/
ES/ HL OFF/
EAV/ EBL OFFSET/
NOISE REJ/ MODE/
ANT SELECT/ OFF CENTER/
PULSE LENGTH/ CU TM RESET/
A/C SEA SELECT/ PI LINE/
AUTO RAIN SELECT/ VECTOR TIME/
TUNE SELECT/ VECTOR MODE/
ANT HEIGHT/ TARGET LIST/
SEA CONDITION/ TRAIL/
2ND ECHO REJ/ BRILL/
PM/ MARK/
SART MENU/
WIPER RANGE UP/
RANGE DOWN/
ACQ/
[TTAIS] TARGET DATA/
TARGET CANCEL
1 BACK
2
DISP TT/ [OPERATION]
DISP AIS/
TARGET DATA & ACQ/ 1 BACK
PAST POSN INTERVAL/ 2
REF MARK/ ECHO COLOR/
CPA LIMIT/ PALETTE/
CPA/ RING/
TCPA/
ALARM1/
AZ1/
AZ2/ ALARM2/
TARGET LIST SORT/ WATCH ALARM RESET/
TRIAL MANEUVER/ ZOOM/
ASSOCIATION/ MARK DELETE/
AIS MESSAGE/ OWN TRACK DELETE/
TRIAL MODE CHANGE TGT TRACK DELETE*/
AIS SCALED SYMBOL CHART ALIGN/
DISPLAY SELECT/
RADAR COMBINE*/
[PICTURE] MOB/
USER DEFAULT
1 BACK
TLL*/
2
PICTURE1/ ANCHOR WATCH/
PICTURE2/ COLOR SHIFT/
PICTURE3/ ICON/ DISP*/
PICTURE4/ OWN TRK ALL ERASE
NEAR/ TGT TRK ALL ERASE*
FAR/ MARK ALL ERASE
NEAR BUOY/ DROP MARK
FAR BUOY/
ROUGH SEA/
SHIP/
HARBOR
COAST
* Not available on IMO type
1-69
1. RADAR OPERATION
5. Select "2".
6. Select function desired then push the scrollwheel or left button.
Description of function key programs
Item Description
[ECHO]
PICTURE Selects picture setup function.
IR Selects interference rejection level.
ES Selects echo stretch function.
EAV Selects echo averaging function.
NOISE REJ Turns noise rejector on/off.
ANT SELECT Selects antenna.
PULSE LENGTH Selects pulselength.
A/C SEA SELECT Selects A/C SEA adjustment method.
AUTO RAIN SELECT Selects AUTO RAIN level.
TUNE SELECT Selects tuning adjustment method.
ANT HEIGHT Sets antenna height.
SEA CONDITION Sets sea condition.
2ND ECHO REJ Turns 2nd trace echo rejector on/off.
PM Turns performance monitor on/off.
SART Turns SART setup conditions on/off.
WIPER Turns wiper (reduce weak and unwanted signals) on/off.
[STD KEY]
ALARM ACK Acknowledges alarm. (Silences audio alarm.)
STBY TX Toggles between stand-by and transmit.
HL OFF Turns heading line on/off.
EBL OFFSET Offsets EBL.
OFF CENTER Off centers the display.
CU TM RESET Returns own ship mark to point 75% of range in use.
PI LINE Turns PI line on/off.
VECTOR TIME Sets vector time.
VECTOR MODE Sets vector mode.
TARGET LIST Displays target list.
TRAIL Sets trail parameters.
BRILL Sets brilliance.
MARK Selects mark to inscribe.
MENU Opens the MAIN menu.
RANGE UP Raises the range scale.
RANGE DOWN Lowers the range scale.
ACQ Acquires target; activates sleeping AIS target.
TARGET DATA Shows target data for selected tracked target or AIS target.
TARGET CANCEL Cancels tracking of tracked target; sleeps AIS target.
1-70
1. RADAR OPERATION
Description of function key programs (cont from previous page)
Item Description
[TTAIS]
DISP TT Activates/deactivates TT.
DISP AIS Activates/deactivates AIS.
TARGET DATA & ACQ TT: Acquires target; shows data for tracked target selected.
AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; shows data for AIS target
selected.
PAST POSN INTERVAL Selects past position plotting interval.
REF MARK Inscribes reference mark (for target-based speed).
CPA LIMIT Turns CPA limit on/off.
CPA Enters CPA range.
TCPA Enters TCPA time.
AZ1 Sets Alarm Zone 1.
AZ2 Sets Alarm Zone 2.
TARGET LIST SORT Sorts target list.
TRIAL MANEUVER Executes trial maneuver.
ASSOCATION Converts tracked target to AIS target.
AIS MESSAGE Displays AIS message board.
TRIAL MODE CHANGE Switches between dynamic and static modes.
AIS SCALED SYMBOL Scales AIS target symbols according to target (ship) size.
[OPERATION]
ECHO COLOR Selects echo color.
BACK COLOR Selects background color.
RING Turns range rings on/off.
ALARM1 Sets no. 1 target alarm.
ALARM2 Sets no. 2 target alarm.
WATCH ALARM RESET Resets watch alarm.
ZOOM Enables zoom.
MARK DELETE Deletes mark (origin mark, waypoint mark, plotter mark).
OWN TRACK DELETE Deletes own ships tracks according to setting of OWN TRACK
menu (see page 5-15).
TGT TRACK DELETE Deletes other ships tracks according to setting of TARGET TRACK
menu (see page 5-15).
CHART ALIGN Aligns chart with radar picture.
DISPLAY SELECT Selects display mode.
RADAR COMBINE* Dual-radar display. *Non-IMO only
MOB Inscribes MOB mark.
USER DEFAULT Restores user defaults for [F1]-[F3].
(When "F-KEY" is selected at USER DEFAULT in OPERATION
(2/2) menu.)
1. Set equipment as desired.
2. Display F1, F2 or F3 menu as applicable.
3. Select USER DEFAULTS and long-push (more than one
second) the left button.
4. To recall a setting, select F1, F2 or F3 menu as applicable and
select USER DEFAULTS. The radar is then set to stand-by
and "USER DEFAULT" appears at the bottom right corner.
TLL Target latitude and longitude output (to chart plotter).
ANCHOR WATCH Enables the anchor watch alarm.
COLOR SHIFT Paint own ship's tracks in different colors.
ICON DISP Hides and shows boxes outside the effective display area.
OWN TRK ALL ERASE Erases all own ships tracks.
TGT TRK ALL ERASE Erases all other ships tracks.
MARK ALL ERASE Erases all marks.
DROP MARK Inscribe a drop mark.
1-71
1. RADAR OPERATION
Description of function key programs (cont from previous page)
Item Description
[PICTURE]
PICTURE1 PICTURE4 Actuates settings of user-programmed setup.
NEAR Optimum setting for short range detection using a range scale of 3
nm or less on calm seas
FAR Optimum setting for long range detection using a range scale of 6
nm or larger
NEAR BUOY Optimum setting for detecting navigation buoys, small vessels and
other small surface objects at close range
FAR BUOY Optimum setting for detecting navigation buoys, small vessels and
other small surface objects at long range
ROUGH SEA Optimum setting for rough weather or heavy rain
SHIP Optimum setting for detecting vessels
HARBOR Optimum setting for harbor navigation
COAST Optimum setting for coastal navigation
1.37 Ships Position

Select the source of ships position data as follows:
1. Right-click the OSN POSN box at the top right corner of the screen to show
the OS POSN menu.
[OS POSN MENU]
1 NAV AID
GPS1/GPS2/
DEAD RECKONING/
LAN
2 MANUAL L/L
0000.00 N
00000.00 W
3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT
OFF/ON
OS POSN menu
2. Select 1 NAV AID.
3. Select GPS1, GPS2 or DEAD RECKONING as appropriate.
GPS1: GPS navigator connected to nav port
GPS2: GPS navigator connected to SPEED LOG port or TRACK CONTROL
port.
1-72
1. RADAR OPERATION
4. If you have selected DEAD RECKONING do the following to enter position

manually. For GPS1 or GPS2, go to step 6.
a) Select 2 MANUAL L/L then push the scrollwheel. Enter latitude and longitude
position as follows.
b) Roll the scrollwheel to set appropriate digit in the latitude field then push the
scrollwheel. (You may push the scrollwheel again to skip a place.) For
keyboard operation, press appropriate numeric keys then press the [ENTER
MARK] key.
c) Set longitude similar to how you set latitude then push the scrollwheel. (For
keyboard operation, press the [ENTER MARK] key.)
Note: Co-ordinate polarity may be switched by rolling the scrollwheel, or
pressing the [2] key.
5. To use a navigation device connected to radars via a LAN, set 3 SIO DATA
LAN OUTPUT to ON, then select LAN at 1 NAV AID.
Note: When the AIS function is active, DEAD RECKONING is shown in gray to
indicate that it is not available for selection.
1-73
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.38 Second-trace Echoes

In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false
echoes (second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo
is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been
transmitted.
Tx repetition
Second-trace
echo
False echo
range
Actual range
Second-trace echoes
To reject second-trace echoes:

[ECHO]
1 BACK
ND
2 2 ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL
8 [PICTURE SELECT]
9 STC RANGE
+00
ECHO menu
ND
3. Select 2 2 ECHO REJ.
1-74
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.39 Brilliance of Screen Data

You can adjust relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric
readouts displayed on the screen.
1. Right-click the BRILL box at the bottom left corner of the screen to show the
BRILL menu.
[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)] * Not available [BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]

on IMO or A type
1 ECHO COLOR 1 BACK
YEL/GRN/ Choose 0 NEXT 2 BRG CURSOR
WHT/COLOR* to show page 2 3 EBL
2 PALETTE of the BRILL menu. 4 VRM
DAY-GRY/DAY-BLU/ 5 PI LINE
DUSK-GRY/DUSK-BLU/ 6 TT SYMBOL
NIGHT-GRY/NIGHT-BLU/ 7 AIS SYMBOL
3 PANEL DIMMER 8 L/L GRID
4 CHARACTER 9 MARK
5 CURSOR 0 CHART*
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL
8 HL Note: Four brilliance and color sets are
9 RING provided. For further details see
0 NEXT section 1.49.
BRILL menu
2. Select item you wish to adjust. (To go to the second page of the BRILL menu
select 0 NEXT and push the scrollwheel.)
Page 1 Page 2
Item Adjusts Item Adjusts
brilliance of; brilliance of;
1 ECHO COLOR See section 1.49. 2 BRG CURSOR Bearing cursor
2 PALETTE See section 1.49. 3 EBL EBLs
3 PANEL Backlighting of 4 VRM VRMs
DIMMER control unit
4 CHARACTER All alphanumeric 5 PI LINE PI lines
characters
5 CURSOR Cursor (+) and 6 TT SYMBOL TT symbols
arrow
6 ECHO Radar echoes 7 AIS SYMBOL AIS symbols
7 TRAIL Target trails 8 L/L Chart grid
8 HL Heading line 9 MARK All marks
9 RING Range rings 0 CHART Chart
3. Roll the scrollwheel to set brilliance level. The range of adjustment for items
except "HL" and "CURSOR" is 0-100%. The range of adjustment for HL and
CURSOR is 50-100%.
4. Push the right button once or twice to close the menu.
1-75
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.40 Watch Alarm

The watch alarm sounds the audio alarm at the selected time interval to help you
keep regular watch of the radar picture for safety or other purposes.
The WATCH box appears at right side of the screen with a watch alarm timer
counts down from value set (for example, "12:00").
WATCH
12:00
WATCH box
When a preset time interval has elapsed, the audible watch alarm is released,
the screen label WATCH turns red and the watch alarm timer freezes at "0:00."
To silence the alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the full keyboard or
left-click the ALARM ACK box. The label WATCH turns to normal color and the
watch alarm timer is reset to the initial value and starts the count-down
sequence again.
If you press the [ALARM ACK] key or click the box with the left button before the
selected time interval is reached, the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial
value and starts the count-down sequence again.
To set watch time interval:

2. Select 3 [ALARM] to open the ALARM menu.
[ALARM]
1 BACK
2 TARGET ALARM MODE
IN/OUT
3 TARGET ALARM MODE
1/2/3/4
4 WATCH ALARM
OFF/6M/10M/
12M/15M/20M
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
6 [ALARM OUT1]
7 [ALARM OUT2]
8 [ALARM OUT3]
9 [ALARM OUT4]
0 [PRIMARY ALARM]
ALARM menu
3. Select 4 WATCH ALARM.
4. Select appropriate time interval then push the right button twice to close the
menu.
1-76
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.41 Nav Data

Wind, depth, ocean current, water temperature, date and time and waypoint data
may be set up as follows:

2. Select 7 [NAV DATA].
[NAV DATA]
1 BACK
2 DEPTH
OFF/m/ft
3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE
10/20/50/
100/200/500
4 DEPTH MARK
000
5 CURRENT
OFF/ON
6 WIND
OFF/m/s/kn
7 TEMP
OFF/ON
8 DATE-TIME
OFF/UTC/LOCAL
9 LOCAL TIME ADJ
+00:00
0 WPT DATA
OFF/REL/TRUE
NAV DATA menu

3. Select appropriate options referring to the table on the next page for details.
1-77
1. RADAR OPERATION
Nav data menu description
Item Description
2 DEPTH Selects unit of depth measurement, or turn
depth indication off.
3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE Selects depth scale range. The echogram
shows the last 30 minutes of sounding along
the ships track.
4 DEPTH MARK Selects the depth at which to show the depth
mark.
5 CURRENT Turns ocean current display on (ocean current
relative to North) or off.
6 WIND Selects unit of wind speed measurement, or
turn wind indication off.
7 TEMP Turns water temperature indication on/off.
8 DATE-TIME Selects how to display date and time: OFF,
UTC or LOCAL.
9 LOCAL TIME ADJ If LOCAL is selected at 8 DATE-TIME, roll the
scrollwheel to set the time difference between
local time and UTC time. A negative value may
be selected by spinning the scrollwheel past
zero.
0 WPT DATA Turn waypoint data off or select waypoint data
reference, true or relative.
Note: Wind and current data require appropriate sensors. Depth data requires
appropriate echo-sounding equipment. Wind vector shows a direction from
which the wind blows in, relative to own ship heading, and labeled "T *."
Wind velocity is a true wind speed as a result of compensating for own
ships speed and orientation. Ocean current (tide) is the direction to which
the current is flowing away own ship position, relative to north.
N OS heading
0 Tide relative to north,

Present depth full scale 10 kn
20
40 W E
60
Last 30 minutes Wind direction relative to
of depth 80 OS heading, full scale
100 m 100 kn. TRUE WIND is a
30 20 10 min calculated value from the
S relative value and OS
Echogram Wind, tide graph heading.
Examples of depth echogram and wind, tide graph
1-78
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.42 Text Window

The text window, displayed at the right 1/4 of the screen, mainly shows nav data,
zoomed target, and tracked target data. You can set up this window as follows:

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZETEST]
[CUSTOMIZETEST]
1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]
CUSTOMIZETEST menu
3. Select 2 [DATA BOX].
[DATA BOX]
1 BACK
3 NAV DATA
OFF/ON
4 ZOOM
OFF/2TIMES/3TIMES
5 ZOOM DISPLAY
STAB GND/STAB HGD/
STAB NORTH/
TT TRACK
6 TARGET DATA
1BOX/2BOX/3BOX/
LARGE
DATA BOX menu

4. Select 3 NAV DATA.
6. Select 4 ZOOM.
7. Select OFF or zoom magnification factor (2TIMES or 3 TIMES).
8. If you selected a zoom factor at step 7, go to step 9. Otherwise, go to step
11.
9. Select 5 ZOOM DISPLAY.
1-79
1. RADAR OPERATION
10. Select zoom display format.

STAB GND: Ground stabilized (geographically Fixed)
STAB HDG: Heading stabilized (relative)
STAB NORTH: North stabilized (true)
TT TRACK: Zoom tracked targets.
11. Select 6 TARGET DATA.
12. Select quantity of tracked target data to show among 1BOX, 2BOX, 3BOX
and LARGE.
Nav Data or Zoom Nav Data or Zoom
Zoom 2 BOX
1 BOX 1 BOX
TT, AIS Functions TT, AIS Functions
Box Box
Warnings, Alerts Warnings, Alerts
Guidance Box Guidance Box
1 BOX 2 BOX
Note: Nav data or zoom is

3 BOX Nav Data or Zoom
automatically removed
when "3BOX" is selected.
2 BOX
LARGE
1 BOX
TT, AIS Functions TT, AIS Functions
Box Box
Warnings, Alerts Warnings, Alerts
Guidance Box Guidance Box
3 BOX LARGE
Tracked data setting and data box arrangement
1-80
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.43 Customizing Operation

Several operation items may be customized to suit your needs.

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZETEST] to open the CUSTOMIZETEST menu.
[CUSTOMIZETEST]
1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]
CUSTOMIZETEST menu
3. Select 7 [OPERATION].
[OPERATION]
1 BACK
2 WHEEL DRIVE
NORMAL/REVERSE
3 KEY BEEP
OFF/LO/MID/HI
4 REMOTE KEY
F*-KEY/
DISPLAY SELECT
5 POP UP GUIDANCE*
OFF/ON
6 OWN SHIP VECTOR
OFF/HDG/COURSE
7 STERN-UP
OFF/ON
8 SHUTTLE FERRY
OFF/MODE1/MODE2 * Not available on IMO or A type
0 NEXT
OPERATION menu
4. Set each item as appropriate, referring to the table on the next page for
details.
1-81
1. RADAR OPERATION
Operation menu items
Item No. Description Options

2 WHEEL DRIVE Select how to cycle data when NORMAL: Cycles numeral
using the scrollwheel. data in numeric order and
indication data in clockwise
order.
REVERSE: Reverse of
NORMAL.
3 KEY BEEP Key beeps when key sequence OFF: No key beep
has been correctly executed. LO, MID, HI: Loudness of
key beep
4 REMOTE KEY Select function of keys F1-F4 F*-KEY: Operates as
on control unit. function key.
DISPLAY: Control unit
operates radar it is
connected to.
5 POP UP Pop up guidance You may turn the guidance
GUIDANCE off or on.
(Available on B, C
and W types)
6 OWN SHIP Select what the own ship vector OFF: No own ship vector
VECTOR displays. HDG: Vector shows heading
direction.
COURSE: Vector shows
course.
7 STERN-UP Enables/disables the stern-up ON: Enables stern-up mode.
presentation mode. OFF: Disables stern-up
mode.
8 SHUTTLE Turns shuttle ferry mode on or OFF: Disables shuttle ferry
FERRY off. mode.
MODE1: Head-up picture is
rotated 180.
MODE2: Head-up picture is
rotated 180 and the gyro
reading has 180 added to it
or subtracted from it.
1-82
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.44 Alert Box

When error or alarm setting violation is found, the applicable indication appears
(red, flashing) in the Alert Box and the buzzer sounds. The Alert Box is
composed of four lines of information, as shown below.
Silence the buzzer with the [ALARM ACK] key or select the ALARM ACK box
then push the left button. The buzzer and the flashing stop but the alarm
indication remains on the display until the reason for the alarm is removed.
Alert Box Configuration
(lines inside box not present in actual box)
Line 1: Name of ERROR or ALARM category
Line 2: Name of error or alarm
Line 3: Message Category WARNING
Line 4: Name of warning
Display Example 1: ERROR and WARNING

- - - - - SYSTEM ERROR - - - - -
VIDEO
- - - - - - WARNING - - - - - -
FORMAT CARD DATA
Display Example 2: ERROR only

- - - - AIS ALARM MESSAGE - - - -
AIS: no valid ROT info
rmation
Display Example 3: ERROR and WARNING

- - - - AIS ALARM MESSAGE - - - -
AIS: no valid ROT info
- - - - - - WARNING - - - - - -
RD CARD DATA
1-83
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.44.1 Alarm description

Alarm description
Alarm name Visual alarm, reason To quit alarm status

(visual
indication)
SYSTEM ERROR
AZIMUTH No antenna rotation signal Acknowledge indication by pressing
the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
HEADLINE No heading signal
the ALARM ACK box. Restore signal
KEY No key signal or remove reason for to remove
RF No RF communications signal indication.
TRIGGER No trigger signal

TT SYSTEM TT system malfunction
ERROR
VIDEO No video signal
SENSOR ERROR
GYRO The indication "GYRO" (in red) Match the on-screen HDG indication
appears and the HDG indication with the actual compass. The
reads "***.*". The orientation indication "HEADING SET" appears.
mode is automatically set for Press the [MODE] key to erase the
head-up. TT, radar map, AIS, and indication.
echo averaging are disabled.
LOG The indication "LOG" (in red) If the SDME has failed, use another
appears and the and the speed speed sensor.
indication shows "**.* kn" if the
speed signal is lost more than
30 s. For BT error, CPA and
TCPA for AIS are not calculated.
EPFS The indication "EPFS" (in red) Acknowledge indication by pressing
appears and the position display the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
shows all asterisks if the position the ALARM ACK box. Restore signal
input is lost more than 30 s. The to remove indication. Message cannot
indication also appears when be erased if position signal is missing;
switching from DGPS to GPS it is automatically erased when the
and vice versa. Radar map, AIS, signal is restored.
and echo averaging are disabled.
DATUM For the IMO type, the indication Acknowledge indication by pressing
"DATUM" (in red) appears if the the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
datum is other than WGS-84 or the ALARM ACK box. Use WGS-84
WGS-84 is not input. AIS is datum.
inoperative with datum other than
WGS-84.
1-84
1. RADAR OPERATION

(visual
indication)
AIS ALARM (See section 4.15.)
DUAL RADAR ALARM (Non-IMO only)
EXT RADAR External radar is in standby Set external radar in transmit to erase
STBY indication.
EXT RADAR External radar malfunction Restore external radar to normal
ERROR condition to erase indication.
EXT RADAR Problem with heading data at Re-set external radar's heading data
HDG SET external radar. to erase indication.
OTHER ALARM
ANCHOR Ship has drifted more than a Acknowledge indication by pressing
WATCH threshold value. the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
the ALARM ACK box.
ARRIVAL Own ship has arrived to a Acknowledge indication by pressing
waypoint. the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
the ALARM ACK box.
CHECK INT-SW Interswitch malfunction Acknowledge indication by pressing
the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
the ALARM ACK box. Check
interswitch.
DEPTH Depth is lower or higher than Acknowledge indication by pressing
threshold value. the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
the ALARM ACK box.
HEADING SET Heading signal needs to be reset. Press the [MODE] key to erase the
message. Match the on-screen HDG
readout with the actual compass
reading, if necessary.
MEMORY CARD Memory card is full Acknowledge indication by pressing
FULL the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
the ALARM ACK box.
TARGET ALARM A target has entered (or exited) Acknowledge indication by pressing
the target alarm zone. Target the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
flashes. the ALARM ACK box.
WATCH WATCH 0:00 Press the [ALARM ACK] key or click
the WATCH box with the left button.
(WATCH appears and time count
The WATCH box is displayed in
freezes at 0:00).
normal video and the timer is reset.
XTE Own ship is off course more than Acknowledge indication by pressing
threshold value. the [ALARM ACK] key or left-clicking
the ALARM ACK box.
1-85
1. RADAR OPERATION

(visual
indication)
TT ALARM (See section 3.15.)
WARNING
AIS AIS transponder is transmitting. Indication disappears when
TRANSMITTING procedure is completed.
CABLE ATT ADJ Adjustment (at installation)
according to length of antenna
cable.
DELETE CARD Deleting data from memory card.
DATA
FORMAT CARD Formatting memory card.
DATA
PM Performance monitor active
POWER Loading installation settings from
RESTART memory card.
RD CARD DATA Reading from memory card.
SART Radar set up to receive SART.
TUNE Initializing tuning.
INITIALIZE
USER DEFAULT Restoring user defaults.
WR CARD DATA Writing to memory card.
Note: It is not possible to acknowledge the radar critical alarms from external equipment
without displaying the reason/cause for the alarm. Radar critical alarms are TT COLLISION
and AIS COLLISION alarm.
1-86
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.44.2 Alarm list

The alarm list displays the names of violated alarms, including the time and date
violated. A maximum of 28 alarms are shown, on four pages. Unacknowledged
alarms are displayed first in the list (in red text), in the order in which they appear
in the Alert Box.
An unacknowledged alarm can be acknowledged from the list by selecting its

number and hitting the left button. To erase the data for the number selected, hit
the left button again. To erase all alarm indications, select 9 REFRESH DATA
and long-push the left button.
To display the alarm list, put the cursor in the Alert Box and push the right button.
[ALARM LIST (1/1)]
1 BACK (L=TOP)
2 - - - SENSOR ERROR - - - Alarm category*
EPFS Alarm name
03/APR/2008 09:34 Date and time of violation
3 - - - AIS ALARM - - -
AIS GUARD * AIS ALARM
03/APR/2008 08:02 DUAL RADAR ALARM
4 - - - SENSOR ERROR - - - OTHER ALARM
LOG PRIMARY ALARM
03/APR/2008 07:18 SENSOR ERROR
5 - - - PRIMARY ALARM - - - SYSTEM ERROR
TT COLLISION TT ALARM
03/APR/2008 06:50
6 - - - - TT ALARM - - - -
TT LOST
03/APR/2008 06:43
7 - - - OTHER ALARM - - -
DEPTH
02/APR/2008 23:53
8 - - - OTHER ALARM - - -
WATCH
02/APR/2008 20:00
9 REFRESH DATA (L=CLR)
0 NEXT
When there is more than one alarm page you can switch between them with 0
NEXT and 0 BACK (last page).
ZDA sentence required in order to display time in Alarm list.
1-87
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.44.3 Outputting alarm signals

Four ports are provided from which to output alarm signals to external equipment.
Select the port and alarm signals to output as follows:
1. Left-click the MENU box to open the menu. [ALARM]

2. Select 3 [ALARM]. 1 BACK
2 GUARD ALARM MODE
IN/OUT
3 GUARD ALARM LEVEL
1/2/3/4
4 WATCH ALARM
OFF/6M/10M/
12M/15/20M
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL
OFF/LOW/MID/HIGH
6 [ALARM OUT1]
7 [ALARM OUT2]
ALARM menu 8 [ALARM OUT3]
9 [ALARM OUT4]
0 [PRIMARY ALARM]
3. Select appropriate "ALARM OUT" item (6-9).

ALARM OUT1, 2: Normally closed [ALARM OUT1]
ALARM OUT3, 4: Normally open 1 BACK
4. Select an alarm to output. The alarm 2
selected is underlined. TARGET ALARM
5. Repeat step 5 to select other alarms to WATCH ALARM
TT NEW TARGET
output. TT LOST TARGET
6. Push the right button three times to close the TT CPA LIMIT
menu. TT AUTO ACQ TGT FULL
TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL
TT SYSTEM ERROR
AIS NEW TARGET
AIS LOST TARGET
AIS CPA LIMIT
AIS TGT FULL
AZIMUTH
HEAD LINE
TRIGGER VIDEO
GYRO LOG EPFS
XTE
ARRIVAL WPT
DEPTH
ALARM ACK OUT
OPERATOR FITNESS
ANCHOR WATCH
NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS
9 ALARM OUT POLARITY
NORMAL/INVERT
ALARM OUT1 menu
1-88
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.44.4 Primary alarm

Violated alarms appear in the Alert Box in the order of priority shown in the table
below.
Priority Alarm group Alarms
1 Error (sensor Azimuth, Datum EPFS, Gyro, Headline, Key, Log, RF,
and system) Trigger, TT System Error, Video
2 Primary See the PRIMARY ALARM menu below. TT CPA LIMIT
and NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS are ON in default.
3 Other alarms Any alarm not listed here.
If desired you can assign primary alarms the same priority as Error alarms.

2. Select 3 [ALARM].
3. Select 0 [PRIMARY ALARM].
[PRIMARY ALARM]
1 BACK
2
TARGET ALARM
WATCH ALARM
TT NEW TARGET
TT LOST TARGET
TT AUTO ACQ TGT FULL

TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL
AIS NEW TARGET

AIS LOST TARGET
AIS TGT FULL
XTE
ARRIVAL WPT
DEPTH
ANCHOR WATCH
NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS
PRIMARY ALARM menu
4. Select alarm(s) for which you want to give priority equal to that of Error
alarms. Selected alarms are underlined.
5. Press the right button several times to close the menu.
1-89
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.45 Interswitch
The interswitch of this radar uses an Ethernet to transfer video and control
signals. A digital signal transfers the video and control signals. You can connect
four antennas and eight display units. Set radar display and antenna groups
from the ANTENNA SELECT display.
When you switch to a different antenna, the heading skew and timing adjustment
(set at installation) for that antenna is automatically applied.
The ANTENNA box at the upper left position shows current antenna selection.
NM DISPLAY
6 /1 RADAR
HEAD UP TB RM
ANTENNA Box ANT1M X-BAND
- ANT1: Antenna no. PULSE S1
- M: Master (or S for Slave) PICTURE4
- X-band (or S-band)
1.45.1 Displaying antenna information

The ANTENNA SELECT display shows:
Radar band, output power and antenna position of each antenna currently
powered. (If an antenna is not powered, its data area is blank.)
Current antenna and display combinations.
Your radar number
To show the ANTENNA SELECT display, right-click the ANTENNA.
[ANT SELECT]
Antenna no. ANT1: X-BAND Radar band (X or S)

Output power 12 FORE Radar antenna position (set at installation)
(kW) ANT2: X-BAND (FORE, MAIN TOP,MAIN 2ND,
12 MAIN TOP
MAIN 3RD,
ANT3: X-BAND
12 MAIN TOP AFT, PORT, STARBOARD)
ANT4: X-BAND
12 AFT
OWN RADAR No.: 2 Own radar no.
1 DISP1 ANT1 Using the information displayed in this

MASTER example, the antenna system configuration
2 DISP2 ANT2 would look like this.
Current display and MASTER
antenna combinations 3 DISP3 ANT3
MASTER
ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 ANT4
4 DISP4 ANT4
MASTER
9 STORE INTER-SW
NO/YES
0 SUB MONITOR* DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4
OFF/ON
* Not available on IMO

or A radar. HUB
1-90
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.45.2 Presetting antenna and display combinations

You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and
display in the radar system. As an example, the procedure below shows how to
select the no. 1 antenna unit for the no. 2 display unit.
1. Right-click the ANTENNA box to show the ANT SELECT display.
[ANT SELECT]
ANT1: X-BAND
12 FORE
ANT2: X-BAND
12 MAIN TOP
ANT3: X-BAND
12 MAIN TOP
ANT4: X-BAND
12 AFT
OWN RADAR No.: 2
1 DISP1 ANT1
MASTER
2 DISP2 ANT2
MASTER
3 DISP3 ANT3
MASTER
4 DISP4 ANT4
MASTER
9 STORE INTER-SW
NO/YES
0 SUB MONITOR*
OFF/ON
* Not available on IMO or

A radar.
2. Select the display unit for which to select an antenna (at the next step). For
example, select 2 DISP2 to select the no. 2 display unit.
3. The cursor is now selecting the current display and antenna combination for
the no. 2 display unit. Roll the scrollwheel to display ANT1 MASTER and
push the left button.
4. Repeat step 3 and 4 to set other display and antenna combinations.
5. Select 0 STORE INTER-SW.
6. Select YES to save display and antenna combinations.
Selection considerations
An antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units. Select one
MASTER display unit for one antenna unit. If two antenna units are set as
masters, the display last-set as master becomes the master and all other
displays are automatically changed to slave.
An antenna unit without a MASTER display cannot be selected on the sub
display units. If there is no antenna unit set as master, the lowest number
display is automatically set as master.
1-91
1. RADAR OPERATION
Radar functions are controlled independently, dependently or commonly

depending on selection as Master or Slave.
RADAR FUNCTIONS CONTROL MASTER DISPLAY OPTION SLAVE DISPLAY OPTION
AIS function Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Brilliance Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Echo stretch Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Echo averaging Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Echo trails Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
EBL Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Lat/long data Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Presentation mode Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Speed data Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Target alarm Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
TT, AIS on/off Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
TT, AIS track interval Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Vector mode Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Vector time Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
VRM Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Wiper Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Zoom Independent Desired Value Can be set Desired Value Can be set
Range Independent (Echo Sampling at Master Range)
(Sampling at Master)
A/C SEA Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
A/C RAIN Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
Auto Rain Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
Gain Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
IR Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
Picture setting Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
STBY/TX Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
Tuning Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
Reference point Dependent Control Desired Value Can be set Cannot control
TT LOST alarm Common Control Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled
TT COLLISION alarm Common Control Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled
TT alarms ACK Common Control Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled
TT acquire Common Control Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled
TT/AIS AZ Common Control Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled
If the message "CHECK INTERSWITCH" appears, do one of the following as

applicable:
- If only your antenna is not displayed on the ANTENNA SELECT display,
LAN line in your processor may be faulty. In this case, use the standalone
mode.
- If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the ANTENNA SELECT
display, LAN line in other processor unit may be faulty. In this case, see page
1-91 for how to select a different antenna unit.
When the Network fails, the Interswitch does not work, but standalone
operation is possible.
Neither antenna nor display may be selected when the dual-radar display
(non- IMO only) is active.
1-92
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.45.3 Selecting an antenna

For the ship that carries multiple antennas, you may choose the antenna to use
as follows:
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ANTENNA box at the left side of
the screen.
ANT1 X-BAND (M)
2. Roll the scrollwheel to choose an antenna then push the left button.
1.46 Cursor Data

Cursor data can be shown in latitude and longitude
position or cursors X-Y coordinates.
3440.849 N
+ 13518.303 E
Left-click the CURSOR DATA box at the right side of
the display to select the cursor data to show. The CURSOR DATA
box (L/L position)
cursor data changes in the sequence shown below.
3430.323 N Latitude and longitude

+ 13508.263 E position of cursor
9.649NM
+ 9.683NM
Cursor X-Y position
Cursor data options

Note 1: For the X-Y coordinates display, the Y-axis is the heading line, right/top
is "plus" and left/lower is "minus."
Note 2: When displaying latitude and longitude position and the cursor has been
aligned (on the PLOTTER menu), the indication "CHART ALIGN"
appears at the right side of the screen (in red).
Note 3: Cursor data reads "- - -.-" when the cursor is placed outside the effective
display area.
Note 4: Cursor bearing format (true or relative) and cursor range unit (nm, sm,
km or kyd) are available as below.
Type Cursor bearing Cursor Menu operation
format range unit
IMO Yes No 2 [MARK]9 EBL CURSOR BEARING
A Yes No
B Yes Yes 2 [MARK] 9 [EBL, VRM CURSOR SET] CURSOR
C Yes Yes BEARING, CURSOR RANGE
W Yes No
1-93
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.47 Performance Monitor

A performance monitor is required for a radar installed on vessels of 300 GT and
upward engaged in international voyages. Two units are available:
X-band radar: PM-31 (9410 45 MHz)
S-band radar: PM-51 (3050 30 MHz).
The performance monitor is incorporated in the antenna unit.
1.47.1 Activating, deactivating the performance monitor

[ECHO]
1 BACK
ND
2 2 ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL
8 [PICTURE SELECT]
9 STC RANGE
+00
ECHO menu
3. Select 4 PM.
"PM" appears on the display when the performance monitor is active.
1.47.2 Checking radar performance

1. The radar is automatically set up as follows:
Range: 24 nm
Pulselength: Long
Shadow Sector: Off
A/C SEA: Off
A/C RAIN: Off
Echo Stretch: Off
Echo Average: Off
Video Contrast: 2-B
Tune: Auto
Gain: Initial setting (as set with PM GAIN ADJ at installation)
2. Turn on the performance monitor referring to section 1.47.1.
3. After observing the results turn off the performance monitor.
1-94
1. RADAR OPERATION
The range scale is automatically set to 24 nm. The radar screen will show one or
two arcs. If the radar transmitter and receiver are in good working conditions in
as much as the original state when the monitor was turned up, the innermost
arcs should appear between 13.5 to 18.5 nm. The performance monitor can
observe a total of 10 dB loss in transmitter and receiver.
Display Radar State

Transmitter: normal
Receiver: normal
13.5 nm
to 18.5 nm
Transmitter and receiver:

No arc is indication of10 db
13.5 nm loss. Replacement of the
to 18.5 nm magnetron is necessary.
Note: The lengths of the arcs may vary according to installation environment.
Judge the strength of the echo that appears within 90 behind own ship to
confirm if the radar is working properly or not.
1-95
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.48 Own Ship Marker

Own ship marker ( ) may be inscribed on the screen as below. You may enter
ten such symbols. Each own ship symbols is shown with a number.
1. Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the screen. The
guidance box now reads "MARK SELECT / MARK MENU."
MARK
Mark type last 1
selected, mark -> +
number - - -m, - - -m Dimensions of
own ship
Mark box
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00000.00 N
000000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK menu
3. Select "2".
4. Select OWN SHIP SHAPE. (On the W-type, the indication
1
"OS" appears to the right of the MARK box.)
5. Push the right button to close the menu. 10 2
6. Use the trackball to select the own ship symbol at the bottom
9 3
left corner.
7. Roll the scrollwheel to select the point number for which you 8 4
want to change its position. See figure at right. 7 5

6
8. Push the left button. The cursor positions at the point number
selected.
9. Use the trackball to drag the point to location desired.
10. Push the left button to confirm selected location.
11. Repeat steps 6-10 continue changing symbol shape.
1-96
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.49 Color and Brilliance Sets

This radar provides six sets of color and brilliance sets to match any ambient
lighting condition.
1.49.1 Selecting color and brilliance set

Left-click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen to select color and brilliance
set from among BRILL1 BRILL4. The default specifications of each brilliance
set are is in the table below.
TEXT
PALETTE BRILL PANEL OTHERS COLOR BKGD/CIRCLE
DAY-GRY 100 15 15 GREEN GRY/BLK
DAY-BLU 100 15 15 WHITE BLU/BLU
DUSK-GRY 20 10 15 GREEN GRY/BLU
DUSK-BLU 20 10 15 WHITE BLU/BLU
NIGHT-GRY 4 5 15 RED GRY/BLK
NIGHT-BLU 4 5 15 WHITE BRT-BLU/BRT-BLU
1.49.2 Presetting color and brilliance set

1. Right-click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen to open the BRILL
menu.
[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)]
1 ECHO COLOR
YEL/GRN/
WHT/COLOR*
2 PALETTE
DAY-GRY/DAY-BLU/
DUSK-GRY/DUSK-BLU/
NIGHT-GRY/NIGHT-BLU/
3 PANEL DIMMER
4 CHARACTER
5 CURSOR
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL
8 HL
9 RING
0 NEXT * Not available on IMO or A type
BRILL menu
2. Select 1 ECHO COLOR.
3. Select echo color desired. "COLOR," available on the B, C and W types,
displays echoes in colors of red, yellow and green, corresponding to signal
levels of strong, medium and weak.
1-97
1. RADAR OPERATION
4. Select 2 PALETTE.
5. Select desired time of day and background color combination.
TEXT
PALETTE BRILL PANEL OTHERS COLOR BKGD/CIRCLE
DAY-GRY 100 15 15 GREEN GRY/BLK
DAY-BLU 100 15 15 WHITE BLU/BLU
DUSK-GRY 20 10 15 GREEN GRY/BLU
DUSK-BLU 20 10 15 WHITE BLU/BLU
NIGHT-GRY 4 5 15 RED GRY/BLK
NIGHT-BLU 4 5 15 WHITE BRT-BLU/BRT-BLU
6. Set brilliance-related items referring to section 1.39.

7. Push the right button to close the BRILL menu.
Note: The above default settings are restored whenever the setting for 2
PALETTE is changed.
1-98
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.50 Reference Position

The reference position for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers
(heading line, stern mark, etc.) can be antenna position or consistent common
reference point (CCRP), which is a location on own ship to which all horizontal
measurements, for example range, bearing, relative course, relative speed,
closest point of approach (CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA), are
normally referenced.
To select reference position, right-click the REF POINT indication at the top of
the screen to select ANT or CCRP as applicable.
The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as
shown below. If the CCRP is positioned outside of the effective display area, the
bearing scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail.
Radar antenna Conning position is at

position is at X
center of display
center of display
ANT position CCRP position
Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to
reference position as in the table below.
Markers, measurements and reference point
Reference point
Category Item
CCRP Antenna position
Range and bearing EBL Range and Range and bearing
measurement VRM bearing measured from
measured from antenna position
Cursor
CCRP
PI line
Range ring
Drop mark
Origin mark
Graphics Heading line Drawn from Drawn from
Stern mark CCRP antenna position
Beam line
Own ship vector
Own ship track
1-99
1. RADAR OPERATION
Markers, measurements and reference point (con't)
Reference point
Category Item
CCRP Antenna position
Bearing cursor Drawn with Drawn with
CCRP at center antenna position at
center
Course, speed Calculated with Calculated with
center
CPA, TCPA Calculated with Calculated with
center
BCR, BCT Calculated from bow position
Own ship data Heading Data from sensor, regardless of
Speed reference point selected
Course over ground
Speed over ground
Own L/L
1-100
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.51 Switching Hub HUB-100 (option)

The HUB-100 provides switching for a card interface unit and multiple processor
units (max. 7), using an Ethernet interface (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T). LEDs
display link/activity, mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) and collision statuses.
No operation is required of the user. Simply turn on the HUB-100s AC power

source to power it.
LED display
The LEDs on the top of the unit light, flash or go off according to equipment
status. When the equipment is powered all LEDs light then go off.
LEDs
Switching Hub HUB-100
LED status and meaning
LED Status Meaning

Power Lit Equipment powered
Off Equipment off
Link/Act Lit Connection with terminal normal
Off Connection with terminal disconnected
Flashing Data TX or RX
FDx/Col Lit Full-duplex
Off Half-duplex
Flashing Collision
100M Lit 100Mbps connection
Off 10Mbps connection
1-101
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.52 Anchor Watch

The anchor watch feature alerts you when your ship has traveled a distance
greater than a threshold value, when it should be at rest. When the anchor
watch is active, an orange dashed circle marks the anchor watch range. If your
ship goes outside the circle, "ANCHOR WATCH" appears in the Alert Box.
Alarm
setting
Your ship's position, where

you start the anchor watch. : Alarm triggered
2. Select 2 [MARK].
3. Select 5 ANCHOR WATCH.
4. Select ON.
5. Roll the scrollwheel to set the alarm range, from 0-9.99 (nm).
1-102
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.53 Drop Mark

The operator inscribes a drop mark ( ) at a selected location to find the range
and bearing from own ship to the mark. This can be useful for marking a point to
avoid while navigating to a destination.
1.53.1 Activating the drop mark feature

2. Select 2 [MARK].
[MARK]
1 BACK
2 OWN SHIP MARK
OFF/MIN/SCALED
3 STERN MARK
OFF/ON
4 [PI LINE]
5 ANCHOR WATCH
OFF/ON
0.0NM
6 DROP MARK
OFF/ON
7 [INS MARK] *1
8 EBL OFFSET BASE
STAB GND/STAB HDG/
STAB NORTH
3. Select 6 DROP MARK.

4. Select ON. Two "DROP MARK" boxes appear at the bottom of the display.
(See the figure on the next page.)
5. Push the right button several times to close the menu.
1-103
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.53.2 Inscribing a drop mark

1. Left-click one of the DROP MARK boxes at the bottom of the screen.
2. Put the cursor on the point you want to measure the range and bearing and
push the left button. A drop mark is inscribed on the screen and range and
bearing between own ship and the drop mark are shown below
corresponding DROP MARK box.
350 000 010
340 020
330 030
320 040
310 050
300 060
290 070
280 080
270 090
260 100
250 110
240 120
230 Drop 130
220 Mark 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
No. 1 DROP DROP1 DROP2 No. 2 DROP
229.8T 4.532NM 90.38T 2.873NM MARK box
MARK box
Range and bearing

to drop mark
1.53.3 Erasing a drop mark

Left-click the appropriate DROP MARK box until the drop mark and its data are
erased. (The DROP MARK box remains on the screen until the drop mark
feature is turned off from the menu.)
1-104
1. RADAR OPERATION
1.54 Sub Monitor (A, B, C and W types)

The picture from a radar outside the LAN network can be shown on this radar
(processor unit+display unit+control unit).
1. Put the cursor in the ANTENNA box at the upper left side of the screen.
2. Right-click to show the ANT SELECT menu.
[ANT SELECT]
ANT1: X-BAND
12 FORE
ANT2: X-BAND
12 MAIN TOP
ANT3: X-BAND
12 MAIN TOP
ANT4: X-BAND
12 AFT
OWN RADAR No.: 2
1 DISP1 ANT1
MASTER
2 DISP2 ANT2
MASTER
3 DISP3 ANT3
MASTER
4 DISP4 ANT4
MASTER
9 STORE INTER-SW
NO/YES
0 SUB MONITOR*
OFF/ON
* Not available on IMO or A radar.

3. Spin the scrollwheel to select 0 SUB MONITOR then push the left button.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select ON then push the left button.
The antenna box shows "SUB" and the image from the sub monitor is shown
on this radar
Antenna-related functions of the sub monitor; for example, pulselength, cannot

be controlled from this radar.
1-105
1. RADAR OPERATION
This page intentionally left blank.
1-106
2. RADAR OBSERVATION
2.1 General
2.1.1 Minimum and maximum ranges
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of
1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate
from the point representing the antenna position.
It is mainly dependent on the pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing

such as main bang reduction and digital quantization. It is a good practice to use
a shorter range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture.
The IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) requires the minimum range to be less than
40 m, respectively. This series of radars satisfy this requirement.
Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably
depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the
waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of
the target, and the atmospheric conditions.
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar
horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by
about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is
given in the following equation.
R max = 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 )
where Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)

h1: antenna height (m)
h2 : target height (m)
Radar horizon
Optical horizon
For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;
R max= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm
It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which

absorbs the radar signal).
2-1
X-band and S-band

In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant
difference between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation
condition, an S-band radar would have better detection than an X-band radar.
Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing
resolution and range resolution.
Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the
echoes received from two targets that are at the same range and close together.
It is proportional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the
wavelength. The length of the antenna radiator should be selected for a bearing
resolution better than 2.5 (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally satisfied
with a radiator of 1.2 m (4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar requires
a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6 m) or longer.
Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received
from two targets that are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is
determined by pulselength only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the
discrimination better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars.
Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors
having an echoing area of 10 m2.
Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of
a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically
depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually
taken relative to the ships heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading
line at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To
minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, put the target echo at the
extreme position on the screen by selecting a suitable range.
Range measurement
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the
radar. Generally, there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings
and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the
screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range
to a target. The variable range markers diameter is increased or decreased so
that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the operator to
obtain more accurate range measurements.
2-2
2.2 False Echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no
target or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if
you understand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are
shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of
the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often
removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C SEA
control.
True
echo
Target
Own ship
Multiple
echo
Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side
of the beam, called "sidelobes." If a target exists where it can be detected by the
side lobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on
both sides of the true echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on
short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced through careful
reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
Target A
Target B
(Spurious) Target B
(True)
Sidelobe echoes
2-3
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions
on the screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and
the other is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on
or close to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a
large metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on
the screen.
Target ship
Own ship
True
echo
False
Mirror image echo
of target ship
Virtual image
Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar
beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be
detected.
Radar
antenna
Radar
mast
Shadow sector
Shadow sectors
2-4
2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)

2.3.1 SART description
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3
cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received
causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete
radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 s) through
the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 s) through the band
back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve
complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match
that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver.
If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots
equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display my
show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional
dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nautical miles, will be
interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker
and smaller than the original dots.
Screen A: When SART Screen B: When SART
is distant is close
Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.
Echo from SART Radar antenna
beamwidth
Echo from
24 NM 1.5 NM SART
Position of
SART
Own ship
position Own ship
position Position of
SART mark SART
length
9500 MHz Radar receiver
9200 MHz Sweep time bandwidth
7.5 s
95 s
Low speed sweep signal

Sweep start
High speed sweep signal
SART
2-5
2.3.2 Showing SART marks on the radar display

This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART
detection. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best
tuning condition. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART
marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all
frequencies in the 9 GHz band. When the radar approaches the SART in
operation, the SART marks will enlarge to large arcs, blurring a large part of the
screen.
To set up for SART detection do the following:

2. Select 1 [ECHO].
[ECHO]
1 BACK
ND
2 2 ECHO REJ
OFF/ON
3 TUNE INITIALIZE
4 PM
OFF/ON
5 SART
OFF/ON
6 WIPER
OFF/1/2
CIRCLE/WIDE/ALL
8 [PICTURE SELECT]
9 STC RANGE
+00
ECHO menu
3. Select 5 SART.
4. Select ON.
With SART turned on radar functions are set as follows:
Range: 12 nm
Pulselength: Long
Echo Stretch: Off
Noise Rejector: Off
Echo Averaging: Off
Interference Rejector: Off
Performance Monitor: Off
A/C RAIN: Off
"SART" appears at the bottom of the display when this feature is active. Be sure
to turn off the SART feature when SART detection is no longer your objective.
2-6
2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SARTs

SART range errors
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the
SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is
displayed may be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART.
When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first
of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.
Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with
the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz
are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25
MHz with short pulses on short ranges.
A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so
it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the
SART.
Radar side lobes

As the SART is approached, side lobes from the radar antenna may show the
SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed
by the use of the anti-clutter sea control although it may be operationally useful
to observe the side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions
and also they will confirm that the SART is near to own ship.
Note: SART information excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 OPERATION OF

MARINE RADAR FOR SART DETECTION.
2-7
2.4 RACON
A RACON is a radar beacon that emits radar receivable signals in the radar
frequency spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general,
the RACON signal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo
originating at a point just beyond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse
coded pattern. Note that the position on the radar display is not accurate.
RACON
RACON
2.5 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE)

An RTE is a radar transponder is mounted on navigation buoys and masts of
small crafts to significantly improve their detection by radar. Unlike a SART or
RACON, which are passive, the RTE receives a radar signal, amplifies it and
re-transmits it, with the intention of making the target's signal look larger on a
radar display. The RTE is available in X-band and S-band types.
2-8
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)
3.1 Usage Precautions
WARNING CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied The plotting accuracy and response of
upon for the safety of vessel and crew. this TT meets IMO standards.
The navigator has the responsibility to Tracking accuracy is affected by the
check all aids available to confirm following:
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational Tracking accuracy is affected by course
principles and common sense. change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
This TT automatically tracks abrupt course change. (The actual
automatically or manually acquired radar amount depends on gyrocompass
targets and calculates their courses and specifications.)
speeds, indicating them by vectors. Since The amount of tracking delay is inversely
the data generated by the auto plotter proportional to the relative speed of the
are based on what radar targets are target. Delay is on the order of 1530
selected, the radar must always be seconds for high relative speed; 3060
optimally tuned for use with the auto seconds for low relative speed.
plotter, to ensure required targets will not Display accuracy is affected by the
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea following:
returns and noise will not be acquired - Echo intensity
and tracked. - Radar transmission pulsewidth
- Radar bearing error
A target does not always mean a land- - Gyrocompass error
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels - Course change (own ship and target)
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes The data generated by TT, AIS and
with environment, the operator should video plotter are intended for
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN reference only.
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the Refer to official nautical charts for
radar screen. detailed and up-to-date information.
3-1
3.2 Controls for TT

Keyboard
The TT uses the keys shown below.
OFF ON OFF ON
1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE
4 5 6
CENTER RESET LINE
F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 ENTER TARGET
CANCEL
- CANCEL
ACQ: Manually acquires a target.

TARGET DATA: Displays data on tracked target
chosen with the trackball.
TARGET CANCEL: Terminates tracking of tracked
target chosen with the trackball.
Control unit RCU-014

Trackball
With the cursor inside the effective display area, you can access TT functions by
rolling the scrollwheel or choosing appropriate TT function from the CURSOR
menu.
Roll the scrollwheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to
access respective TT function:
TT TARGET DATA & ACQ: Manually acquires a target, or displays data of the
cursor-selected tracked target.
TARGET CANCEL: Cancels tracking on cursor-selected tracked
target.
3-2
3.3 Activating, Deactivating TT

To activate or deactivate the TT:
Left-click the arrow in the TT ACQ MODE box at the right side of the display to
show OFF, MAN, AUTO or AUTO MAN as appropriate
TT AUTO
MAN
TT ACQ MODE box
3.4 Entering Own Ship's Speed

The TT requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW,
SOG or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects). Manual
input is also possible.
For automatic or manual input, see section 1.13. For echo-referenced speed
input follow the procedure below.
3.4.1 Echo-referenced speed input

The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when:
The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar.
The vessel has no device (doppler sonar, speed log, etc.) that can measure
ship's bow-stern, port-starboard movement.
If you select echo-referenced speed, the TT calculates own ship's speed relative
to a fixed reference target. The number of targets may be 1, 2 or 3. When a
plural of objects are selected, the mean value is used, for stabilization and
speed.
display "REF MARK / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Select a small fixed island or any radar prominent point located at 0.2 to 24
nm from own ship.
3-3
3. Push the left button to enter the reference mark. (The mark may also be
entered by pressing the [ACQ] key on the full keyboard.)
The reference target mark (see below) appears at the cursor position and
the own ship position data label changes from "LOG," "NAV" or "MANUAL" to
"REF." Note that it takes three minutes before a new speed is displayed. If
tracking has failed for a reference target, the target is marked with a lost
target mark (symbol formed with two triangles).
changes to in three minutes

R1 R1
Reference target
4. Repeat steps 2-3 to continue entering reference marks. Three may be
entered.
Notes on speed input by reference target
Reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed.
Do not use reference target generated true speed to calculate relative speed.
Relative speed data is not accurate because response to speed change is
slow, hampering the TT's ability to accurately judge the possibility of collision.
Select a stationary target as a reference target to calculate own ship speed as
ground tracking speed. Do not choose a moving target as a reference target. A
moving target produces error in the vector for TT and AIS, which results in
wrong collision avoidance information. Further, an unstable stationary target
produces inaccurate speed data and the target itself may become lost.
When a reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, that
reference target mark blinks and the indication "REF TARGET LOST" appears
in the alarm box. If all reference targets are lost, the speed indication reads
"*.*" Select a different reference target if currently selected one is lost.
When all targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and the
target-based speed becomes invalid. The speed is indicated as BTREF where
BT means Bottom Track (speed over ground).
Reference targets may be marked with a vector. This can be done with 3 REF
TARGET VECTOR on the TT TARGET menu.
Loss of reference target will affect the calculation of true speed and true
course of targets. Further, own ship speed will be inaccurate.
Canceling echo-referenced speed input

Open the SPD menu, referring to section 1.13, and set 1 SHIP SPEED to LOG,
NAV or MANUAL as appropriate.
3-4
3.5 Automatic Acquisition

The FAR-2xx7 radars can acquire a maximum of 100 targets, the number of
automatically and manually acquired targets determined by the TT TARGET
menu setting.
TT TARGET setting and target acquisition condition
Menu Setting Acquisition condition

MANUAL100 100 targets manually
AUTO25 25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually
AUTO100 100 targets automatically
A target just acquired automatically is marked with a broken square and a vector
appears within one minute to indicate the target's motion trend. Within three
minutes, the initial tracking stage is finished and the target becomes ready for
stable tracking. At this point, the broken square mark changes to a solid circle.
(Targets automatically acquired are distinguished from those acquired manually.
The targets, which are acquired manually, are displayed by bold symbol.)
3.5.1 Enabling auto acquisition

1. Right-click the arrow in the TT ACQ MODE box to show the TT TARGET
menu.
[TT TARGET MENU]
1 TT SELECT
MANUAL100/
AUTO 25/
AUTO 50/
AUTO 75/
AUTO 100
2 ALL CANCEL
NO/YES
3 REF TARGET VECTOR
OFF/ON
TT TARGET menu
2. Select 1 TT SELECT.
3. Select automatic acquisition condition desired, referring to the table above for
details.
Note 1: The TT ACQ MODE box shows AUTO when the automatic acquisition
condition is selected.
Note 2: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets is
reached, the message "TARGET-FULL (AUTO)" is displayed at the
right-hand side of screen.
3-5
3.5.2 Terminating tracking of targets (including reference targets)

When the TT has acquired the menu-set number of targets automatically, the
message "TARGET-FULL(AUTO)(or MAN)" appears at the right side of the
screen and no more auto acquisition occurs unless targets are lost. Should this
happen, cancel tracking of less important targets or perform manual acquisition.
Canceling individual targets

By keyboard:
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the tracked target, reference target
or lost target you wish to cancel tracking.
2. Press the [TARGET CANCEL] key.
By trackball:
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, roll the scrollwheel to show
TARGET CANCEL / EXIT in the guidance box.
2. Put the cursor (+) on the tracked target, reference target or lost target you
wish to cancel tracking.
3. Push the left button to cancel tracking on the target selected.
4. To finish, push the right button.
Canceling tracking on all targets

1. Right-click the TT ACQ MODE box at the right side of the screen to show the
TT TARGET menu.
[TT TARGET MENU]
1 TT SELECT
MANUAL100/
AUTO 25/
AUTO 50/
AUTO 75/
AUTO 100
3 ALL CANCEL
NO/YES
3 REF TARGET VECTOR
OFF/ON
TT TARGET menu
2. Select 2 ALL CANCEL and YES.
3. Push the left button to cancel tracking on all tracked targets.
3-6
3.6 Manual Acquisition

Maximum 100 targets may be acquired manually depending on the acquisition
condition set on the TT TGT menu.
3.6.1 Setting manual acquisition conditions

1. Right-click the arrow in the TT ACQ MODE box at the right side to show the
TT TARGET menu.
[TT TARGET MENU]
1 TT SELECT
MANUAL100/
AUTO 25/
AUTO 50/
AUTO 75/
AUTO 100
4 ALL CANCEL
NO/YES
3 REF TARGET VECTOR
OFF/ON
TT TARGET menu
2. Select 1 TT SELECT.
3. Select MANUAL 100, AUTO 25, AUTO 50 or AUTO 75 as appropriate. For
details see the table on page 3-5.
3.6.2 Manually acquiring targets

By keyboard
1. Put the cursor on the target you want to acquire.
2. Press the [ACQ] key.
By trackball
"TT TARGET DATA & ACQ" in the guidance box.
2. Put the cursor on the target you want to acquire.
3. Push the left button to acquire the target.
3-7
The plotting symbol is drawn by broken lines during the initial acquisition stage.
A vector appears in about one minute after acquisition indicating the target's
motion trend. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes, the plotting
symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target plotting symbol
blinks and disappears shortly.
TT
Meaning
Symbol
Immediately after acquisition, this plotting symbol is shown in
broken lines.
Within one minute after acquisition, a vector appears to show a
trend of movement.
Within three minutes after acquisition, the plotting symbol changes
to a small circle, indicating steady-state tracking condition.
Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target to be acquired should be within 0.2
to 24 nm (or 32 nm, depending on initial setting) from own ship and not
obscured by sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: When the capacity for manual acquisition is reached, the message
"TARGET FULL(MAN)" is displayed at the screen bottom. Cancel
tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to acquire additional
targets manually.
Note 3: Target number is normally not shown. On the A, B, C and W type radars
it appears when the cursor is placed on a TT symbol.
CAUTION
Target Swap
When a target being tracked nears another

target being tracked, the targets may be
"swapped". When two targets acquired
either automatically or manually come close
to each other, one of the two may become
a Lost Target. Should this happen, manual
re-acquisition of the Lost Target may be
required after the two have separated.
3-8
3.7 Lost Target

Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become "lost targets." A lost
target is shown in the display with flashing red "X". Flashing stops after lost
target alarm is acknowledged.
If you are in an area where tracked targets are lost frequently you may want to
disable the lost target alarm against tracked targets by maximum range or
minimum speed.
3.7.1 Setting the lost target filter

You can set the lost target alarm to sound against lost TTs that are within a
specific range or ship speed. Set the criteria as below.

. .
2. Select 4 [TT AIS] to open the TT AIS menu.
3. Select 9 [TT LOST FILTER].
[TT LOST ALM FILTER]
1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE
OFF/ON
0NM
3 MIN SHIP SPEED
OFF/ON
0.0kn
4. Set items 2 and 3 as appropriate, referring to the description below.

MAX RANGE: Any TT lost targets beyond this range will not trigger the
lost target alarm.
MIN SHIP SPEED: Any TT lost targets slower than this setting will not trigger
the lost target alarm.
Note: Reference targets are not affected by this filter.
3.7.2 Enabling, disabling the lost target alarm

The LOST TARGET ALARM box at the bottom right corner enables and disables
the lost target alarm. Select OFF, ALL or FILT as appropriate.
OFF: Disable the alarm
ALL: Get the alarm against all lost targets. LOST TARGET ALARM OFF
FILT: Get the alarm against the targets whose
LOST TARGET box
criteria meet the settings on the TT LOST
ALM FILTER menu.
3-9
3.8 TT Symbols and Attributes

3.8.1 TT symbols
The symbols used in this equipment comply with IEC 62388.
Item Symbol Status Remarks
Automatically Initial stage Broken circle around an echo to indicate
acquired targets the target under acquisition and initial
stage of tracking, before steady-state
tracking.
Within one minute after acquisition (vector
still unreliable).
Steady tracking Solid circle with vector indicating steady
state tracking (within three minutes after
acquisition).
CPA alarm Plotting symbol (red) flashes to indicate
the target is predicted to come into CPA or
(flashing) TCPA.
CPA alarm Shown in red, and flashing stops after
acknowledge CPA/TCPA alarm is acknowledged.
Lost target A red X is crossed through the TT symbol
to indicate that it is a lost target. Flashing
(flashing) stops after lost target alarm is acknow-
ledged.
Manually Initial stage Plotting symbol selected for a target
acquired targets acquired manually is shown in bold broken
(the width of the lines.
line for "steady Within one minute after acquisition.
tracking" TT is
thicker than that Steady tracking Manual plotting symbol in a bold solid
of the auto- circle (within three minutes after
matically acquisition).
acquired target) CPA alarm Plotting symbol (red) flashes to indicate
(collision course) the target is predicted to come into CPA or
(flashing) TCPA.
Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm is
acknowledged.
Lost target A red X is superimposed on the TT symbol
to indicate a lost target. Flashing stops
(flashing) after lost target alarm is acknowledged.
Acquisition zone On target passing Symbol is red and flashing.
through operator-set
acquisition zone
(flashing)
Target selected On selected target Target data (range, bearing, course,
for data readout speed, CPA and TCPA).
Reference target On reference target Used to calculate own ships
R over-the-ground speed (echo-referenced
After three speed) for ground stabilization.
minutes,
changes to
3-10
Other TT symbols
Item Symbol Status Remarks
Trial maneuver T Bottom center Appears during execution of a trial
maneuver.
(flashing)
Performance S Bottom center Appears during performance test.

test (flashing)
3.8.2 Choosing TT symbol (B, C and W types)

In addition to the "standard" circle TT symbol, you may select from the symbols
shown below, using the full keyboard. This cannot be done with trackball-type
control unit (RCU-015, RCU-016). However, you can program a function key to do
so, with the combination of the "STD KEY" category and the option "TARGET
DATA."
1. Put the cursor on the TT symbol you want to change.

2. Press the [TARGET DATA] key.
3. Press the [TARGET DATA] key until desired symbol is displayed.
3.8.3 TT symbol brilliance

1. Right-click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.
2. Select 0 NEXT.
[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]
1 BACK
2 BRG CURSOR
3 EBL
4 VRM
5 PI LINE
6 TT SYMBOL
7 AIS SYMBOL
8 L/L GRID
9 MARK
0 CHART
BRILL menu, page 2

3. Select 6 TT SYMBOL.
4. Roll the scrollwheel to adjust brilliance.
3-11
3.8.4 TT symbol color

You may select the color for the TT symbol as follows:

.
2. Select 4 [TTAIS] to open the TT AIS menu.
[TTAIS]
1 BACK
2 AZ STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
3 AZ POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [TTAIS SYMBOL]
6 [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE]
7 [AIS DISP FILTER]
8 [AIS LOST FILTER]
9 [TT LOST FILTER]
0 [ASSOCIATION]
TTAIS menu
3. Select 5 [TTAIS SYMBOL].
[TTAIS SYMBOL]
1 BACK
2 TTAIS SYMBOL COLOR
RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL*/ * Not available on
CYA/MAG/WHT IMO type
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT
0.000/MIN
4 TT PAST POSN POINTS
5/10
5 AIS PAST POSN POINTS
5/10
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL
OFF/ON
3-12
3.9 Displaying Target Data

The TT mode provides the full functionality of TT as required by the IMO
Resolution A.823(19) and IEC 62388, including display of range, bearing, course,
speed, CPA and TCPA of all tracked targets.
In head-up and head-up true bearing modes, target bearing, course and speed
shown in the upper-right target data field become true (suffix "T") or relative
(suffix "R") to own ship in accordance with the true/relative vector setting. In
north-up, course-up and true motion modes, the target data field always displays
true bearing, true course and speed over the ground.
3.9.1 Displaying target data

By keyboard
Use the trackball to put the cursor on a desired tracked target and press the
[TARGET DATA] key. The targets shape changes to a square. To erase a
targets data from the data box, press the key again.
By trackball
1. With cursor inside the effective display area, roll the scrollwheel to show
"TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU" in the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on a desired tracked target then push the
left button.
3. To erase a targets data from the data box, select the target on the radar
display then push the left button.
Target data display is as below.
RNG/BRG: Range and bearing from own ship to the selected target with suffix
"T" (True) or "R" (Relative).
COG/SOG (in case of GPS): Course and speed are displayed for the selected
target with suffix "T" (True) or "R" (relative). For manual speed input, CSE/STW
are shown.
CPA/TCPA: CPA (Closest Point of Approach) is the closest range a target will
approach to own ship. TCPA is the time to CPA. Both CPA and TCPA are
automatically calculated. When the CPA has passed clear of own ship, it is
indicated by a TCPA with a negative (-) sign. TCPA is counted to 99.9 min and
beyond this, it is indicate as TCPA> -99.9MIN.
BCR/BCT: BCR is the closest range at which the selected target is predicted to
cross your ships bow. BCT is the time at which the selected target is predicted
to cross your ships bow.
3-13
Target selected for data readout
350 000 010

340 020
330 030
320 040
310 050
300 01 060
290 070
TT TARGET
280 080 No. 01
BRG 25.5T
270 090 RNG 3.4NM
T COG 205.1T*
260 100 T SOG 12.3KN*
CPA 2.9NM
250 110 TCPA 12.2MIN
BCR 1.7NM
240 120 BCT 20MIN
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
* CSE and STW are shown BRG: Bearing from own ship to target
in case of manual input. in R (Relative) or T (True)
RNG: Range from own ship to target
COG: Course of target over ground, True or Relative*
SOG: Speed of target over ground*
CPA: Closest Point of Approach of target to own ship
TCPA: Time to CPA
BCR: Bow crossing range of target
BCT: Bow crossing time of target
Tracked target display

You may display the target data for two targets in one data box and the data for
as many as six targets can be displayed. For further details, see section 1.42.
Removing a target data display

Full keyboard: Put the cursor on the data you want to remove then hit the
[TARGET DATA] key.
Cursor menu: TARGET DATA & ACQ
Canceling tracking on a target from target data display

Full keyboard: Put the cursor on the data you want to remove then hit the
[TARGET CANCEL] key.
Cursor menu: TARGET CANCEL
3-14
3.9.2 Target list

The target list provides a comprehensive data display of all TT (and AIS) targets
being tracked.
Displaying the target list

To display the target list, do the following:
1. Select the TARGET LIST box at the right side of the screen.
TARGET
LIST
TARGET LIST box

2. Push the left button to display the TARGET LIST. ">" in the TCPA means that
the time is greater than 99:59.
[TARGET LIST (1/1)]

SORT BY CPA
1 BACK
2 TT TARGET
No: 01
BRG 16.5T RNG 2.05 NM
CPA 0.17NM TCPA>99.59M
3 TT TARGET
No: 02
BRG 19.0T RNG 2.49 NM
CPA 0.29NM TCPA>99.59M
9 REFRESH DATA
Target list
3. To scroll the list when there are more than three targets, select 0 NEXT.
Note: To refresh data, select 9 REFRESH DATA then push the scrollwheel.
This is not necessary when the sorting method is changed (see next
page); data is automatically updated whenever the sorting method is
changed.
4. Push the right button to close the list.
3-15
Sorting the target list

You may sort the target list by CPA, TCPA, BCR, BCT, RANGE or SPEED as
follows: 72 nm or 96 nm range scale
1. Right-click the TARGET LIST box.
[TARGET LIST MENU]
1 SORT BY
CPA/TCPA/BCR/BCT/
RANGE/SPEED
TARGET LIST menu

2. Select 1 SORT BY.
3. Select sorting method desired.
3.10 Vector Modes

Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or north
(True).
3.10.1 Description of vectors

Ground stabilization and sea stabilization
Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion
mode. You can select ground or sea stabilization from the SPEED menu. Select
BT(Bottom Tracking) for ground stabilization or WT(Water Tracking) for sea
stabilization. In the true motion mode, the TT VECTOR box shows the
stabilization mode as TRUE-G or TRUE-S.
Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the
sea using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs. Ground
stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the
ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems
unsatisfactory, enter set and drift corrections. Note that set and drift should not
be used when the radar is displaying AIS targets.
3-16
True vector
Own ship and other ship's move on the display at their true speeds and courses.
This mode is useful for distinguishing moving targets from stationary ones.
A A
Buoy Buoy
Target on
collision
Own ship course Own ship
B
B
True vectors in Relative vectors in

head-up mode head-up mode
True and relative vectors
Relative vector
Other ships move relative to your ship. This mode is useful for finding ships on a
collision course with your ship. A ship whose vector passes through your ship's
position is on a collision course.
3.10.2 Vector motion and length

Vectors may be displayed in true or relative mode. Vector time (or the length of
vectors) can be set between 1 and 60 minutes.
By keyboard
1. Press the [VECTOR MODE] key consecutively to select relative or true
vector mode. Your selection is shown on the vector motion box. (Note that
this also selects the vector mode for the past position display.)
2. Press the [VECTOR TIME] key consecutively to select vector time. Your
selection appears in the vector time box (see illustration below).
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to select VECTOR TRUE-S(or -G) or VECTOR REL
(whichever is displayed) at the right side of the screen.
Vector motion
VECTOR TRUE-S* 15MIN

* TRUE or REL
S: Sea stablized
G: Ground stabilized
(No stabilization Vector
indication in relative.) time
TT VECTOR boxes
3-17
2. Push the left button to display VECTOR TRUE-S(or -G) or VECTOR REL as
appropriate. (Note that this also selects the vector mode for the past position
display.)
3. Do one of the following to select a vector time.
Control Available setting
Left button 30 sec, 1-15 min (1 min interval), 20 min, 30 min, 40 min,
50 min, 60 min
Scrollwheel 30 sec, 1-60 min (1 min interval)
The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector
time elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk
of collision with any target.
3.11 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking the past
positions of any targets being tracked.
A new dot is added every minute (or at other preset time intervals) until the
preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be
uneven. If it changes the course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.
Past position orientation, true or relative, is controlled with TRAIL MODE on the
TRAIL menu. See section 1.30.1 for the procedure.
(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed
Past position display
3.11.1 Displaying and erasing past position points, choosing past

position plot interval
1. Use the trackball to select the PAST POSN box.
PAST POSN REL 2MIN
PAST POSN box

2. Push the left button or scrollwheel to select plot interval desired: OFF, 30
seconds, 1, 2, 3 or 6 minutes. Select OFF to erase all past position points
and deactivate the past position display.
3-18
3.11.2 Past position display attributes

You may select the number of past points to display per plotting interval as
follows.

2. Select 4 [TTAIS].
[TTAIS]
1 BACK
2 AZ ZONE STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
3 AZ POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [TTAIS SYMBOL]
7 [AIS DISP FILTER]
8 [AIS LOST FILTER
9 [TT LOST FILTER]
0 [ASSOCIATION]
3. Select 5 [TTAIS SYMBOL].

[TTAIS SYMBOL]
1 BACK
2 TTAIS SYMBOL COLOR
RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL*/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT
0.000/MIN
5/10
5/10 * Not available on
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL IMO radar
OFF/ON
TTAIS SYMBOL menu

4. Select 4 TT PAST POSN POINTS.
5. Select 5 or 10 as appropriate.
3.11.3 Past position display mode

The display mode for the past position display is the same as that set for the TT
vector.
3-19
3.11.4 Stabilization in true mode

The true mode past position display may be ground stabilized or sea stabilized.
The PAST POSN box shows current stabilization as TRUE-G or TRUE-S. To
change stabilization mode, open the SPEED menu and set SHIP SPEED to BT
(ground stabilization) or WT (sea stabilization).
3.12 Set and Drift

Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in
0.1-degree steps. Drift, in another word Rate, the speed of tide, can also be
entered manually in 0.1 knot steps.
When course through water and speed through water are available, activate set
and drift to get course over ground and speed over ground.
Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and
target data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information.
These values are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and
drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors.
To enter set and drift do the following: [SPEED MENU]
1. Right-click the SPD box to show the SPEED 1 SHIP SPEED

menu. LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/
GPS/MANUAL/REF
2. Select 3 SET DRIFT. 2 MANUAL SPEED
3. Select ON. 0.0kn
4. Push the right button to close the menu. Then, 3 SET DRIFT
the SET and DRIFT boxes appear at the top OFF/ON
of the display.
5. Select the SET box.
6. Use the scrollwheel to set value, rolling it to select SET 66.8T
numeral and pushing it to set. (Setting range: 000.0 SET box
359.9 (T))
7. Select the DRIFT box. DRIFT 7.2kn
8. Use the scrollwheel to set value, rolling it to select DRIFT box
numeral and pushing it to set. (Setting range: 00.0
19.9(kn))
Note 1: Set and drift are available when using water tracking log. The speed
source is shown as "WTC" (Water Tracking Count).
Note 2: Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness.
Note 3: Set and drift can also be adjusted with the EBL and VRM. Put the cursor
in either the SET or DRIFT box and operate the EBL for set and VRM
for drift.
3-20
3.13 TT Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA)

The TT continuously monitors the predicted
range at the Closest Point of Approach
CAUTION
(CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of CPA/TCPA Alarm
each TT. When the predicted CPA of any The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should
never be relied upon as the sole means for
TT becomes smaller than a preset CPA detecting the risk of collision.The navigator
range and its predicted TCPA less than a is not relieved of the responsibility to keep
preset TCPA limit, the audio alarm sounds visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
and TT COLLISION appears (in red) in the aid is in use.
Alert Box. In addition, the symbol of the
offending TT is red and flashes together with its vector.
This feature, when used correctly, helps prevent the risk of collision by alerting
you to threatening targets. It is important that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and
other radar controls are properly adjusted.
CPA and TCPA ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
The reference point for CPA and TCPA calculation may be selected from
antenna position or conning position. For further details, see section 1.50.
3.13.1 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges

To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following:
1. Left-click CPA LIMIT box to show the CPA and TCPA boxes.
CPA LIMIT Box CPA Box
CPA LIMIT 0.5NM 10MIN TCPA Box

CPA LIMIT, CPA and TCPA boxes
2. Select the CPA Box.
3. Push the left button or scrollwheel to select CPA value.
Left button 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6(nm)
Scrollwheel 0.1-20(nm), 0-10 nm in 0.1 nm increments, 10 nm
increments thereafter
4. Select the TCPA box.
5. Push the left button or scrollwheel to select TCPA value.
Left button 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15(minutes)
Scrollwheel 1-60 minutes, 1-minute increment
3-21
3.13.2 Acknowledging the TT collision alarm

Press the [ALARM ACK] key on the keyboard, or select the ALARM ACK box
with the trackball then push the left button to acknowledge the alarm and silence
the buzzer.
The warning label TT COLLISION and the flashing of the triangle plotting symbol
and vector remain in the Alert Box until the dangerous situation is gone or you
intentionally terminate tracking of the target.
Note that when the TT COLLISION alarm is generated the AIS display is
automatically turned on.
3.14 Acquisition Zone

The acquisition zone functions both to alert you targets in a specific area and
acts as an automatic acquisition area when automatic target acquisition is active.
Any targets entering the zone will be automatically acquired.
When a target enters an acquisition zone, the buzzer sounds and the indication
TT GUARD (or AIS GUARD) appears (in red) in the Alert Box. The symbol of the
offending target is red and flashing. Further, the AIS display is automatically
turned on if it is off.
3.14.1 Activating an acquisition zone

One or two acquisition zones may be activated. The No. 1 acquisition zone is
available between 3 and 6 nm and the No. 2 acquisition zone can be set
anywhere when the No. 1 zone is already in use. The TT/AIS acquisition zones
lines are white and dashed so as to distinguish them from the radar target alarm.
The procedure below shows how to set an acquisition zone, using the example
at the bottom of the page.
1. Use the trackball to select one of the AZ (Acquisition Zone) boxes at the right
side of the screen.
AZ 1
Acquisition zone status
AZ 2 Blank: Cancel acquisition zone
SET: Set acquisition zone
WORK: Activate acquisition zone
SLEEP: Sleep acquisition zone
AZ boxes
2. Push the left button. The AZ box now reads "AZx SET."
3. Put the cursor on point A then push the left button.
4. Put the cursor on point B then push the left button. The AZ box now reads
"AZx WORK."
3-22
A
0.5-1 nm
B
Target in acquistion zone is

red and flashing.
If you are setting a polygon acquisition zone with AZ2, set at least three points.
Push the right button to finish. Note that the status indication should be WORK
or SLEEP to set AZ2.
When a TT or AIS target enters the zone, the indication TT GUARD or AIS
GUARD appears (in red) in the Alert Box and the offending target flashes. For
the AIS, all sleeping targets are changed to activated targets.
Note 1: If you wish to create an acquisition zone having a 360-degree coverage

around own ship, set point B in almost the same direction (approx. 3)
as point A then push the left button.
Note 2: If the range scale is changed to less than half of the acquisition zone,
the AZ box reads "AZx OUT." If the left button is pushed in this state, the
acquisition zone goes into "sleep" state and the guidance box reads "AZ
WORK L = DELETE."
Note 3: The default acquisition zone is fan shaped. It may also be a polygon
having 3-10 points. For details, see section 3.14.5.
Note 4: TT and AIS are automatically set to TT=AUTO and AIS=DISP,
respectively, when an AZ is activated in the following conditions:
TT: TT=OFF or TT=MANUAL 100
AIS: AIS FUNC=OFF or AIS DISP=OFF
3.14.2 Sleeping, deactivating an acquisition zone

1. Select the appropriate AZ box.
2. Sleep or deactivate the alarm zone as appropriate:
Sleep alarm zone: Push the left button to remove the acquisition zone from
the screen. The indication in the AZ box changes from "AZx WORK" to "AZx
SLEEP." To reactivate and display the acquisition zone, repeat this
procedure to display "AZx WORK."
Deactivate alarm zone: Push and hold down the left button until the AZ box
goes blank.
3.14.3 Acknowledging the alarm

Press the [ALARM ACK] key, or select the ALARM ACK box then push the left
button to acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer.
3-23
3.14.4 Acquisition zone reference

The acquisition zone may be referenced to heading or North as follows:

2. Select 4 [TTAIS] to open the TTAIS menu.
[TTAIS]
1 BACK
2 AZ STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
3 AZ POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [TTAIS SYMBOL]
7 [AIS DISP FILTER]
8 [AIS LOST FILTER
OFF/ON
9 [TT LOST FILTER]
0 [ASSOCIATION]
TTAIS menu
3. Select 2 AZ STAB.
4. Select STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as appropriate.
STAB HDG: Acquisition zone keeps position relation with your ship.
STAB NORTH: Acquisition zone is fixed to North.
5. Push the right button twice to close menu.
3.14.5 Acquisition zone shape and stabilization

The shape of the No. 2 acquisition zone may be a sector or a polygon having up
to 10 points. (The shape of the No.1 acquisition zone is always a sector.)

. .
2. Select 4 [TT AIS] to open the TT AIS menu.
3. Select 3 AZ POLYGON.
4. Select OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG or STAB NORTH as appropriate.
OFF: Acquisition zone is a sector; number of points is limited to
four. Stabilized against land.
STAB GND: Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against ground.
STAB HDG: Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against heading.
STAB NORTH: Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against North.
5. Push the right button twice to close menu.
3-24
3.15 TT System Messages

There are seven main situations that cause the TT to trigger audio and visual
alarms:
Reference target alarm
Collision alarm
Acquisition zone alarm
Lost target alarm
Target full alarm for manual acquisition
Target full alarm for automatic acquisition
System failure
To acknowledge the audio alarm, press the [ALARM ACK] key, or select the
ALARM ACK box then push the left button.
TT system messages
Message Meaning Action

REF TARGET LOST When the system detects a loss of a Press the [ALARM ACK]
reference target, the target symbol turns key or click the ALARM
red and flashes. At the same time, an ACK box to
audio alarm is produced for one second. acknowledge.
The reference target mark disappears from
the screen after the reference target alarm
is acknowledged.
TT COLLISION A tracked target is on collision course. Take evasive action or
terminate tracking of TT.
TT GUARD Tracked target has entered an acquisition Press the [ALARM ACK]
zone. The tracked target's symbol is red key or click the ALARM
and flashing. ACK box to
acknowledge.
TT LOST When the system detects a loss of a Press the [ALARM ACK]
tracked target, the tracked target symbol key or click the ALARM
turns red and flashes. At the same time, an ACK box to
audio alarm is produced for one second. acknowledge.
The lost target mark disappears from the
screen after the lost target alarm is
acknowledged.
TT TARGET 95% Appears when capacity for
(AUTO) or (MAN) automatically(manually) tracked targets is
95% full.
TT TARGET FULL Appears when capacity for
(AUTO) or (MAN) automatically(manually) acquired targets is
full.
TT SYSTEM ERROR When the Main CPU receives no signal Press the [ALARM ACK]
input from TT, the screen shows "TT key or click the ALARM
SYSTEM ERROR" with an indication ACK box to
denoting offending equipment, also acknowledge. Reset
releasing an audio alarm. The missing power to restore normal
signals (LOG, GYRO, TRIGGER, VIDEO, operation.
AZIMUTH, HEADLINE) are indicated in the
Alert Box.
3-25
3.16 Trial Maneuver

The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect on all tracked targets against
own ship's maneuver without interrupting the updating of target information.
For more accurate results, use relative motion and sea stabilization (ground
tracking).
3.16.1 Types of trial maneuvers

There are two types of trial maneuvers: static and dynamic.
Dynamic trial maneuver

A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted positions of the tracked targets and
own ship. You enter own ship's intended speed and course with a certain "delay
time." Assuming that all tracked targets maintain their present speeds and
courses, the targets' and own ship's future movements are simulated in
one-second increments indicating their predicted positions in 30-second intervals
as illustrated below.
The delay time represents the time lag from the present time to the time when
own ship will actually start to change her speed and/or course. You should
therefore take into consideration own ship's maneuvering characteristics such as
rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly important
on large vessels. How much the delay is set the situation starts immediately and
ends in a minute.
In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a
maneuver) for a delay time of 2:30 then alters speed and course until
operator-specified intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this
example).
Delay time = 2 m 30 s.
Present own
ship position
Dynamic trial maneuver

Note that once a dynamic trial maneuver is initiated, you cannot alter own ship's
trial speed, course or delay time until the trial maneuver is terminated.
3-26
Static trial maneuver

If you enter the same trial speed, course and delay time under the same
situation as in the aforementioned example of dynamic trial maneuver, the
screen will instantly show position OS7 for own ship, position A7 for target A and
position B7 for target B, omitting the intermediate positions. Thus, the static trial
maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the maneuver result
immediately.
The time until OS7 is the "trial time". However, the time for the trial can be
extended.
Note: For accurate simulation of ship movements in a trial maneuver, own ship's
characteristics such as acceleration and turning performance should be
properly set in initial settings during the installation.
3.16.2 Performing a trial maneuver

To perform a trial maneuver, do the following:

[TTAIS]
1 BACK
2 AZ STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 AZ POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
5 [TTAIS SYMBOL]
7 [AIS DISP FILTER]
8 [AIS LOST FILTER
OFF/ON
9 [TT LOST FILTER]
0 [ASSOCIATION]
TTAIS menu
3-27
3. Select 4 [TRIAL MANEUVER].
[TRIAL MANEUVER]
1 BACK
2 TRIAL
OFF/STATIC/DYNAMIC
3 TRIAL SPEED RATE
0kn 0.00kn/s
0kn 0.00kn/s
4 TRIAL TURN RATE
0kn 0.0/s
0kn 0.0/s
TRIAL MANEUVER menu

4. Select 2 TRIAL.
5. Select STATIC or DYNAMIC as appropriate.
6. Select 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE. Set trial speed rate with the scrollwheel:
Select numeral; push the scrollwheel to set.
7. Select 4 TRIAL TURN RATE. Set trial turn rate with the scrollwheel: Select
numeral; push the scrollwheel to set.
Note: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided.
Enter the data by sets as shown in the figure below. This is done to
provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ships speed.
3 TRIAL SPEED RATE Set speed and turn rate to

Set 1 0kt 0.00kn/s zero (0) to simulate
Set 2 0kt 0.00kn/s course and speed changes
4 TRIAL TURN RATE not affected by ships
Set 1 0kt 0.0/s inertia.
Set 2 0kt 0.0/s
8. Push the right button three times to close the menu. Then, the TRIAL box
appears at the right side of the display.
TRIAL OFF
TRIAL box
9. Use the trackball to select the TRIAL box. Then, the TRIAL box reads TRIAL
SET and boxes appear above the TRIAL box as below.
TRIAL 00:00 Trial time
DELAY 00:30 Delay time for trial maneuver
86.8T Course for trial maneuver
06.5kn Speed for trial maneuver
Boxes for setting trial maneuver parameters

10. Use the scrollwheel to set delay time at DELAY. This is the time after which
own ship takes a new situation, not the time the simulation begins. Change
the delay time according to own ship loading condition, etc. Select digit
location; push the scrollwheel to set.
11. Select the course setting box. Use the scrollwheel to set the course: Select
digit location; push the scrollwheel to set.
3-28
12. Select the speed setting box. Use the scrollwheel to set the speed: Select
digit location; push the scrollwheel to set.
Note: Course and speed may also be set with the EBL and VRM,
respectively. Put the cursor in any one of the four trial maneuver
related boxes and operate applicable control.
13. Select TRIAL SET. Push the left button or the scrollwheel to show TRIAL
WORK.
For static mode, set trial time to get result.
The trial maneuver takes place with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the
screen. The time (see Note below) appears at the top right side of the display. If
any tracked target is predicted to be on a collision course with own ship (that is,
the target ship comes within preset CPA/TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol
flashes. If this happens, change own ship's trial speed, course or delay time to
obtain a safe maneuver.
Note: The time indication depends on trial mode.

Dynamic mode: Time is incremented in 30-second intervals.
Static mode: The position of own ship at the end of the trial time is shown,
using set speed and course. The position of tracked targets at the end of trial
time is shown.
The trial time can be changed from the Trial Time box. Put the cursor in the
Trial Time box and roll the scrollwheel. The position of targets at the end of
selected time is shown.
3.16.3 Terminating a trial maneuver

A trial maneuver is automatically terminated at the end of the selected trial time
and the normal radar display is restored. The termination time depends on the
trial mode as follows:
Dynamic mode: The trial is terminated when 60 minutes is shown in the Trial
Time Box.
Static mode: The trial is terminated when there is no key operation within one
minute.
To terminate the trial maneuver manually, put the cursor in the Trial Time box
then push the left button to show TRAIL OFF in the box.
To stop the trial maneuver, do step 1-4 section 3.16.2 then select OFF.
3-29
3.17 TT Performance Test

A test program is provided for assessing overall performance of the TT. Normal
operation is suspended and the indication "S" appears at the bottom of the
effective display area during the test. The test may be terminated at any time.
1. Right-click the MENU box to open the menu.

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZETEST].
[CUSTOMIZETEST]
1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]
CUSTOMIZETEST menu
3. Select 8 [TEST].
[TEST]
1 BACK
2 [SELF TEST]
3 [TT TEST]
TEST menu
4. Select 2 TT TEST START]
[TT TEST]
1 BACK
2 TT TEST START
NOTE:
THE DISPLAY IS
CLEARER WHEN
RUNNING TT TEST.
RUN TT TEST?
YES: SELECT 2 START
NO: SELECT 1 BACK
TT TEST menu
3-30
5. Select 2 TT TEST START to start the test.

An alert "S" flickers during the test. It takes approximately three minutes for
all vectors to be displayed. The test does not need echo signals, gyro nor
speed log input. The test automatically sets the gyrocompass heading to 0
to get the results shown in the table below.
6. Acquire all three targets. The simulated movement of three targets
automatically runs five minutes and repeats. The courses and speeds for the
targets are as shown in the table below. .
To terminate the test, press the [STBY TX] key, or select the TX STBY box at the
bottom left corner then push the left button.
Select any target with the cursor and check that the selected target shows the
course and speed as in the table. CPA and TCPA shown in the table are with
ships speed of 0 kn. Range, CPA and TCPA change with time; bearing and
speed are fixed.
Range Bearing Speed Course CPA TCPA

(nm) () (kn) () (nm) (min)
Target A 3.0 45.0 20.0 0 2.1 -6.4
Target B 2.0 120.0 5.0 120.0 0.0 -24.0
Target C 7.0 270.0 100 120.0 3.5 3.5
A
C
B
3-31
3.18 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking

The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and
discriminates radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo
measurements are greater than those of the largest ship in range or tangential
extent are usually land and are displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller
ship-sized echoes that are less than this dimension, are further analyzed and
regarded as ships and displayed as small circles superimposed over the video
echo.
When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but
develops a course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with
the International Marine Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (IMO TT)
requirements, an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20
scans of antenna and full vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO TTs
comply with these requirements.
Acquisition and tracking

A target which is hit by five consecutive radar pulses, is detected as a radar echo.
Manual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball.
Automatic acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected
5-7 times continuously depending upon the congestion. Tracking is achieved
when the target is clearly distinguishable on the display for 5 out of 10
consecutive scans, whether acquired automatically or manually. Required
tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on range scales including 3, 6,
12 nm, full plotting information is available within one scan when the range scale
has been changed.
Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become "lost targets."
Quantization
The entire picture is converted to a digital from called "Quantized Video." A
sweep range is divided into small segments and each range element is "1" if
there is radar echo return above a threshold level, or "0" if there is no return.
The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As

the antenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1s indicating
an echo presence at the exact same range, a target "start" is initiated. Since
receiver noise is random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and
not classified as an echo.
The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closet
and most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the
discriminator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular
extent subtended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in
range extent and/or angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared
to be a coastline and the closet edge is put into memory as a map of the area.
3-32
This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship-sized
echoes beyond the closest coast outline. Five consecutive scans of coastal
outline are retained in memory to allow for signal variation. All smaller echoes
are declared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to
provide precise range and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan. This
range/bearing data is matched to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan
for consistency. When it is determined to be as consistent as a real target,
automatic acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and
subsequent calculation develop the relative course and speed of the target.
The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and
speed inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily
computed by vector summing of the relative motion with own ships course and
speed. The resulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the tracked
targets. This process is updated continually for each target on every scan of the
radar.
Qualitative description of tracking error

The FURUNO TT's accuracy complies with or exceed IMO standards.
Own ship maneuvers

For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than
150/minute, depending on gyro), there is some influence on all tracked targets
that lasts for a minute or two then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.
Other ship maneuvers

Target ship courses, lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6
seconds at low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag,
but accuracy recovers quickly.
3-33
3.19 Factors Affecting TT Functions

Sea returns
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect
because distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by
more than one bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data.
Rain and snow

Clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the A/C RAIN control. If it
is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the interference rejector
on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acquisition. Accuracy
can be affected.
Low clouds
Usually no affect. If necessary, adjust the A/C RAIN control.
Non-synchronous emissions
No effect.
Low gain
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being
acquired at long distance. TT display will be missing on one or more targets that
could only be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were
increased.
The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should
be on the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined.
Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once.

Automatic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously.
Tracking is achieved when the target is detected five times (not necessarily
continuously) out of 10 scans. If not detected six times out of 10 scans, the
target will become a "lost target." The TT will acquire a radar echo that is present
once in every six antenna scans and continue tracking if 1 in 10.
Second trace echoes

When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such
long ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted
pulse. This gives an incorrect range indication. Second and third trace echoes
can be tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking
criteria but target course and speed data will be in error.
3-34
Blind and shadow sectors

Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard ship, for example,
funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar
beam intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of
some targets. The TT system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost
on the radar picture and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will
however be acquired and tracked when they pass out of the blind zone and
again present normal radar echo. The angular width and bearing of any shadow
sector should be determined for their influence on the radar. In certain cases
false echoes in the shadow sector cause the TT system to acquire, track, and
vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided.
Indirect echoes
A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received
as reflection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two
or more echoes on the display, each at a different range. The TT can acquire
and track the false echo if it is detected by five consecutive scans. Reduction in
radar gain can eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range
detection also will be reduced.
Radar interference
If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral
"dotting" and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector
can clear the display.
To receive radar beacon or SART signals, turn on "SART" in the ECHO menu.
3-35
This page is intentionally left blank.
3-36
4. AIS OPERATION
The FURUNO AIS (Automatic Identification System) model FA-100 or FA-150
exchanges with other AIS-fitted ships all data and information required by the
SOLAS 1994 as amended. However, they are displayed in text form. By
interfacing the FA-100 or FA-150 with this radar, the AIS information is
graphically indicated together with the radar and TT information.
For the IMO specification, position data must be fixed by WGS-84 geodetic
datum and speed input must be ground tracking. If other type of datum is input,
the error message "DATUM" appears and the AIS feature is inoperative. This
restriction does not apply to other types.
When AIS is active, MANUAL and REF in the speed source selection window
are shown in gray to indicate they are not available for selection.
You may disable or enable the AIS display from the AIS DISP box.
4.1 Controls for AIS

Keyboard
The AIS uses the keys shown below.
POWER
OFF ON OFF ON
1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE
4 5 6
CENTER RESET LINE
F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 ENTER TARGET
CANCEL
- CANCEL
TARGET DATA: Displays data on AIS target

selected by the trackball.
TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps chosen AIS target. Control unit RCU-014
Trackball
With the cursor inside the effective display area, you can access AIS functions
by rolling the scrollwheel or choosing appropriate AIS function from the
CURSOR menu.
Roll the scrollwheel to show the following indications in the guidance box to
access respective AIS function:
TARGET DATA & ACQ: Displays target data for AIS target selected with the
trackball; activates chosen AIS target.
TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps selected AIS activated target.
4-1
4. AIS OPERATION
4.2 Showing, Hiding the AIS Display

Left-click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen to show or hide the AIS
display and set display criteria.
DISP ALL: All AIS targets received from the AIS transponder are displayed with
symbols.
DISP FILT: AIS targets are displayed according to the criteria set with AIS DISP
FILTER on the AIS/TT menu.
DISP OFF: All AIS symbols disappear, but tracking continues internally.
AIS DISP
OFF
AIS DISP box

When the AIS is turned on, AIS targets are marked with appropriate AIS symbol
as below.
SYMBOL STATUS REMARKS

Activated All AIS symbols shown with thick line.
target Color is selectable from menu.
ROT higher Displayed for turning ship.

than preset
ROT
Dangerous Displayed when CPA/TCPA is within

target CPA/TCPA LIMIT. Red in color. Flashing
.until acknowledged.
Lost target X overlaid on a lost target. Red in

color. Erased after acknowledged.
Target selected Broken square is overlaid on target

for data display selected to display its data. A, B or C
shown to indicate data box location (at
the right side of the screen).
A
AIS symbols
Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is
switched off. When the AIS is again turned on, symbols are immediately
displayed.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased and the screen is redrawn after the
heading is changed in the head-up mode.
Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the message "RECEIVE" appears in the
Alert Box. Check the AIS transponder.
4-2
4. AIS OPERATION
Note 4: AIS symbols are shown in dotted lines in the following cases:
- No water or ground tracking speed from your ship, or there is no speed
data. All AIS symbols are shown in dotted lines and the message "NO
CPA/TCPA for AIS" appears (in red) in the Alert Box.
- No water or ground tracking speed received from AIS target, or no
speed data from AIS target. The symbol of the corresponding AIS
target is shown in dotted lines.
Note 5: Other AIS symbols that may appear are shown in the table below.
Symbol Meaning
+ Real AIS AtoN
+ Virtual AIS AtoN
Base Station
Airborne SAR aircraft
4-3
4. AIS OPERATION
4.3 AIS Display Criteria

If there are too many AIS targets on the screen you may wish to remove
unnecessary ones. You may remove targets by distance from own ship, speed,
class and length. For example, you might want to remove slow moving targets,
as they normally do not require close monitoring.

[TTAIS MENU]
1 BACK
2 AZ STAB
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
3 AZ POLYGON
OFF/STAB GND/
STAB HDG/STAB NORTH
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER]
.
5 [TT AIS SYMBOL]
7 [AIS DISP FILTER]
8 [AIS LOST FILTER]
9 [TT LOST FILTER]
0 [ASSOCIATION]
TT/AIS menu
3. Select 7 [AIS DISP FILTER].
[AIS DISP FILTER] If the AIS DISP box is operated
when all settings on this menu are
1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE set for OFF, the setting of the AIS
OFF/ON DISP box becomes DISP ALL.
0NM
3 MIN SHIP SPEED
OFF/ON
0.0kn
4 EXCEPT CLASS B
OFF/ON
5 MIN SHIP LENGTH
OFF/ON
0M
AIS DISP FILTER menu

4. Set items 2-5 referring to the description below.
MAX RANGE: Any AIS target beyond the range set here will not be shown.
MIN SHIP SPEED: Any AIS target slower than this setting will not be shown.
EXCEPT CLASS B: Select ON to remove Class B AIS targets.
MIN SHIP LENGTH: Any AIS target whose length is shorter than this setting
will not be shown.
Note: An AIS target whose data is currently displayed is not affected by the filter
setting.
4-4
4. AIS OPERATION
4.4 Activating Targets

When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, that targets course
and speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by
monitoring the vector.
Sleeping targets within an acquisition zone are automatically changed to

activated targets and are colored red. See section 3.14 for details.
4.4.1 Activating specific targets manually

By keyboard
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the AIS target you wish activate.
2. Press the [TARGET DATA] key to activate the target.
By trackball
display "TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU" in the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the sleeping AIS target you wish to
activate; that is, know more about a vessels motion.
3. Push the left button to activate the target.
SOG (Speed over Ground)

and COG (Course over Ground) vector
*1
Turning direction
*1 Vector shows STW (speed
(ROT)
thru water) and CSE
(course) when water Heading line *2
tracking mode is *2 If there is no heading data,
selected at the radar. the line points in direction of COG.
Activated target
4.4.2 Activating all targets

1. Right-click the AIS DISP box to open the AIS TARGET menu.
2. Select 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS.
Dangerous target
When an activated target violates the CPA/TCPA

alarm setting its symbol changes to the dangerous
target symbol (red and flashing) and the indication
AIS COLLISON appears. Press the [ALARM ACK] key
(or click the ALARM ACK box with the left button)
to acknowledge the CPA/TCPA alarm. The audible
alarm is silenced and the symbol stops flashing. Thicker than
Take appropriate action to avoid collision. activated target
4-5
4. AIS OPERATION
4.5 How to Sleep Targets

4.5.1 Sleeping an individual target
You may "sleep" an AIS target as below when the screen becomes filled with
targets, which might prevent important radar and AIS displays from being
identified. Note that targets that have been activated automatically cannot be
"slept."
display "TARGET CANCEL / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on an activated AIS target symbol.
3. Push the left button. The activated target symbol is replaced with the
sleeping target symbol.
Sleeping target
4.5.2 Sleeping all targets

1. Right-click the AIS DISP box to open the AIS TARGET menu.
[AIS TARGET MENU]
1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

NO/YES
2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS
NO/YES
3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES
OFF/ON
4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]
5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
6 [VOYAGE DATA]
7 [STATIC DATA]
8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]
AIS TARGET menu

2. Select 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS.
3. Select YES to sleep all AIS targets.
4-6
4. AIS OPERATION
4.6 Setting Up for a Voyage

There are five items on the VOYAGE DATA menu you will need to enter at the
start of a voyage: navigational status, ETA, destination, draught and crew.
1. Right-click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen to open the AIS
TARGET menu.
[AIS TARGET MENU]
1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

NO/YES
NO/YES
OFF/ON
6 [VOYAGE DATA]
7 [STATIC DATA]
AIS TARGET menu

2. Select 6 VOYAGE DATA.
[VOYAGE DATA]
1 BACK
2 NAVIGATION STATUS
03
RESTRICTED
MANOEVRABILITY
3 ETA
00/000/0000 00:00
4 DESTINATION
12
5 DRAUGHT
00.0m
6 CREW
0002
VOYAGE DATA menu

3. Select 2 NAVIGATION STATUS.
4-7
4. AIS OPERATION
4. Select appropriate navigation status number referring to the information

below then push left button.
00: Underway using engine (default)
01: At anchor
02: Not under command
03: Restricted maneuverability
04: Constrained by her draught
05: Moored
06: Aground
07: Engaged in fishing
08: Under way sailing
09: Reserved for high speed craft (HSC)
10: Reserved for wing in ground (WIG, for example, hydrofoil)
11-15: Reserved for future use
5. Select 3 ETA then push the left button.
6. Use the scrollwheel to enter estimated date and time of arrival, in order of
day (two digits), month, year (four digits) and time. Push the scrollwheel after
entering the data.
7. Select 4 DESTINATION.
8. Enter destination: Select alphanumeric character, push the scrollwheel to
enter.
9. Select 5 DRAUGHT.
10. Roll the scrollwheel to set ships draught (setting range: 0-25.5 m) then push
the scrollwheel.
11. Select 6 CREW.
12. Roll the scrollwheel to set number of crew (08191) then push the
scrollwheel.
4-8
4. AIS OPERATION
4.7 Target Data

You may display an AIS targets data by selecting it on the display, when the AIS
function is set for "AIS DISP FILT".
4.7.1 Basic target data

By keyboard
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the AIS target symbol you want to know
its data.
2. Press the [TARGET DATA] key.
By trackball
display "TARGET DATA & ACQ / CURSOR MENU".
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on an AIS target symbol. The selected
target is marked with a broken square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data
box when the target is correctly selected.
A Location of targets data box.

Not shown on W-type radar.
Activated target selected for data display
Location of target data, MMSI No. AIS B MMSI 665498114

Name of ship VOYAGER
Bearing to target BRG 208.6T 3437.912 N
13521.569 E Position
Range to target RNG 12.3NM NAV-STATUS Nav status
Target's course TCOG 9.0T* UNDER WAY
Target's speed TSOG 8.2kn# USING ENGINE
Target's CPA CPA 5.32NM
Target's TCPA TCPA 33:31
Target's bow cross range BCR 5.65NM
HDG 048.0T Heading
Target's bow cross time BCT 25:30 0.0/min Rate of turn
* = CSE (course) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

# = STW (speed thru water) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.
AIS data display
4-9
4. AIS OPERATION
4.7.2 Detailed target data

1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the desired AIS target in the data box at
the right side of the screen.
2. Push the left button to show detailed data.
[EXPANDED DATA]
NAME:
Ship's name VOYAGER
Call sign CALL: WRE45T
Latitude LAT: 34 44.2345'N
Longitude LON: 13532.1890'E
Position fixing device POS. SENSOR
GPS
Position accuracy (HIGH, LOW) POS. ACC.: HIGH
Navigation status NAV. STATUS
UNDERWAY
USING ENGINE
MMSI No. MMSI No.: 107374182
IMO No. IMO No.: 123544876
Length SHIP LENGTH: 55m
Width SHIP WIDTH: 15m
Draft SHIP DRAFT: 2.8m
Destination DESTINATION
KOBE
Estimated Time of Arrival ETA: 01/FEB 12:59
AIS program no. AIS VERSION: 0
Assocation ON/OFF ASSOCIATION: OFF
Type of ship and cargo SHIP & CARGO TYPE:
CARGO SHIPS
ALL SHIPS OF
THIS TYPE
Expanded data
4.7.3 Removing a target data display

Put the cursor on the data you want to remove and hit the [TARGET DATA] key.
4.7.4 Canceling tracking on a target from target data display

Put the cursor on the target you want to stop tracking and hit the [TARGET
CANCEL] key.
4-10
4. AIS OPERATION
4.8 AIS Symbol Attributes

You may adjust the brilliance and select the size and color of the AIS symbol.
4.8.1 AIS symbol brilliance

1. Right-click the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.
2. Select 0 NEXT.
[BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]
1 BACK
2 BRG CURSOR
3 EBL
4 VRM
5 PI LINE
6 TT SYMBOL
7 AIS SYMBOL
8 L/L GRID
9 MARK
0 CHART*
BRILL menu, page 2

3. Select 7 AIS SYMBOL.
4. Roll the scrollwheel to adjust brilliance.
4.8.2 AIS symbol size and color

You may select the size and color of the AIS symbol as follows:

2. Select 4 [TT/AIS].
3. Select 5 [TT/AIS SYMBOL].
[TT.AIS SYMBOL]
1 BACK
2 TT.AIS SYMBOL COLOR
RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL*/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT
000.0/min
5/10
5/10
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL
OFF/ON * Not available on IMO type
AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Select 2 TTAIS SYMBOL COLOR.
5. Select color desired.
4-11
4. AIS OPERATION
6. Select 6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL.

7. Select OFF or ON as applicable.
OFF: All AIS symbols shown in same size.
ON: All AIS symbols are scaled according to ships' lengths.
4.9 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions
of activated AIS targets. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the
preset number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be
uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.
Note that AIS past positions will be shown if TARGET TRACK on the DISPLAY
sub menu of the PLOTTER menu is ON, regardless of whether AUTO TARGET
TRACK on the PLOTTER menu is turned ON or OFF.
Below are sample past position displays.
(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed
Sample past position displays
4.9.1 Past position plot interval

Left-click the PAST POSN box at the right side of the screen to select plot
interval desired: OFF, 30 s, 1, 2, 3 or 6 min. Select OFF to erase all past position
points and turn off the past position display.
PAST POSN REL 2MIN
PAST POSN box
4-12
4. AIS OPERATION
4.9.2 Past position points

You may select the number of past position points to show per plot interval as
follows:

.
2. Select 4 [TT/AIS] to open the TT AIS menu.
3. Select 5 [TT/AIS SYMBOL].
[TT.AIS SYMBOL]
1 BACK
RED*/GRN/BLU/YEL*/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT
000.0/min
5/10
5/10
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL
AIS SYMBOL menu

4. Select 5 AIS PAST POSN POINTS.
5. Select 5 or 10 as appropriate.
4.9.3 Past position display motion

The past position display may be shown in true or relative motion. Open the
TRAIL menu and set TRAIL MODE to TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
4.9.4 Stabilization in true motion

The true motion past position display may be ground stabilized or sea stabilized.
The PAST POSN box shows current stabilization as TRUE-G or TRUE-S. To
change the stabilization mode, open the SPEED menu and set SHIP SPEED to
BT (ground stabilization) or WT (sea stabilization).
4-13
4. AIS OPERATION
4.10 Lost Target

A target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or
five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter. When this occurs, the target is
marked with the (flashing) lost target symbol and the indication "LOST" appears
in the Alert Box. To acknowledge a lost target, press the [ALARM ACK] key, or
use the trackball to select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button.
Lost target
Note 1: If a TT lost target mark is displayed when the [ALARM ACK] key is
pressed (or the ALARM ACK box is clicked) to acknowledge an AIS lost
target, the TT lost target also is erased.
Note 2: The AIS data transmission interval depends on targets speed. For
example, the data is transmitted every 10 seconds on ship speed of 0 to
14 knots and every two seconds on the ship speed of more than 23
knots. For details see the owners manual of the AIS.
4.10.1 Lost target filter

If there are a lot of AIS targets in your area, the lost target alarm may sound
frequently. In this case you may wish to have the alarm ignore lost targets whose
range, speed, class or length are below the threshold value you specify.

.
2. Select 4 [TTAIS] to open the TT AIS menu.
3. Select 8 [AIS LOST FILTER].
[AIS LOST FILTER]
1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE
OFF/ON
0NM
4 MIN SHIP SPEED
OFF/ON
0.1kn
5 EXCEPT CLASS B
OFF/ON
5 MIN SHIP LENGTH
OFF/ON
0M
AIS LOST FILTER menu
4-14
4. AIS OPERATION
4. Set items 2-5 as appropriate, referring the description below.
MAX RANGE: Any AIS lost targets beyond this range will not trigger
the lost target alarm.
MIN SHIP SPEED: Any AIS lost targets slower than this setting will not
trigger the lost target alarm.
EXCEPT CLASS B: Select ON to prevent trigger lost B class AIS lost
target.
MIN SHIP LENGTH: Any AIS lost targets whose length is shorter than this
setting will not trigger the lost target alarm.
4.10.2 Enabling, disabling the lost target alarm

The LOST TARGET ALARM box at the bottom right corner enables and disables
the lost target alarm. Select OFF, ALL or FILT as appropriate.
OFF: Disable the alarm.
ALL: Get the alarm against all lost targets.
FILT: Get the alarm against the AIS targets whose criteria meet
the settings on the AIS LOST FILTER menu.
LOST TARGET ALARM OFF
LOST TARGET box
4-15
4. AIS OPERATION
4.11 ROT Setting

You may set the lower limit of the ROT (Rate Of Turn) at which the heading line
on target symbols will point in direction of turning of the vessel.

2. Select 4 [TT/AIS] to open the TT/AIS menu.
[TT.AIS SYMBOL]
1 BACK
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT
000.1/min
5/10
5/10
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL
OFF/ON
AIS SYMBOL menu

3. Select 3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT.
4. Use the numeral keys or the scrollwheel to enter ROT (setting range: 0.1 to
720.0 (/min)).
Ship turning
to port
ROT display
4-16
4. AIS OPERATION
4.12 AIS Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA)

The AIS continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of
Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each AIS target. When the
predicted CPA of an AIS target becomes smaller than a preset CPA range and its
predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA limit, the audio alarm sounds and AIS
COLLISION appears (in red) in the Alert Box. In addition, the symbol of the
offending AIS target is red and flashes together with its vector.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the
size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
The reference point for CPA, TCPA calculation may be selected from antenna
position or conning position. For further details, see section 1.50.
4.12.1 Setting the CPA and TCPA ranges

To set the CPA and TCPA ranges, do the following:
1. Left-click CPA LIMIT box to show the CPA and TCPA boxes.
CPA LIMIT Box CPA Box
CPA LIMIT 0.5NM 10MIN TCPA Box

CPA LIMIT, CPA and TCPA boxes
2. Select the CPA Box.
3. Push the left button or scrollwheel to select CPA value.
Left button 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6(nm)
Scrollwheel 0.1-20(nm), 0-10 nm in 0.1 nm increments, 10 nm
increments thereafter
4. Select the TCPA box.
5. Push the left button or scrollwheel to select TCPA value.
Left button 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15(minutes)
Scrollwheel 1-60 minutes, 1-minute increment
4.12.2 Enabling, disabling the AIS collision alarm

Use the CPA AUTO ACTIVATE box at the bottom right corner to enable or
disable the AIS collision alarm.
OFF: Disable automatic activation.
ALL: Activation against AIS targets whose CPA or TCPA is less than set in
section 4.12.1.
FILT: Alarm is given against AIS targets which meet the following criteria:
- AIS target that meets the criteria set with 6 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE on the
TTAIS menu.
- CPA or TCPA of an AIS target is smaller than that set in section 4.12.1
CPA AUTO ACTIVATE OFF
CPA AUTO ACTIVATE box
4-17
4. AIS OPERATION
4.12.3 Limiting the function of the collision alarm

You can limit the function of the collision alarm by distance from own ship, ship's
speed, ship class, and ship's length.

2. Choose 4 TTAIS.
3. Choose 6 [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE].
[CPA AUTO ACTIVATE]
1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE
OFF/ON
0NM
3 MIN SHIP SPEED
OFF/ON
0.0KN
4 EXCEPT CLASS B
OFF/ON
5 MIN SHIP LENGTH
OFF/ON
0M
CPA AUTO ACTIVATE menu
4. Set items 2-5 as appropriate.

MAX RANGE: Any AIS target beyond this range will not be
automatically activated.
MIN SHIP SPEED: Any AIS targets slower than this setting will not be
automatically activated.
EXCEPT CLASS B: Select ON to prevent automatic activation of class B
AIS targets.
MIN SHIP LENGTH: Any AIS targets whose length is shorter than this setting
will not be automatically activated.
4-18
4. AIS OPERATION
4.13 Association of TT and AIS Targets

If the target data from AIS and TT are both available, and if the association
criteria (for example position, motion) are fulfilled such that the AIS and TT are
considered as one physical target, the activated AIS (or TT) target symbol and
the alphanumeric AIS (or TT) target data is automatically selected and
displayed.
If the AIS and radar information become sufficiently different, the AIS and radar
information shall be considered as two distinct targets. One activated AIS target
and one tracked radar target shall be displayed.
1. Confirm that the TT ACQ MODE box shows AUTO or AUTO MAN.
3. Select 4 [TTAIS] to open the TT/AIS menu.
4. Select 0 [ASSOCIATION] to show the ASSOCATION menu, shown right.
[ASSOCIATION]
1 BACK
2 ASSOCIATION TARGET
OFF/AIS/TT
3 GAP
0.050NM
4 RANGE
0.100NM
5 BEARING
9.9
6 SPEED
6.0kn
7 COURSE
25.0
5. Select ASSOCIATION TARGET.

6. Select OFF, AIS or TT as applicable to select which symbols and data to
show when association criteria is met.
OFF: Turn off association.
AIS: Use AIS symbols and AIS data.
TT: Use TT symbols and TT data.
4-19
4. AIS OPERATION
Note: Association can also be switched on and off from the screen by
left-clicking the Association Usage icon, shown below.
Association Usage
>: Use TT symbols and data
<: Use AIS symbols and data
No indication: Assocation OFF
TT OFF < DISP

AIS FILT
VECTOR REL 30M
PAST POSN REL 3M
CPA LIMIT 0. 5NM 22MIN
CPA AUTO ACTIVATE OFF
LOST TARGET ALARM OFF
TARGET CURSOR
DATA & ACQ MENU
7. Enter the information below, pushing the scrollwheel (or the [MARK ENTER]
key) after entering each data. This information will be used to determine
which tracked targets to convert.
GAP: Enter the range in bearing direction between AIS target and
tracked target.
(setting range: 0.000-0.999(nm))
RANGE: Enter the range direction difference from own ship to AIS
target and tracked target. (setting range: 0.000-0.999(nm))
BEARING: Enter the bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and
tracked target. (setting range: 0.0-99.9())
SPEED: Enter the speed difference between AIS target and tracked
target. (setting range: 0.0-9.9(kn))
COURSE: Enter the course difference between AIS target and tracked
target. (setting range: 0.0-99.9())
When the association criteria (gap, range, bearing, speed, and course) is met,
and the ASSOCIATION TARGET setting is "AIS," the TT symbol is erased and
only the AIS symbol is displayed. Further, "ASSOCIATION" appears in the Alert
Box.
All default association settings are restored whenever the power is turned on.
4-20
4. AIS OPERATION
4.14 Own Ships Data

Own ships static data (type of ship, call sign, name and position of internal and
external GPS antennas) can be viewed as follows
1. Right-click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen to open the AIS
TARGET menu.
2. Select 7 STATIC DATA.
[STATIC DATA]
1 BACK
TYPE OF SHIP
000
ALL SHIPS OF A
THIS TYPE
CALL SIGN
(call sign here)
B
NAME
(ship name here) C D
EXT GPS ANT POSN
A: 000m B: 000m
C: 00m D: 00m
STATIC DATA menu

4-21
4. AIS OPERATION
4.15 Messages
You may transmit and receive messages via the AIS, to a specified destination
(MMSI) or all ships in the area. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of
navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are also
permitted.
Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety
information. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS.
4.15.1 Creating, saving messages

This section shows you how to create and save a message. Nine messages may
be saved.
Note: You can display the TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu and set ship's MMSI no.
by right-clicking the appropriate AIS target in the AIS target data display.
1. Right click the AIS DISP box.

2. Select 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE.
[TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
1 BACK
2 ADDRESS TYPE
ADDRESSED/BROADCAST
3 MESSAGE TYPE
SAFETY/BINARY
4 MMSI NO. 000000000
5 CHANNEL
A/B/A or B/A and B
6 OPEN FILE 1
7 SAVE FILE 1
8 EDIT
9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu

3. Select 2 ADDRESS TYPE.
4. Select ADDRESSED (message for specific MMSI) or BROADCAST
(message to all AIS-equipped vessels in area).
5. Select 3 MESSAGE TYPE.
6. Select SAFETY for safety message or BINARY for routine message.
7. For ADDRESSED message, do this step. For BROADCAST message, go to
step 9.
1) Select 4 MMSI NO.
2) Use the scrollwheel to enter ships MMSI no.: Select alphanumeric character
then push the scrollwheel.
8. Select 5 CHANNEL.
9. Select the AIS channel to transmit your message over: A, B, A or B, or A and
B. Push the scrollwheel after making your selection.
4-22
4. AIS OPERATION
10. Select 8 EDIT and push the scrollwheel or left button. A mini keyboard
appears at the bottom of the menu.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 BS
Q W E R T Y U I O P -
A S D F G H J K L +
Z X C V B N M , . ?
# / END
Space
Mini keyboard
11. Use the trackball to select character desired then push the left button. Repeat
to enter message. The maximum number of characters allowable is as
follows:
ADDRESSED BINARY: 151
ADDRESSED SAFETY: 156
BROADCAST BINARY: 156
BROADCAST SAFETY: 161
12. Select END then push the left button.
13. Select 7 SAVE FILE.
14. Select appropriate number.
4.15.2 Transmitting messages

1. Right-click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2. Do one of the following:
a) Create a message as described in section 4.14.1.
b) Use a file saved in the memory by choosing 5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
followed by 6 OPEN FILE.
3. Select 9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE to transmit the message.
4. Push the right button to send the message and close the menu.
"AIS TRANSMITTING" appears while the message is being transmitted.

"TRANSMIT ERROR" appears if a message could not be transmitted.
4-23
4. AIS OPERATION
4.15.3 Viewing messages

When an AIS message is received, the display shows an appropriate icon to
alert you. If you are set up to automatically display AIS messages they are
automatically displayed upon receipt. The system stores up to 20 AIS messages.
When the storage capacity is reached the oldest AIS message is automatically
erased to make room for the latest. Note that received messages and alarm
messages are not backed up when the power is turned off.
Manually viewing received messages

To view received AIS messages do the following:
1. Right-click the AIS DISP box at the right side of the display.
[AIS TARGET MENU]
1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

NO/YES
NO/YES
OFF/ON
6 [VOYAGE DATA]
7 [STATIC DATA]
AIS TARGET menu

2. Select 4 RECEIVED MESSAGES. (Up to five received messages are
displayed.)
[RECEIVED MESSAGES]
(1/1)
1 BACK [L = TOP]
2 09DEC2003 12:34
ADDRESSED SAFETY
MMSI: 107374182
RECEIVED MESSAGES menu
4-24
4. AIS OPERATION
3. Select the message which you want to see.

NAME: FURUNO
CALL: 112233
STORM WARNING VICINITY
OF 35N 135W
Example of received AIS message (max. 180 characters)

4. Push the right button several times to close the message and the menu.
Automatically displaying messages

You can display AIS messages upon receipt as follows:
1. Right-click the AIS DISP box.

2. Select 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGES.
3. Select ON.
When a message arrives the message arrival icon ( ) appears at the right-hand
side of the display. Click the icon with the left button to show the message.
Manually viewing alarm messages

The transponder outputs various alarm messages. You can view them as
follows:
1. Right-click the AIS DISP box.

2. Select 8 AIS ALM MESSAGES.
3. Select the date display of alarm you want to view.
4-25
4. AIS OPERATION
4.16 AIS System Messages

AIS system messages are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen.
The table below shows the AIS system messages and their meanings.
AIS system messages
Message Meaning
AIS COLLISION CPA and TCPA of an activated AIS target are
below value set on the menu.
AIS GUARD AIS target has entered an acquisition zone.
AIS LOST Lost target. An activated target is declared a
lost target when it fails to produce data for six
minutes or five reporting intervals, whichever
is the shorter.
AIS TARGET 95% Appears when capacity for AIS targets is 95%
full.
AIS TARGET FULL The radar only displays the closest 1000 AIS
targets from own ship.
ASSOCIATION Tracked target merged with AIS target. The
indication disappears when the target no
longer meets the criteria set in section 4.12.
When the message "RECEIVE" is displayed,
ASSOCIATION is not displayed.
NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS CPA/TCPA cannot be calculated. Further the
CPA/TCPA value in the basic data display is
marked with an asterisk to indicate that it is
not reliable.
RECEIVE Not receiving AIS data from own AIS (VDO
message).
TRANSMIT ERROR Could not send AIS message.
WT Water tracking speed in use.
4-26
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION
5.1 General
The video plotter does the following functions:
Plots own and other ships tracks. (Plotting of other ships tracks not available
on IMO type.)
Enters waypoints nav lines and marks.
Records data onto memory cards (optional card interface required).
It uses two types of memory cards, a memory card (RAM card) for storing own
ship and other ships tracks and marks, and a digital chart card (ROM card).
30 nav lines may be stored and each line may contain up to 30 waypoints.
Five nav lines may be simultaneously shown on the display. 200 waypoints are
available. Own ship and other ship tracks may be stored at a selected interval.
Charts (A, B, C and W types) are superimposed on the radar picture without
disturbing the radar observation. The chart area is dependent on the radar
range in use.
5.2 Display Modes

This radar has display modes as follows.
IMO, A type: Radar, Radar + Plotter, Anchor Watch
B, C, W type: Radar, Radar + Plotter, Plotter
Use the DISPLAY MODE box to select a mode. (When the video plotter mode is
displayed more than five seconds, the radar automatically goes into standby.)
Note 1: Display mode cannot be selected when the menu is open. Close the
menu to select a display mode.
Note 2: IMO type radar can display own ships track and L/L grid on the
+PLOTTER display.
Note 3: The anchor watch, as well as AIS, is active in standby.
5-1
Sample video plotter display
Past position Separation zone

(AIS and TT) Waypoint
Tracked Target Navline
(TT) W012 Own ship
safe contour
Planned route
Heading line
AIS activated Own ship
target vector
Approximate
Dangerous side of coastline
own ship safe
contour may look
like this (hatched line)
Video plotter display
5.3 Presentation Modes

Five presentation modes are available: North-up, Course-up, Head-up, Head-up
TB (True Bearing) Stern-up and North-up TM (True Motion). To select a mode,
use the [MODE] key or select the PRESENTATION MODE box then push the left
button. For a description of the presentation modes, see section 1.12.
Note 1: Chart data is not displayed on the HEAD UP and HEAD UP TB modes.
Note 2: The screen may flash when the heading is changed more than one
degree in the HEAD UP or HEAD UP TB mode.
Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode

In the true motion mode, the own ship mark is automatically returned sternward
75% from the screen center when it reaches a location 50% of the display
radius.
5-2
5.4 Radar Map

A radar map is a combination of map lines and symbols whereby the user can
define and input the navigation data, route planning and monitoring data. The
radar map may contain 20,000 points of data. The map data can be saved to
facilitate repeated use on a routine navigation area. The user can create a radar
map on-real time while using the radar for navigation or at leisure time at anchor
or while the radar is not being used. Place of a map can be made for any
waterways apart from the actual own ship location.
All radar map functions are accessed from the radar or radar+plotter display. To
select the radar display, use the trackball to select the DISPLAY MODE box and
push the left button to display "RADAR" or "+PLOTTER". Then, follow the
procedures in this section to create a radar map.
5.4.1 Showing, hiding the radar map display

From menu
1. Use the trackball to select the MARK box.
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00000.00 N
000000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK menu
3. Select 9 MAP DISPLAY.
4. Select ON or OFF as applicable.
From mark legend
MARK > MAP Place cursor on text and

ON left-click to hide and show
map alternately.
5-3
5.4.2 Inscribing radar map marks and lines

1. Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the display.
MARK >
Mark type
-> +
MARK box
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00000.00 N
000000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK menu
4. Select MAP MARK.
Note 1: For other than IMO- and A-type radars you may specify mark color
by choosing 0 MAP MARK COLOR, pushing the scrollwheel then
choosing color desired.
Note 2: On the W-type, the indication "MAP" appears to the right of the
MARK box.
6. With the cursor choosing the MARK box, use the scrollwheel to select the
mark or line type you wish to inscribe then push the left button. See the next
page for available marks. The cursor jumps into the effective display area
and the guidance box now reads "MARK / EXIT."
7. Select 8 MARK POSN.
8. Select mark entry method, CURSOR, OS or L/L. For L/L, enter position.
9. For cursor, use the trackball to put the cursor on the location desired. (You
can see the range and bearing from own ship to the cursor location by
monitoring the bearing and range indication just below the MARK box.) Push
the left button to inscribe the mark or line point.
5-4
To continue entering the same mark or line (with the guidance box showing
"MARK / EXIT"), use the trackball to select location then push the left button.
To quit entering marks or lines, push the right button when the guidance box
reads "MARK / EXIT."
B, C and W types
Item on DISPLAY Item on DISPLAY
(seven colors IMO and A types
menu* menu*
available)
Mark Red Buoy
Danger Highlight Green Buoy
Buoy Red Buoy
Buoy Green Buoy
Buoy Red Buoy
Buoy Green Buoy
Buoy Red Buoy
Danger Highlight Green Buoy

Mark Purple Danger Highlight
Mark Purple Danger Highlight
Mark Orange Mark

Mark Orange Mark
Mark Orange Mark
Mark Purple Navline (map)
Mark White Coastline
Nav Line (map) Gray Contour Line
Coastline Purple Danger Highlight
Contour Purple (cable) Danger Highlight
Prohibited Area Orange Mark
(cable) Danger Highlight Orange Mark
(w/line) Buoy
(w/line) Mark
(w/line) Mark
(w/line) Mark
* The graphics on the DISPLAY menu can shown or hidden.
PAGE 1: 5 MARK, 8 COASTLINE, 9 CONTOUR LINE
PAGE 2: 2 NAVLINE, 3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT, 4 PROHIBITED AREA, 5 BUOY
Note: Any inscribed mark or graphic is retained when the power is turned off.
5-5
5.5 Erasing Radar Map Marks and Lines

A total of 20,000 points is allotted for radar map marks and lines. When this
amount is exceeded, no more map marks or lines may be entered unless you
erase unnecessary marks or lines.
5.5.1 Erasing individual radar map marks and lines

"MARK DELETE / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the radar map mark or line you wish to
erase.
3. Push the left button to erase selected mark or line.
Note: When erasing a line, the cursor location determines how the line will
be erased. To erase a single line segment, put the cursor on the
starting point of the line. When the junction point between two line
segments is erased, the line is redrawn connecting the line segments
that were before and after the erased junction. See the figure below for
an example.
Erasing a line segment
After erasing
Erasing two lines
After erasing
Cursor location and line processing
5-6
5.5.2 Erasing all radar map marks and lines

You can erase all radar map marks and lines from the screen as below. Be
absolutely sure you want to erase all map marks and lines erased marks and
lines cannot be restored.

2. Select 5 [PLOTTER] to open the PLOTTER menu.
3. Select 8 [DATA ERASE].
[DATA ERASE]
1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK*1
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*2
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE
NO/YES
7 OWN TRACK DELETE*3
2POINTS/AREA *1 Colors not shown on IMO type
8 TARGET TRACK DELETE*3 *2 Not available on IMO type
2POINTS/AREA *3 Not available on IMO or A type
DATA ERASE menu

4. Select 4 MARK ALL ERASE.
5. Select YES to erase all marks.
5-7
5.6 Radar Map Corrections

5.6.1 Radar map correction
When there is positional error between the radar screen and radar map marks
and lines, do the following to correct it.
display "CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Operate the trackball to align the radar map with the radar screen.
3. Push the left button to set. "MAN ALIGNED" appears at the right side of the
screen.
To release the radar map correction, display "CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT"
in the guidance box then push the left button until "MAN ALIGNED" disappears
from the screen.
5.6.2 Cursor data correction

You can correct cursor data as below.

[PLOTTER]
1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL*
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
0 AUTO TARGET TRACK*
PLOTTER menu
3. Select 7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN.
5-8
4. Select ON. "ALIGN" appears (in red) next to cursor position in the text area.
(To remove the correction, select OFF. If you are using the AIS function,
select ON.)
5.7 Chart Cards (A, B, C and W types)

FURUNO or NAVIONICS charts can be overlaid on the radar image when they
are interfaced with the optional Card I/F Unit CU-200.
CAUTION
Handle chart cards and memory cards
with care.
Keep cards away from direct sunlight,

heat sources, and active gases.
Keep cards away from water and
chemicals.
Keep the connector free foreign
material.
Do not drop the cards.
Chart cards are intended as an aid to

navigation. The navigator has the
responsibility to check all aids available
to confirm position.
5.7.1 Displaying a chart

To display a chart:
1. Insert a chart card in either of the two card slots in the Card I/F Unit CU-200.
1 2
+ +
Card Slot
Card slot location
2. Press the [POWER] button on the control unit to turn the power on. With the
radar transmitting, select the radar display (NU, CU, TM modes only) or the
radar/video plotter display to display the chart.
To display a chart after the power has been turned on, change the range by
pressing the [RANGE+] or [RANGE-] key or operating the RANGE box.
5-9
5.7.2 Chart position correction

There may be a case where the chart overlay is not aligned with the radar image.
This is due to an error in the position fixing system (GPS, Loran, etc.) or the
different coordinates between the position fixing system and the radar. In this
case, align the chart with the radar image as below.
"CHART ALIGN L=OFF / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Operate the trackball to align the chart with the radar map. Note that track is
neither recorded nor displayed at this point.
3. Push the left button to set. "CHART ALIGN" appears (in red) at the right side
of the screen.
To release the chart position correction, display "CHART ALIGN L=OFF /

EXIT" in the guidance box then push the left button until "CHART ALIGN"
disappears from the screen.
5.7.3 Correcting cursor data

[PLOTTER]
1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
PLOTTER menu
3. Select 7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN.
4. Select ON. "ALIGN" appears (in red) next to cursor position in the cursor data
box. (To remove the correction, select OFF. If you are using the AIS function,
select ON.)
5-10
5.7.4 Chart land color (B, C and W types)

You may select the color for the land on charts as follows:

[PLOTTER]
1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
PLOTTER menu
3. Select 2 CHART COLOR.
5-11
5.8 Hiding, Showing Graphics on the Video Plotter

Display
3. Select 9 [DISPLAY]. Select an item. To go to page 2, select 0 NEXT. You may
return to page 1 by choosing 1 BACK and pressing the scrollwheel or the left
button.
[DISPLAY (1/2)] [DISPLAY (2/2)]
1 BACK 1 BACK
2 GRID Choose 2 NAV LINE(MAP)
OFF/ON 0 NEXT OFF/ON
3 OWN TRACK to show 3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT
OFF/ON page 2. OFF/ON
4 TARGET TRACK* 4 PROHIBITED AREA
OFF/ON OFF/ON
5 MARK 5 BUOY
OFF/ON OFF/ON
6 LAND DENSITY*
OFF/ON
7 PLACE NAME* Page 2
OFF/ON
8 COAST LINE
OFF/ON
9 CONTOUR LINE
OFF/ON/DEPTH
0 NEXT
* Not available on IMO or A type
Page 1
DISPLAY menus
4. Push the scrollwheel to select OFF or ON.
Note: LAND DENSITY fills (ON) or hollows (OFF) land on an electronic
chart. Land will be hollow when wrong card or wrong scale is used,
regardless of LAND DENSITY setting.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set other items.
6. Push the right button three or four times to close the menu depending on
which page of the DISPLAY menu you are using.
5-12
5.9 Track
5.9.1 Plotting own ships track
A total of 20,000 points are allotted for storage of own ships track, marks and
lines. When this memory becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room
for the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to
conserve the memory.
The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track
recording time.
Own track plotting interval and storage time
Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time

10 s 55 hr 30 min 2 min 27 days 18 hr 40 min
30 s 166 hr 40 min 3 min 41 days 16 hr
1 min 13 days 21 hr 20 min 6 min 83 days 8 hr

[PLOTTER]
1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR*
GRN/YEL/CYA
ORANGE/GRAY
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
4 OWN TRACK COLOR
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
OFF/DRAW/10S/30S/
1M/2M/3M/6M/15M
6 TGT TRACK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN
OFF/ON
8 [DATA ERASE]
9 [DISPLAY]
PLOTTER menu
3. Select 3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL.
4. Select appropriate option. Select OFF to stop plotting own ships track.
DRAW displays the track but does not record it. Track is erased when the
power is turned off or the range is changed.
5-13
5.9.2 Plotting interval for other ships' tracks (A, B, C and W types)
The tracks of 15 targets (other ships) can be recorded. The memory capacity for
other ships track is 15,000 points (1,000 points per each of 15 targets). When
the other ships track memory becomes full the oldest track is deleted to make
room for the latest. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval
to conserve the memory.
The table below shows the relation between plotting interval and maximum track
recording time for other ships track.
Other target plot interval and storage time
Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time

10 s 2 hrs 46 min 2 min 66 hrs 20 min
30 s 8 hrs 20 min 3 min 50 hrs
1 min 16 hrs 40 min 6 min 100 hrs

3. Select 5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL.
4. Select appropriate option. Select OFF to stop plotting own ships track.
DRAW displays the track but does not record it.
5-14
5.9.3 Auto target track (A, B, C and W types)

You may display the track for up to 15 targets, automatically or manually.

3. Select 0 AUTO TARGET TRACK.
ON: TT target number (1-15) automatically assigned to corresponding ship's
track on the plotter display.
OFF: The operator manually assigns target numbers to TT and AIS targets.
5. Push the right button twice to close the menu. If you selected OFF at step 4,
go to step 6 to assign a number to a track.
6. Put the cursor inside the effective display then spin the scrollwheel to show
TARGET TRACK ON/EXIT in the guidance area.
7. Select the track of the TT or AIS target for which to assign target number
then push the left button.
8. Repeat step 7 to assign target numbers to other tracked targets, up to 15
targets.
9. Push the right button to finish.
5.9.4 Choosing track color (A, B, C and W types)

3. Select 4 OWN TRACK COLOR or 6 TGT TRACK COLOR, whichever track
color you want to set.
5-15
5.9.5 Erasing track from the menu, on the screen

The display may become full of track when, for example, own ship traces the
same route several times or there are many tracks from other ships. You may
erase track two ways: through the menu (by color or percentage) or directly on
the screen (track between specified points is erased).
Erasing track from the menu

[DATA ERASE]
1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK*1
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*2
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
NO/YES
DATA ERASE menu

4. Select 2 OWN TRACK or 3 TARGET TRACK (not available on IMO-type
radar), whichever track you want to erase.
5. Select color (not available on IMO type) or percentage to erase. For example,
"30" erases the oldest 30% of the track selected at step 4. Select "ALL" to
erase all of the corresponding track.
6. Push the right button three times close the menu.
Erasing track between two points

1. Roll the scrollwheel to display MARK DELETE/EXIT in the guidance box.
2. Put the cursor on the start of the track section you want to erase then push
the scrollwheel.
3. Put the cursor on the end of the track section you want to erase then push
the scrollwheel.
5-16
5.9.6 Erasing track with the cursor

You may erase own ship track or any targets track directly on the screen, by two
points or area. Select the erasure method and then erase track.
x: Specified point
Erase track between two points Erase track within a specific range
Choosing erasure method

1. Left-click the MENU box.
2. Select 5 [PLOTTER] and push the left button.
3. Select 8 [DATA ERASE] and push the left button.
4. Select 7 OWN TRACK DELETE and push the left button.
5. Select 2POINTS or AREA as appropriate and push the left button.
2POINTS: Erase track between two points
AREA: Erase all track within an area
6. Select appropriate option for 8 TARGET TRACK DELETE similarly.
Erasing track between two points, area

1. Place the cursor inside the effective display area.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to show OWN TRACK DELETE/EXIT or TGT TRACK
DELETE/EXIT in the guidance box at the bottom right-hand corner on the
screen, whichever track you want to erase.
3. Use the trackball to place the cursor at the top-left corner of the area (or 1st
point in case of erasure by two points) and push the left button.
4. Use the trackball to drag the cursor at the bottom-right corner of the area (or
2nd point in case of erasure by two points). If the erasure method (chosen on
the previous page) is "AREA", a rectangle appears when you start dragging
the cursor.
5. Push the left button to erase track.
6. Push the right button to quit.
Note that this function is automatically canceled if there is no erasure occurring

in 30 seconds.
5-17
5.10 Waypoints
A particular location is known as a "waypoint," whether it be a starting point, a
destination point or an intermediate point on a voyage. This unit can store 200
waypoints, numbered 001 to 200. Waypoints may be entered with the cursor or
by input of latitude and longitude.
5.10.1 Entering waypoints

Entering waypoints with the cursor
1. Use the trackball to select the MARK box at the left side of the screen.
MARK >
Mark type last 1
selected, mark
number 162.5T 11.7NM
Bearing and range from
own ship to waypoint
MARK box
[MARK MENU]
1 ORIGIN MARK STAB

GND/SEA
2 MARK KIND
ORIGIN MARK(No. )/
ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/
MAP MARK/
WP 1~50/
WP 51~ 100/
WP 101~150/
WP 151~198/
OWN SHIP SHAPE
8 MARK POSN
CURSOR/OS/L/L
00000.00 N
000000.00 E
9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
CYA/MAG/WHT
MARK menu
4. Select the WPT item which best matches the waypoint number you wish to
enter. For example, if you want to enter waypoint number 59, select "WPT
51-100."
5-18
6. With the MARK box selected, roll the scrollwheel to display waypoint number
desired then push the left button. The cursor jumps into the effective display
area and the guidance box reads "MARK / EXIT."
7. Use the trackball to put the cursor where you want to inscribe a waypoint
mark then push the left button to inscribe the mark. The waypoint mark (" " +
waypoint number) appears at the location selected. (You can see the range
and bearing to the cursor location by monitoring the mark range and bearing
indication just below the MARK box.)
To enter another waypoint, push the right button when the guidance box reads
"MARK / EXIT" then repeat steps 6-8. ("WPT" should be selected on the
MARK menu.)
To quit entering waypoints, push the right button when the guidance box reads
"MARK / EXIT."
Entering waypoints by manual input of latitude and longitude

2. Select 8 [NAV LINEWPT].
[NAV LINEWPT (1/2)]
1 BACK
2 NAV LINE DATA
OFF/EXT DATA/
INTERNAL DATA/
WPT MARK*
3 NAV LINE SELECT
--
FORWARD/REVERSE
4 SKIP NEXT WPT
5 NAV LINE WIDTH
9.99NM
6 [WPT SET]
7 [WPT LIST]
8 [NAV LINE SET]
9 [NAV LINE LIST]
0 NEXT
NAV LINEWPT menu

3. Select 6 [WPT SET].
[WPT SET]
1 BACK
2 WPT NO. SELECT
001
3 WPT NAME
4 WPT L/L
_ __ _._ _ _ N
_ _ __ _. _ _ _E
5 CLEAR DATA
WPT SET menu NO/YES
5-19
4. Select 2 WPT NO. SELECT.

5. Use the scrollwheel to select waypoint number: Select location then push the
scrollwheel to set.
6. To enter waypoint name, follow the procedure below. If you do not require
waypoint name go to step 7.
a) Select 3 WPT NAME.
b) Select alphanumeric character desired then push the scrollwheel.
c) Repeat step 2 to complete the waypoint name. You may use up to 15
alphanumeric characters for waypoint name.
7. Select 4 WPT L/L.
8. Enter latitude and longitude position as follows:
a) Select location desired then push the scrollwheel. (The scrollwheel may be
pushed again to skip a place.) For input by keyboard, press appropriate
numeric keys then press the [ENTER MARK] key.
b) To switch co-ordinate polarity, roll the scrollwheel or use the [2] key in case
of keyboard operation.
9. To enter another waypoint, repeat steps 4-8.
5.10.2 Editing, erasing waypoints from the menu

You may edit or erase waypoints from the menu as follows:

3. Select 6 [WPT SET].
4. Select 2 WPT NO. SELECT.
5. Use the scrollwheel to enter waypoint number you wish to edit. Then, do one
of the following:
To change the waypoint name, Select 3 WPT NAME. Use the scrollwheel
to edit waypoint name.
To edit the waypoint position, Select 4 WPT L/L. Use the scrollwheel to edit
waypoint position.
To erase the waypoint, Select 5 CLEAR DATA. Note that a waypoint cannot
be erased if it is part of a nav line.
5-20
5.10.3 Erasing waypoints

Waypoints may be erased individually or collectively. Note that a waypoint
cannot be erased if it is part of a nav line.
Erasing individual waypoints

"MARK DELETE / EXIT" in the guidance box.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the waypoint you wish to erase. A
flashing "+" appears on the mark when it is correctly selected.
3. Push the left button or the scrollwheel to erase the waypoint.
4. To erase another waypoint, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. To finish, push the right button when the guidance reads "MARK DELETE /
EXIT".
Erasing all waypoints

[DATA ERASE]
1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK*1
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*2
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
NO/YES
DATA ERASE menu

4. Select 5 WPT ALL ERASE.
5. Select YES to erase all waypoints.
5-21
5.10.4 Waypoint list

The waypoint list stores position data of all registered waypoints. Each page of
the waypoint list holds eight waypoints.
To display the waypoint list:
1. Right-click the MENU box at the right side of the screen to open the menu.
2. Select 8 [NAV LINEWPT] to open the NAV LINEWPT menu.
3. Select 7 [WPT LIST]. Asterisks indicate no data.
[WPT LIST (1/25)]
1 BACK (L=TOP)
001 WP1
3442.110 N
13631.580 E
002 WP2
3397.690 N
13464.350 E
003
004
005
006
007
008
0 NEXT (L=LAST)
WPT list
4. To go to a next page, select 0 NEXT.
5. Push the right button several times to close the waypoint list and the menu.
5-22
5.10.5 Displaying waypoint name and number

You may turn waypoint name and number display on or off as desired.

3. Select 0 NEXT.
[NAV LINEWPT (2/2)]
1 BACK
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM
OFF/ON
3 TURNING LINE
OFF/ON/REVISED
4 DISP WPT NO.
OFF/ON
5 DISP WPT NAME
OFF/ON
NAV LINEWPT menu (2/2)

4. Select 4 DISP WPT NO..
6. Select 5 DISP WPT NAME.
5-23
5.11 Nav Lines

30 nav lines may be entered, and each line may have up to 30 waypoints.
5.11.1 Entering a new nav line

To enter a nav line, first enter appropriate waypoints. Then, do the following:

3. Select 8 [NAV LINE SET].
[NAV LINE SET]
1 BACK
2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT
01
3 NAV LINE NAME
4 NAV LINE ENTRY

5 CLEAR DATA
NO/YES
NAV LINE SET menu

4. Select 2 NAV LINE NO. SELECT.
5. Use the scrollwheel to enter nav line no., in two digits.
6. Select 3 NAV LINE NAME.
7. Use the scrollwheel to enter a name.
8. Select 4 NAV LINE ENTRY.
9. Use the scrollwheel to enter waypoint numbers (in three digits): Select
numeral and push it to set.
10. To enter another nav line, select 0 BACK to return to the NAV LINE SET
menu then repeat steps 4-9.
11. To finish, push the right button several times to close the menu.
5-24
5.11.2 Editing a nav line

Follow the procedure below to edit a nav line. Before editing a nav line it must be
disabled. See section 5.11.6.

5. Use the scrollwheel to enter nav line number to edit.
6. To edit nav line name, Select 3 NAV LINE NAME. Use the scrollwheel to
change name.
7. To replace waypoints in a nav line, do the following:
1) Select 4 [NAV DATA ENTRY].
2) Push the scrollwheel to select the waypoint you wish to replace.
3) Roll the scrollwheel to set new waypoint number.
4) Push the scrollwheel to finish.
5-25
5.11.3 Nav line list

The nav line list, which shows all nav lines registered, may be displayed as
follows:

3. Select 9 [NAV LINE LIST].
[NAV LINE LIST (1/30)]
1 BACK (L=TOP)
01 LINE 1
001002003
004005006

0 NEXT (L=LAST)
NAV LINE LIST

4. To go to a next page select 0 NEXT. To return to a previous page, select 1
BACK.
5. Push the right button as many times as necessary to close the menu.
5-26
5.11.4 Erasing a nav line

30 nav lines may be entered. You may erase unnecessary nav lines as shown
below. A nav line that is currently in use cannot be erased.
Erasing individual nav lines

[NAV LINE SET]
1 BACK
01
3 NAV LINE NAME
4 NAV LINE ENTRY

5 CLEAR DATA
NO/YES
NAV LINE SET menu

5. Use the scrollwheel to enter nav line no., in two digits.
6. Select 5 CLEAR DATA.
7. Push the scrollwheel or the left button to delete the nav line.
5-27
Erasing all nav lines

1. Left-click the MENU box.
2. Select 5 [PLOTTER].
[DATA ERASE]
1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK*1
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
3 TARGET TRACK*2
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT/
30%/50%/80%/ALL
4 MARK ALL ERASE
NO/YES
5 WPT ALL ERASE
NO/YES
NO/YES
DATA ERASE menu

4. Select 6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE.
5. Select YES to erase all nav lines and their data.
5.11.5 Setting up nav lines

Nav lines can be set up as follows:
[NAV LINEWPT (1/2)]
1. Left-click the MENU box. 1 BACK

2. Select 8 [NAV LINEWPT]. 2 NAV LINE DATA
OFF/EXT DATA/
3. Select 2 NAV LINE DATA.
INTERNAL DATA/
4. Select INTERNAL DATA. WPT MARK*
5. Select 5 NAV LINE WIDTH. 3 NAV LINE SELECT
6. Use the scrollwheel to enter the width for the --
FORWARD/REVERSE
nav line, from 0.0-9.99(nm). A pair of red lines
4 SKIP NEXT WPT
mark the width of the nav line. 5 NAV LINE WIDTH
0.00NM
* Not available on IMO type 6 [WPT SET]
7 [WPT LIST]
8 [NAV LINE SET]
9 [NAV LINE LIST]
0 NEXT
5-28
7. If you want to be alerted when own ship nears a waypoint by a preset

distance, select 0 NEXT then push the scrollwheel.
[NAV LINEWPT (2/2)]
1 BACK
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM
OFF/ON
0.19NM
3 TURNING LINE
OFF/ON/REVISED
4 DISP WPT NO.
OFF/ON
5 DISP WPT NAME
OFF/ON

8. Select ARRIVAL WPT ALARM.
9. Select ON.
10. Select 3 TURNING LINE.
11. Select appropriate option.
OFF: Turns turning lines off.
ON: Use this setting when the vessel is not to correct cross track error to return
to course set, after arriving at turning line location.
REVISED: Use this setting when vessel is to return to course set after correcting
cross track error, after arriving at turning line location.
Note: Before using the turning line feature, set the Trial Maneuver function as
appropriate, on the TTAIS menu.
No cross track error Cross track error
correction at turning line correction at turning line
Nav
line
Turning line
Course
Turning line
Own ship
Track
TURNING LINE: ON TURNING LINE: REVISED
Turning line
5-29
5.11.6 Displaying nav line, waypoint mark

Displaying internal nav lines
4. Select INTERNAL DATA.
5. Select 3 NAV LINE SELECT.
6. Use the scrollwheel to enter the nav line number you want to display. Select
numeral and push it to set. Note that the same nav line no. cannot be
entered more than once.
7. Use FORWARD or REVERSE to select the order to display waypoints on the
nav line. FORWARD to display them in original order or REVERSE to display
them in reverse order. Select appropriate option then push the scrollwheel.
8. To skip the next waypoint, Select 2 SKIP NEXT WPT.
Displaying external nav lines

Nav lines from an external navigator can be displayed as below. RTE and WPL
sentences are necessary to display a nav line from a navigator.

4. Select EXT DATA.
5. Do the following as appropriate:
1) Set width (0.0-9.9 nm) of the nav line with 5 NAV LINE WIDTH.
2) Turn waypoint number display on or off with 4 DSP WPT NO (page 2 of NAV
LINEWPT menu).
3) Set turning line with 3 TURNING LINE (page 2 of NAV LINEWPT menu).
6. Push the right button two or three times depending on which page of the NAV
LINEWPT menu you are using.
5-30
Waypoint mark (A, B, C and W types only)

The waypoint mark shows the location of a destination waypoint that is set on a
navigator. You may mark this location on the radar display by following the
procedure shown below.
350 000 010
340 020
330 030
320 040 Waypoint Mark
310 050
300 060
290 070
280 080
270 090
260 100
250 110
240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170
Waypoint mark

4. Select WPT MARK.
5-31
5.12 Recording Data

The optional Card I/F Unit CU-200 is required to record or replay data. The
CU-200 has two card slots and you can connect two units, for a total of four card
slots.
5.12.1 Initializing memory (RAM) cards

Before you can use a memory (RAM) card it must be initialized. Formatting
prepares the recording surface of the card for use with the system, and deletes
all data recorded in the memory card. You can format cards youve used before,
however, in which case all prior information on them is erased.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the appropriate card slot in the Card I/F Unit.
1 2
+ +
Card Slot
Card I/F unit, front view
3. Select 6 [CARD]. (Note that "WR" in the CARD menu means "Write.")
[CARD (1/2)]
1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
A/B/C/D*
3 [READ CARD]
4 [WR MARK]
5 [WR NAV LINEWPT]
6 [WR OWN TRACK]
7 [WR TARGET TRACK]** * Drives available are shown.
8 [WR SETTING DATA] ** Not available on IMO type
9 [WR INSTALL DATA]
0 NEXT
CARD menu, page 1

4. Select 2 DRIVE SELECT.
5. Select appropriate drive.
Note: If one unit is connected the drives are, from the left drive on the unit,
A=1 and B=2. In case of a second drive unit, its drives are, from the
left drive on the unit, C=1 and D=2.
1 2 1 2
+ A B + + C D +
One Unit 2nd Unit
5-32
6. Select 0 NEXT.
[CARD (2/2)]
1 BACK
2 [FILE DELETE]
3 [CARD INITIALIZE]
CARD menu, page 2

7. Select 3 CARD INITIALIZE.
[CARD INITIALIZE]
1 BACK
2 INITIALIZE START
NO/YES
CARD INITIALIZE menu

8. Select 2 INITIALIZE START to initialize the card. The LED near the card
flashes, the CARD menu disappears and the message "FORMAT CARD"
appears.
5.12.2 Recording data

When the memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the
latest. Further, when the memory is full you cannot enter another mark or line
unless you erase unnecessary marks, lines or track. Thus you should save
important data to a memory card so as not to lose important data.
1. Insert initialized memory card into appropriate drive in Card I/F Unit.
3. Select 6 [CARD].
[CARD (1/2)]
1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
A/B/C/D*
3 [READ CARD]
4 [WR MARK]
5 [WR NAV LINEWPT] * Drives available are shown.
6 [WR OWN TRACK] ** Not available on IMO type
7 [WR TARGET TRACK]**
8 [WR SETTING DATA]
9 [WR INSTALL DATA]
0 NEXT
CARD menu
5-33
4. Select DRIVE SELECT.

5. Select appropriate drive.
6. Select data to record (one item among 4-9). For example select 4 WR MARK.
The display then looks something like the one below.
[WR MARK]
1 BACK
2 NAME (See note below.)
M0000000
CARD WRITE menu

Note: The file name is composed of a single alphabet, the file type, and
seven alphanumeric characters, the file number. The file type is
denoted as follows:
M: Radar map mark (20,000 points)
W: Waypoint, nav line (Waypoint, 20 points, nav line, 30 lines)
T: Own track (20,000 points)
A: Target track (1,000 points x 15 targets)
S: Setting data (all operating information other than initial settings)
I: Installation data (initial settings)
7. Use the scrollwheel and the left button to enter file name. You may use up to
seven alphanumeric characters.
8. After entering the last digit of the file name the selected item is recorded.
The message "WR CARD DATA" is shown during recording.
5-34
5.13 Replaying Data

Video plotter data (track, marks, etc.) may be replayed on the screen. This is
useful for analyzing past data.
1. Insert memory card into the appropriate slot in an I/F card unit.
3. Select 6 [CARD].
[CARD (1/2)]
1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
A/B/C/D*
3 [READ CARD]
4 [WR MARK]
5 [WR NAV LINEWPT] * Drives available are shown.
6 [WR OWN TRACK] ** Not available on IMO type
7 [WR TARGET TRACK]**
8 [WR SETTING DATA]
9 [WR INSTALL DATA]
0 NEXT
CARD menu
5. Select the drive where you inserted the memory card.
6. Push the left button.
7. Select 3 READ CARD and push the scrollwheel or the left button.
[READ CARD (1/2)]
1 BACK
2 T200304109
.
.
.
9 W200307318
0 NEXT
READ CARD menu

8. Select the data to replay.
9. Push the left button to replay selected data.
The message "RD CARD DATA" is shown during playback. If you selected WR
INSTALL DATA, the prompt "POWER ON RESET" appears; turn the power off
and on again to read in installation data.
5-35
Note: Marks, own ships track and other ships tracks replayed from a memory
card are added to the data currently displayed. If, at replay, the memory is full,
the message "MEMORY FULL" appears. Press the [ALARM ACK] key to erase
the message. Memory capacity is as shown below.
Mark: 20,000 points

Own ship's track: 20,000 points
Other ships tracks: 1,000 points x 15 targets
5.14 Deleting Files

2. Select 6 [CARD].
4. Select the appropriate drive.
5. Select 0 NEXT.
[CARD]
1 BACK
2 FILE DELETE
3 CARD INITIALIZE
CARD menu, page 2

6. Select 2 FILE DELETE.
[FILE DELETE (1/1)]
1 BACK
2 T2003410
3 W2003126
4 A20035311
5 S20030129
6 S20030118
FILE DELETE display

7. Select the file to delete.
The message "DELETE CARD DATA" appears while data is being deleted.
5-36
6. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any
electronic system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting
instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the longest
possible life of the equipment. Before attempting any maintenance or
troubleshooting procedure please review the safety information below.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can

cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
Turn off the radar power

switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a warn-
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be
turned on while the antenna
unit is being serviced.
Prevent the potential risk of

being struck by the rotating
antenna.
A transmitting radar
antenna emits electromag-
netic waves, which can be
harmful, particularly the
eyes.
Wear a safety belt and hard

hat when working on the
antenna unit.
Serious injury or death can

result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.
NOTICE
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant
or contact spray to coating or plastic
parts of the equipment.
Those items contain organic solvents that

can damage coating and plastic parts,
especially plastic connectors.
6-1
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance
program should be established and should at least include the items shown in
the table below.
Maintenance schedule
Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks

When The LCD will in Wipe the LCD carefully to Do not use chemical-based
needed time accumulate a prevent scratching, using cleaners to clean the LCD. They
layer of dust which tissue paper and an LCD can damage the LCD coating.
tends to dim the cleaner. To remove stubborn
picture dirt, use an LCD cleaner,
wiping slowly with tissue
paper so as to dissolve the
dirt. Change paper frequently
so the dirt will not scratch the
LCD.
Processor unit Dust and dirt may be Do not use chemical-based
cleanliness removed with a soft cloth. cleaners to clean the processor
unit. They can remove paint and
markings.
3 to 6 Exposed nuts and Check for corroded or Sealing compound may be used
months bolts on antenna loosened nuts and bolts. If instead of paint. Apply a small
unit necessary, clean and repaint amount of grease between nuts
them thickly. Replace them if and bolts for easy removal in
heavily corroded. future.
Antenna radiator Check for dirt and cracks on Do not use chemical-based
radiator surface. Thick dirt cleaners for cleaning. They can
should be wiped off with soft remove paint and markings. If
cloth dampened with fresh you need to remove ice from the
water. If a crack is found, antenna unit, use a wooden
apply a slight amount of hammer or plastic head
sealing compound or hammer. Crack on the unit may
adhesive as a temporary cause water ingress, causing
remedy, then call for repair. serious damages to internal
circuits.
Terminal strips and Open antenna cover to check When closing antenna covers in
plugs in antenna terminal strip and plug position, be careful not to catch
unit connections inside. Also loose wires between covers and
(TECHNICIANS check the rubber gasket of unit.
only) antenna covers for
deterioration.
6 months to Terminal strips, Check for loose connections.
one year sockets, earth Check contacts and plugs for
terminal on proper seating, etc.
processor unit
(TECHNICIANS
only)
6-2
6.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts

Parts Type Life Remarks
expectancy
Antenna Motor D8G-516 (24 rpm, X-band) Gear motor
D8G-571 (42 rpm, X-band) 10,000 h
GOB-8222 (18/22 rpm, X-band)
RM-6585 (22 rpm, X-band)
RM-7398 (21/26 rpm, S-band)
RM-7435 (21/26 rpm, S-band)
RM-9519 (45 rpm, S-band)
Carbon brush MG120-5X6X11 D8G (X-band) 10,000 h Check for wear when
replacing magnetron.
Replace if worn.
Magnetron MAF-1425B (X-band, 12 kW) 4,000 h Check no. of hours
MG4010 (X-band, 12 kW) 4,000 h used at Tx time. Reset
MG5436 (X-band, 25 kW) 4,000 h time after replacement.
MG5223F (S-band, 30 kW) 7,000 h
Backlight Unit for 201LHS2F 45,000 h (25C) Replace when brilliance
Display Unit 30,000 h (50C) is uneven or too low.
MU-201CR
Cold Cathode FLCL-23 50,000 h (25C) Replace when brilliance
Fluorescent Lamp 35,000 h (50C) is uneven or too low.
for Display Unit
MU-231CR
LCD assy. 856JAU1745V3 40,000 h
(MU-170C)
The life expectancy figures are typical values. Actual life depends on usage.
6-3
6.3 Replacing the Fuse

The fuse at the rear of the processor unit and the display unit protects the
equipment from overcurrent and equipment fault. If you cannot turn on the power,
first check the fuse. Find the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse.
WARNING
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage

to the equipment or cause fire.
Ships mains and fuse to use
Unit Power Fuse to use

24 VDC 20A
Processor Unit 100-115 VAC 10A
220-230 VAC 5A
100-230 VAC 2A
Display Unit MU-201CR
24 VDC 5A
100-230 VAC 2A
24 VDC 6A
12 VDC 10A
Display Unit MU-170C
24 VDC 5A
6.4 Replacement of Battery on GC Board

The battery installed on the GC (GyroCompass) Board inside the processor unit
preserves gyro data when the power is turned off. The life of the battery is about
five years. When the battery voltage is low, NG appears at the diagnostic test for
the GC Board. When this occurs, contact your dealer for replacement.
Battery on GC Board
Location of battery Battery type Code number

GC board CR 1/2 8.L 000-103-769
6-4
6.5 Trackball Maintenance

If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the trackball as below.
1. Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise 45 to unlock it.
Retaining Ring
2. Remove the retaining ring and ball.

3. Clean the ball with a soft, lint-free cloth, then blow carefully into the ball-cage
to dislodge dust and lint.
4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a
cotton swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.
5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
6. Replace the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted
reversely.
6-5
6.6 Easy Troubleshooting

This section provides troubleshooting procedures that the user may follow to
restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation, do not attempt
to check inside any unit. Any repair work is best left to a qualified technician.
Easy troubleshooting procedures
Problem Cause Remedy

Key beep inaudible Key beep turned off Adjust key beep level on the OPERATION menu,
referring to section 1.43.
Picture not updated or Video freeze Turn the power off and on again to restore normal
picture freeze. 30 operation.
seconds after the
picture freezes, the
buzzer sounds, the
[ALARM ACK] key
blinks and alarm
signal is output.
Power is ON but Brilliance is too low. Keyboard-type control unit: Turn BRILL control
nothing appears on clockwise to increase the brilliance.
monitor. Trackball-type control unit: Press any one of
F1-F4 for five seconds to increase the brilliance to
"50".
Marks, indications and Tx high voltage Reset the power to restore normal operation.
noise appear but no protection circuit has
echo activated.
Range changed but Defective range key Try to hit RANGE [+] and [-] keys (or RANGE box)
radar picture does not or video freeze up several times. (If unsuccessful, replacement of
change keypad may be required in case of the
keyboard-type control unit.) If that does not work
try to turn the power off and on again to see if the
problem might be video freeze up.
Only 2 PI lines when 6 Incorrect setting of Incorrect setting of PI line interval. Adjust PI line
lines are wanted PI line interval interval, referring to section 1.31.2. Also, the
setting for number of PI lines to display may be
inappropriate. Check the menu setting for number
of PI lines, referring to section 1.31.4.
Range rings are not Range rings turned Try turning on the range rings with 0 RINGS in the
displayed off MARK menu. If they do not appear, their brilliance
may be too low. Adjust their brilliance at page 1 of
the BRILL menu.
Tracked target not Poor definition of Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN referring to section
tracked correctly targets in sea clutter 1.17 and 1.18.
Tuning adjusted but 2nd trace echo Turn off the 2nd trace echo rejector, referring to
poor sensitivity rejector on or dirt on section 1.38.
radiator face Clean the radiator face.
6-6
6.7 Advanced-level Troubleshooting

This section describes how to cure hardware and software troubles that should
be carried out by qualified service personnel.
Note 1: This radar equipment contains complex modules in which fault

diagnosis and repair down to component level are not practicable by
users.
Note 2: When replacement of the SPU board is necessary, the previous settings
can be transferred to new SPU board as follows:
- Use the CU-200 to save settings to a RAM card.
- After replacing the SPU board, load the entire contents of the RAM
card to the radar, referring to section 5.12 for the procedure.
Advanced troubleshooting
Problem Probable causes or check Remedy

points
Power turned on but radar 1) Blown fuse. 1) Replace blown fuse.
does not operate at all
2) Mains voltage/polarity 2) Correct wiring and input voltage.
3) Power supply board 3) Replace power supply board.
Brilliance adjusted but no SPU board Replace SPU board.
picture
Antenna not rotating 1) Antenna drive 1) Replace antenna drive mechanism.
mechanism
2) Defective antenna drive 2) Press relay reset button.
motor relay (thermal
relay K2, 200/220/380,
440/100 VAC)
Data and marks not SPU board Replace SPU board.
displayed in Transmit
status
Adjust GAIN with A/C SEA 1) IF amplifier 1) Replace IF amplifier.

set at minimum. Marks and
2) Signal cable between 2) Check continuity and isolation of
indications appear but no
antenna and processor coaxial cable.
noise or echo
unit Note: Disconnect the plug and lugs
at both ends of coaxial cable before
checking it by ohmmeter.
3) Video amplifier board 3) Check video coax line for secure

connection. If connection is good,
replace SPU board.
(Continued on next page)
6-7
Advanced troubleshooting (cont)

points
Marks, indications and 1) TX high voltage 1) Reset power to restore normal
noise appear but no echo protection circuit has operation.
(Transmission leak activated.
representing own ship
position is absent) 2) Magnetron 2) Check magnetron current.
Replace magnetron.
3) Modulator board 3) Replace modulator board.

4) SPU board 4) Replace SPU board.
Picture not updated or 1) Bearing signal generator 1) Check the connection of signal
picture freeze-up board (in antenna unit) cables.

3) Video freeze-up 3) Turn off and on the radar.
Incorrect orientation of 1) SPU board 1) The message GYRO appears when
picture the heading pulse is not received
during standby.
2) Gyro interface 2) Replace the gyro interface.
Cannot operate radar from SPU Board Replace SPU Board.

on-screen boxes
Radar is properly tuned but 1) Deteriorated magnetron 1) With the radar transmitting on 48 nm
poor sensitivity range, check magnetron current.
If current is below normal, magnetron
may be defective. Replace it.
2) Detuned MIC 2) Check MIC detecting current. If it is
below normal value, MIC may have
become detuned. MIC must be
tuned.
3) Dirt on radiator face 3) Clean the radiator surface.
4) Water ingress to the 4) Remove water from the feeder line.
waveguide or other
feeder line
5) Second trace echo 5) Disable the second-trace echo
rejection is ON rejector referring to section 1.38.
Range changed but radar 1) Defective range key 1) Try to hit RANGE [+] and [-] keys
picture not changing several times. If unsuccessful,
replacement of keypad may be
required.
3) Video freeze up 3) Turn off and on radar.
6-8
Advanced troubleshooting (cont)

points
Interference rejector is SPU board Replace SPU board.
inoperative (interference
rejection level not
displayed)
Echo stretch is ineffective SPU board Replace SPU board.
(neither ES1, ES2 nor ES3
is displayed)
Range rings are not 1) Adjust the brilliance of 1) Replace associated circuit board if
displayed range rings on the unsuccessful.
BRILL menu to see if
intensity is increased
Poor discrimination in Sea clutter control not Improper setting of A/C SEA. If A/C SEA
range functioning properly is seen only at very close range,
suspect inaccurate frequency of
reference oscillator.
True motion presentation 1) Poor contact of MODE 1) Try to press MODE key a little
not working correctly key (full keyboard) harder.
2) Selection not accessed. 2) Press MODE key or operate
PRESENTATION MODE box until TM
appears.
3) Speed entry incorrect 3) Enter correct own ship speed
referring to section 1.13.
4) TM display inaccurate 4) Make sure that speed and compass
inputs are accurate.
Target not tracked Poor definition of targets in Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN controls
correctly sea clutter referring to section 1.17 and 1.18.
Buttons on trackball Trackball module Replace trackball module.
module operated but no
response
6-9
6.8 Diagnostics
A diagnostic test program is provided to test major circuit boards in the control
unit, processor unit and card I/F unit. Note that the normal radar picture is lost
during this test.
Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic test:

2. Select 9 [CUSTOMIZETEST].
[CUSTOMIZETEST]
1 BACK
2 [DATA BOX]
3 [F1]
4 [F2]
5 [F3]
6 [F4]
7 [OPERATION]
8 [TEST]
CUSTOMIZETEST menu
3. Select 8 [TEST].
[TEST]
1 BACK
2 [SELF TEST]
3 [TT TEST]
TEST menu
4. Select 2 [SELF TEST] .
[SELF TEST]
1 BACK
2 START
SELF TEST menu

5. Select 2 START to start the test.
In a few moments the results of the test are displayed and the buzzer
sounds continuously. The ROMs and RAMs of the SPU, RFC, KEYBOARD
(Control Unit), REMOTE (Trackball-only Control Unit) and CARD I/F UNIT
are checked for proper operation. OK appears for normal operation. If NG
(No Good) appears, corresponding components may be defective. Consult
your dealer. In the middle of the display the rpm of the antenna unit and
various voltages are displayed.
6-10
<SELF TEST>
PROGRAM No. ROM RAM DIP SW
SPU 0359204-03.** OK OK 0000
RFC 0359202-01.** OK OK
KEY 0359203-01.** OK OK
REMOTE1 0359203-01.** OK OK
REMOTE2
# CARD 0359209-01.** OK OK 0000
PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR

-12V -11.6
3.3V 3.3
5V 4.9
12V 11.6
SCANNER MOTOR 20.7
RF UNIT MONITOR
TEMPERATURE 27.3
TUNE IND 1.4
HV 527.9
R. MONITOR 1.6
MAG. CURRENT 1.5
HEATER 1.8
12V 11.9
-12V -11.8
5V 4.8
32V 31.8
TUNE OUT 19.2
TRIGGER FREQ 2273
ANT SPEED 21.6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
*.**: Program Version No.

#: Installed card units are shown.
Self test results, keyboard test

6. The small squares and circles displayed at the bottom of screen are for
testing the control and keys on the control unit. As you operate controls and
keys, corresponding squares are highlighted, indicating that your control/key
operations are properly recognized. Numerals indicate the position of the
controls under check.
6-11
7. Press the [F1] key to change the display. The buzzer stops and the screen
shows the sentences being input from external equipment (GPS1,
GPS2SPEED, HEADING and NAV DATA). Below is an example. The
sentences shown depend on your system settings.
<GPS1>
GGA
GLL
RMC
RMB
VTG
ZDA
DTM
BWR
BWC
<GPS2>
GGA
GLL
RMC
RMB
VTG
ZDA
DTM
BWR
BWC
<SPEED>
VBW
VHW
VDR
<HEADING>
HDT
<NAV DATA>
WPL
RTE
MWV
VWT
VWR
DPT
DBT
DBS
MTW
VDM
Sentence input display
6-12
8. Press the [F1] key again to show the data sentences input from AIS and INS.
<AIS>
VDO
VDM
<INS>
ZDA
GGA
GLL
OSD
DPT
MWV
DTM
FUGLL
PAESP
PAESC
PAESF
PLSPL
PLSPS
PAESW
PAESN
9. To terminate the test, press the [F1] key.
6-13
6-14
APPENDIX
1. Menu Tree
Main menu (accessed by MENU key or MENU box)
MENU key
or 1 ECHO 1 BACK
MENU box 2 2ND ECHO REJ (OFF, ON) 1 BACK
3 TUNE INITIALIZE 2 (PICTURE 1 (OFF, ON),
4 PM (OFF, ON) PICTURE 2 (OFF, ON),
5 SART (OFF, ON) PICTURE 3 (OFF, ON),
6 WIPER (OFF, 1, 2) PICTURE 4 (OFF, ON),
1
7 ECHO AREA (CIRCLE, WIDE, ALL)* NEAR (OFF, ON),
8 [PICTURE SELECT] FAR (OFF, ON),
9 STC RANGE (-10 to +10, 00) NEAR BUOY (OFF, ON),
2 MARK 1 BACK FAR BUOY (OFF, ON),
2 OWN SHIP MARK (OFF, MIN, SCALED) ROUGH SEA (OFF, ON),
3 STERN MARK (OFF, ON) SHIP (OFF, ON),
4 [PI LINE] 1 BACK HARBOR (OFF, ON),
2 PI LINE BEARING ( REL, TRUE)*
2 COAST (OFF, ON))
3
3 PI LINE (1, 2, 3,6* )
4
4 PI LINE MODE (PARALLEL , PERPENDIC.)*
5 RESET PI LINE (NO, YES)
5 ANCHOR WATCH (OFF, ON, 0.00NM)
6 DROP MARK (OFF, ON)
5
7 [INS MARK]* 1 BACK
2 USER CHART (OFF, ON)
3 CURVED EBL (OFF, ON)
4 CHART SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
5 NOTE BOOK (OFF, ON, DISPLAY)
6 ROUTE (OFF, CENT, ALL)
7 PREDICTOR (OFF, ON)
8 EBL OFFSET BASE (STAB GND , STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)
6
9 [EBL, VRM, CURSOR SET]* 1 BACK
2 EBL1 (REL, TRUE)
3 EBL2 (REL, TRUE)
1 BACK
4 VRM1 (NM, SM, km, kyd)
2 CURSOR (OFF, ON)
5 VRM2 (NM, SM, km, kyd) 3 FRONT HALF LENGTH
6 CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE) 4 REAR HALF LENGTH
7 CURSOR RANGE (NM, SM, km, kyd) 5 NET WIDTH
0 RING (OFF, ON) 1
6 ROTATE STEP
8 [CURSOR SHAPE]*
3 ALARM 1 BACK (360, 32 POINTS)
2 TARGET ALARM MODE (IN, OUT)
3 TARGET ALARM LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4)
4 WATCH ALARM (OFF, 6M, 10M, 12M, 15M, 20M)
5 ALARM SOUND LEVEL (OFF, LOW, MID, HIGH)
6 [ALARM OUT1] 1 BACK
7 [ALARM OUT2] 2 (TARGET ALARM, WATCH ALARM,
8 [ALARM OUT3] TT NEW TARGET, TT LOST TARGET,
9 [ALARM OUT4] TT CPA LIMIT, TT AUTO ACQ TGT FULL,
0 [PRIMARY ALARM] TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL, TT SYSTEM ERROR,
1 BACK AIS NEW TARGET, AIS LOST TARGET,
2 (TARGET ALARM, WATCH ALARM, TT NEW AIS CPA LIMIT, AIS TGT FULL, AZIMUTH, HEAD
TARGET, TT LOST TARGET, TT AUTO ACQ TGT LINE, TRIGGER, VIDEO, GYRO, LOG,
FULL, TT MAN ACQ TGT FULL, AIS NEW EPFS, XTE, ARRIVAL WPT, DEPTH,
TARGET, AIS LOST TARGET, AIS TGT FULL ALARM ACK OUT, OPERATOR FITNESS,
XTE, ARRIVAL WPT, DEPTH ANCHOR WATCH, ANCHOR WATCH, NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS)
NO CPA/TCPA FOR AIS) 9 ALARM OUT POLARITY (NORMAL , INVERT)

1
* Not available on IMO or A type.
2
* W type shows PI LINE1. Same choices as "PI LINE".
3
* W type shows PI LINE2. Same choices as "PI LINE".
4
* Appears when 3 PI LINE is set for other than "1".
Not shown on IMO or A type.
5
* When INS MARK is OFF, BARGE MARK menu appears.
7 [BARGE MARK] 1 BACK
2 BARGE MARK (OFF, ON)
3 BARGE SIZE (LENGTH and WIDTH)
4 ARRANGEMENT
6
* IMO and A types show 9 EBL CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE).
AP-1
APPENDIX
(Continued from previous page)
4 TTAIS 1 BACK
2 AZ STAB (STAB HDG , STAB NORTH)
3 AZ POLYGON (OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)
4 [TRIAL MANEUVER] 1 BACK
2 TRIAL (OFF, STATIC, DYNAMIC)
3 TRIAL SPEED RATE ( 0-99 kn, 0.00-99.99 kn/s, two sets)
4 TRIAL TURN RATE ( 0-99 kn,0.00-99.99 kn/s, two sets)
5 TRIAL TGT DATA ( ACTUAL , TRIAL)
5 [TTAIS SYMBOL] 1 BACK
2 TTAIS SYMBOL COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT)
3 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT (000.0, MIN)
4 TT PAST POSN POINTS (5,10)
5 AIS PAST POSN POINTS (5,10)
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
6 [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] 1 BACK
2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON)
4 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)
5 MIN SHIP LENGTH (OFF, ON)
7 [AIS DISP FILTER] 1 BACK
8 [AIS LOST FILTER] 1 BACK
9 [TT LOST FILTER] 1 BACK
0 [ASSOCIATION] 1 BACK
2 ASSOCIATION TARGET (OFF, AIS, TT)
3 GAP (0.000-0.999(nm))
4 RANGE (0.000-0.999(nm))
5 BEARING (00.0-99.9)
6 SPEED (0.0-9.9(kn))
7 COURSE (00.0-99.9)
5 PLOTTER 1 BACK
2 CHART COLOR (GRN, YEL, CYA, ORANGE, GRAY)*
3 OWN TRACK INTERVAL (OFF, DRAW, 10S, 30S, 1M, 2M, 3M, 6M, 15M)
4 OWN TRACK COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)
5 TGT TRACK INTERVAL (OFF, DRAW, 10S, 30S, 1M, 2M, 3M, 6M, 15M)*
6 TGT TRACK COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)*
7 CURSOR L/L ALIGN (OFF, ON)
8 [DATA ERASE] 1 BACK
2 OWN TRACK (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG,
WHT, 30%, 50%, 80%, ALL)
3 TARGET TRACK (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG,
(Continued on next page) WHT, 30%, 50%, 80%, ALL)**
4 MARK ALL ERASE (NO, YES)
5 WPT ALL ERASE (NO, YES)
6 NAV LINE ALL ERASE (NO, YES)
* Not available on IMO type radar 7 OWN TRACK DELETE (2POINTS, AREA )**
** Not available on IMO or A type radar 8 TARGET TRACK DELETE (2POINTS, AREA )**
AP-2
APPENDIX
9 [DISPLAY] 1 BACK
2 GRID (OFF, L/L , GYOKU)
3 OWN TRACK (OFF, ON)
4 TARGET TRACK (OFF, ON)*
5 MARK (OFF, ON)
6 LAND DENSITY (OFF, ON)*
7 PLACE NAME (OFF, ON)*
8 COAST LINE (OFF, ON)
9 CONTOUR LINE (OFF, ON, DEPTH)
0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 NAV LINE(MAP) (OFF, ON)
3 DANGER HIGHLIGHT (OFF, ON)
4 PROHIBITED AREA (OFF, ON)
5 BUOY (OFF, ON)
0 AUTO TARGET TRACK (OFF, ON)*
6 CARD 1 BACK
2 DRIVE SELECT
3 READ CARD
4 WR MARK
5 WR NAV LINE WPT
6 WR OWN TRACK
7 WR TARGET TRACK*
8 WR SETTING DATA
9 WR INSTALL DATA
0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 FILE DELETE
3 CARD INITIALIZE
7 NAV DATA 1 BACK
2 DEPTH (OFF, m, ft)
3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500)
4 DEPTH MARK (000 - 500)
5 CURRENT (OFF, ON)
6 WIND (OFF, m/s, KN)
7 TEMP (OFF, ON)
8 DATE-TIME (OFF, UTC, LOCAL)
9 LOCAL TIME ADJ (00:00 - +13:30)
0 WPT DATA (OFF, REL, TRUE)
8 NAV LINE WPT 1 BACK

2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE (OFF, EXT DATA, INTERNAL DATA, WPT*)
3 NAV LINE SELECT (Enter nav line no., FORWARD, REVERSE)
4 SKIP NEXT WPT
5 NAV LINE WIDTH (0.00 - 9.99 (NM))
6 [WPT SET] 1 BACK
2 WPT NO. SELECT
3 WPT NAME
4 WPT L/L
5 CLEAR DATA (NO, YES)
AP-3
APPENDIX
7 [WPT LIST]
8 [NAV LINE SET] 1 BACK
3 NAV LINE NAME
4 NAV LINE ENTRY
5 CLEAR DATA
9 [NAV LINE LIST]
0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 ARRIVAL WPT ALARM (OFF, ON(0.00-9.99 nm))
3 TURNING LINE (OFF, ON, REVISED)
4 DISP WPT NO. (OFF, ON)
5 DISP WPT NAME (OFF, ON)
9 CUSTOMIZE 1 BACK
TEST 2 [DATA BOX] 1 BACK
3 NAV DATA (OFF, ON)
4 ZOOM (OFF, 2TIMES, 3TIMES)
5 ZOOM DISPLAY (STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, TT TRACK)
6 TARGET DATA (1BOX, 2BOX, 3BOX, LARGE)
3 [F1] 1 BACK
4 [F2] 2 [ECHO] 1 BACK
5 [F3] 2 (PICTURE, IR, ES, EAV, NOISE
6 [F4] REJ, ANT SELECT, PULSE LENGTH,
A/C SEA SELECT, AUTO RAIN
Default settings:
SELECT, TUNE SELECT, ANT
F1: IR
HEIGHT, SEA CONDITION, 2ND
F2: ES
ECHO REJ, PM, SART, WIPER)
F3: AUTO RAIN SELECT
F4: HL OFF 3 [STD KEY] 1 BACK
2 (ALARM ACK, STBY TX, HL
OFF, EBL OFFSET, MODE, OFF
CENTER, CU TM RESET, PI
LINE, VECTOR TIME, VECTOR
MODE, TARGET LIST, TRAIL,
BRILL, MARK, MENU, RANGE
UP, RANGE DOWN, ACQ,
TARGET DATA, TARGET CANCEL)
4 [TT AIS] 1 BACK
2 (DISP TT, DISP AIS, TARGET
DATA & ACQ, PAST POSN
INTERVAL, REF MARK, CPA LIMIT,
CPA, TCPA, AZ1, AZ2, TARGET LIST
SORT, TRIAL MANEUVER, ASSOCIATION,
AIS MESSAGE, TRIAL MODE CHANGE,
AIS SCALED SYMBOL)
5 [OPERATION] 1 BACK
2 (ECHO COLOR, PALLETTE,
RING, ALARM1, ALARM2, WATCH
ALARM RESET, ZOOM, MARK
(Continued on next page) DELETE, OWN TRACK DELETE,
TGT TRACK DELETE*, CHART ALIGN,
DISPLAY SELECT, MOB, USER DEFAULT
TLL, ANCHOR WATCH, COLOR SHIFT,
ICON DISP, OWN TRK ALL ERASE,
* B, C and W types
TGT TRK ALL ERASE, MARK ALL ERASE,
DROP MARK)
AP-4
APPENDIX
6 [PICTURE] 1 BACK
2 (PICTURE1, PICTURE 2, PICTURE 3, PICTURE 4,
NEAR, FAR, NEAR BUOY, FAR BUOY, ROUGH SEA, SHIP,
HARBOR, COAST)
7 [OPERATION] 1 BACK
2 WHEEL DRIVE (NORMAL , REVERSE)
3 KEY BEEP (OFF, LO, MID, HI)
4 REMOTE KEY (F*-KEY, DISPLAY SELECT)
1
5 POPUP GUIDANCE (OFF, ON)*
6 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE)
7 STERN-UP (OFF, ON)
8 SHUTTLE FERRY (OFF, MODE1, MODE2)
0 NEXT 1 BACK
2 USER DEFAULT BACKUP
(F-KEY, HOLD, STORE)
3 VRM TTG
(OFF/ 1/ 2/ 1+2)
8 [TEST] 1 BACK
2 [SELF TEST]
3 [TT TEST]
*1 Not available on IMO or A type
AP-5
APPENDIX
Pop-up menus of on-screen boxes

[HDG MENU] [SPD MENU] [CURSOR MENU]
1 HDG SOURCE 1 SHIP SPEED 2
AD-10 /SERIAL LOG(BT)/LOG(WT)/ TARGET DATA & ACQ/
2 GC-10 SETTING GPS/MANUAL/REF TARGET CANCEL/
000.0 2 MANUAL SPEED TT TGT DATA & ACQ/
0.0kn TARGET TRACK ON*3/
HDG menu 3 SET DRIFT TARGET TRACK OFF*3/
OFF/ON REF MARK/
EBL OFFSET/
OFFCENTER/
SPEED menu ZOOM/
MARK DELETE/
OWN TRACK DELETE/
TGT TRACK DELETE*3/
CHART ALIGN
TRAIL ERASER*3,*4/
8
9 CURSOR*3,*4/
SMALL/LARGE

CURSOR menu
[OS POSN MENU] [TT TARGET MENU] [AIS TARGET MENU]
1 NAV AID 1 TT SELECT 1 SLEEP ALL TRGTS

GPS1/GPS2/ MANUAL 100/ NO/YES
DEAD RECKONING/ AUTO 25/ 2 ACTIVATE ALL TRGTS
LAN AUTO 50/ NO/YES
2 MANUAL L/L AUTO 75/ 3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE
0000.000 N AUTO 100 OFF/ON
00000.000 W 2 ALL CANCEL 4 [RECEIVED MESSAGES]
3 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT NO/YES 5 [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
OFF/ON 3 REF TARGET VECTOR 6 [VOYAGE DATA]
OFF/ON 7 [STATIC DATA]
OS POSN menu 8 [AIS ALM MESSAGES]
TT TARGET menu
AIS TARGET menu
[TRANSMIT MESSAGE] [VOYAGE DATA] [STATIC DATA]

1 BACK
1 BACK 1 BACK
TYPE OF SHIP
2 ADDRESS TYPE 2 NAVIGATION STATUS 000
ADDRESSED/BROADCAST 00 ALL SHIPS OF
3 MESSAGE TYPE 3 ETA THIS TYPE
SAFETY/BINARY 00/000/0000 00:00 CALL SIGN
4 MMSI NO. 000000000 4 DESTINATION
5 CHANNEL NAME
A/B/A or B/A and B 5 DRAUGHT
6 OPEN FILE 1 00.0m EXT GPS ANT POSN
7 SAVE FILE 1 6 CREW A: 000m B: 000m
8 EDIT 0002 C: 00m D: 00m
9 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
VOYAGE DATA menu STATIC DATA menu
TRANSMIT MESSAGE menu
[TARGET LIST MENU] [TRAIL MENU] [TRAIL COLOR]
1 SORT BY 1 TRAIL MODE 1 BACK

CPA /TCPA/BCR/BCT/ REL /TRUE 2 COLOR SHIFT
RANGE/SPEED 2 TRAIL GRAD NO/YES
SINGLE /MULTI 3 TRAIL COLOR
3 NARROW TRAIL *3, *4 1: FUCHSIA
TGT LIST menu OFF/1/2 2: MAROON
4 TRAIL LEVEL 3: RED
*1 Shown when 12H, 24H or 48H is 1/2/3/4 4: PURPLE
chosen at 8 TRAIL LENGTH. 5 TRAIL RESTART 5: YELLOW
OFF/ON 6: LIME
*2 B and W types. 48H not 6 TRAIL COPY 7: GREEN
available on W type. OFF/ON 8: OLIVE
3
* Not available on IMO type 7 OS TRAIL 9: TEAL
4 OFF/1/2 10: CYAN
* Not available on A type 8 TRAIL LENGTH* 2
5 11: BLUE
* Not available on W type NORMAL /12/24H/48H 12: NAVY
9 TRAIL HIDE*1,*3,*4/
START: 00:00 TRAIL COLOR menu
END: 00:00
TRAIL menu 0 [TRAIL COLOR]*3,*4, *5
AP-6
APPENDIX
[BRILL1 MENU (1/2)] [BRILL1 MENU (2/2)]
1 ECHO COLOR 1 BACK

YEL/GRN/ 2 BEARING CURSOR
WHT/COLOR* 3 EBL
2 PALETTE 4 VRM
DAY-GRY/DAY-BLU/ 5 PI LINE
DUSK-GRY/DUSK BLU/ 6 TT SYMBOL
NIGHT-GRY/NIGHT-BLU 7 AIS SYMBOL
3 PANEL DIMMER 8 L/L GRID
4 CHARACTER 9 MARK
5 CURSOR 0 CHART*
6 ECHO
7 TRAIL BRILL menu, page 2
8 HL
9 RING
0 NEXT
BRILL menu, page 1
[PICTURE MENU] [PULSE MENU]
1 INT REJECT 1 BACK

OFF/1/2/3 2 0.5NM
2 ECHO STRETCH S1/S2
OFF/1/2/3 3 0.75NM
3 ECHO AVERAGE S1/S2/M1
OFF/1/2/3 4 1.5NM
4 NOISE REJ S1/S2/M1
OFF/ON 5 3NM
5 AUTO STC S2/M1/M2/M3
OFF/ON 6 6NM
6 AUTO RAIN M1/M2/M3/L
OFF/1/2/3/4 7 12-24NM
7 VIDEO CONTRAST M2/M3/L
1/2/3/4 A/B/C
8 [PULSE] PULSE menu
9 [CONDITION]
0 DEFAULT
NO/SAVE/FACTORY/
DEFAULT
PICTURE menu
[CONDITION MENU]
[ANT SELECT] [MARK MENU]
1 BACK
ANT NO 1: X-BAND 1 ORIGIN MARK STAB 2 SEA CONDITION
12 MAIN TOP GND/SEA 1/2/3/4/5
ANT NO 2: X-BAND 2 MARK KIND 3 ANT HEIGHT
12 MAIN TOP ORIGIN MARK(No. )/ 5/7.5/10/15/20/
ANT NO 3: ORIGIN MARK(SYM)/ 25/30/25/30/35/40/45/
MAP MARK / more 50 m
ANT NO 4: WP 1~50/ 4 LOW LEVEL ECHO
WP 51~ 100/ 0
OWN RADAR NO: 2 WP 101~150/
1 DISP ANT1
WP 151~ 198/ CONDITION menu
MASTER
OWN SHIP SHAPE
2 DISP ANT2
MASTER 8 MARK POSN
8 STORE INTER-SW CURSOR/OS/L/L
OFF/ON 00000.00 N
9 SUB MONITOR* 000000.00 E
OFF/ON 9 MAP DISPLAY
OFF/ON
ANTENNA SELECT menu 0 MAP MARK COLOR*
RED/GRN/BLU/YEL/
CYA/MAG/WHT * Not available on IMO or A type
MARK menu
AP-7
APPENDIX
2. Digital Interface
Input sentences (RP Board, J4)
ABK, ACK, BWC*, BWR*, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLC, GLL, GNS, HDT, MTW, MWV,
RMA, RMB, RMC, RTE, THS, TTD, VBW, VDR, VHW, VTG, VWR, VWT, WPL, ZDA,
!AIVDM, !AIVDO, $AIALR
Output sentences
ABM, ALR, BBM, OSD, TLB, TLL*, TTD, TTM, RSD, VSD
*: Not available on IMO radar
Data reception
Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in
IEC 61162-2.
The following parameters are used:

Baud rate: 38,400 bps: HDT, !AIVDM, !AIVDO and $AIALR. All other sentences: 4800 bps
Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Start Stop
bit Data bits bit
Validity and integrity of input data (mode indicator)

Data HDG Latitude and Longitude SPD COG/SOG WP
indication
GREEN color GNS-A,D*
(normal data) GGA-1 2,3,4,5* BWC-A,D
THS-A GLL-A,D and (status: A)* VBW-A BWR-A,D
HDT RMC- A,D and (status: A)* VHW VTG-A,D RMB-A,D and status A
RED color GNS-E,M,S,N
(invalid data) GGA-0,6,7,8
GLL-E,M,S,N or (status:V)
RMC-E,M,S,N or (status:V) VBW-V VTG-E,M,S,N
BWC-E,M,S,N
BWR-E,M,S,N
***.* THS-E,M,S,N RMB-E,M,S,N or (status:V)
* Low or doubtful integrity can occur when the GBS sentence gives RAIM error rate of 10 m
or higher and "Age of differential GPS data" in GGA and GNS sentences is 10 seconds or
higher. In this case the ship's latitude and longitude indications are shown in yellow.
AP-8
APPENDIX
Data sentences
Data used is shown in bold italics.
Input sentences
ABK - UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement
$--ABK,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,x,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--- 6
| | | | +----- 5
| | | +------- 4
| | +---------- 3
| +------------- 2
+------------------- 1
1. MMSI of the addressed AIS unit

2. AIS channel of reception
3. Message type
4. Message sequence number
5. Type of acknowledgement
ACK Acknowledge alarm

$--ACK,x.x,x.*hh<CR><LF>
| +------------ 2
+------------------- 1
1. Local alarm number (identifier)

2. Checksum
BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint (Not available on IMO radar)

$--BWC, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c--c, a*hh<CR><LF>
Checksum
Mode indicator
(see note 1)
Waypoint ID
Distance, nautical miles
Bearing, degrees magnetic
Bearing, degrees true
Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S
UTC of observation
NOTE 1: Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
AP-9
APPENDIX
BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line (Not available on IMO radar)
$--BWR,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,c--c,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 9
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------ 8
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | | | | | +--+------------- 6
| | | | | | | +--+------------------- 5
| | | | | +--+------------------------- 4
| | | +-----+------------------------------- 3
| +-----+------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of observation
2. Waypoint latitude, N/S
3. Waypoint longitude, E/W
4. Bearing, degrees true
5. Bearing, degrees magnetic
6. Distance, nautical miles
7. Waypoint ID
8. Mode indicator (see note)
9. Checksum
NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
AP-10
APPENDIX
DTM - Datum reference
$--DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | | | +------ 6
| | | | | | +---------- 5
| | | | +--+------------- 4
| | +---+------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+---------------------------- 1
1. Local datum W84 - WGS84

W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
999 - User defined
IHO datum code
2. Local datum subdivision code
3. Lat offset, min, N/S
4. Lon offset, min, E/W
5. Altitude offset, m
6. Reference datum W84 - WGS84
W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
7. Checksum
DBS - Depth below surface
$--DBS,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+---------------------- 1
1. Water depth, feet

2. Water depth, m
3. Water depth, fathoms
4. Checksum
DBT - Depth below transducer
$--DBT,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+---------------------- 1
1. Water depth, feet

2. Water depth, m
3. Water depth, fathoms
4. Checksum
AP-11
APPENDIX
DPT - Depth
$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | |
| | | +----- 4
| | +--------- 3
| +------------ 2
+---------------- 1
1. Water depth relative to trancsducer, in meters

2. Offset from transeducer, in meters (see notes 1 and 2)
3. Maximum range scale in use
4. Checksum
NOTE1 "positive"=distance from transeduser to water-line.

"-"=distance from transducer to keel.
NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied
so as to provide depth relative to the keel.
GGA - Global positioning system fix data

$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8
| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------- 4
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. GPS quality indicator (see note)
5. Number of satllite in use,00-12, may be different from the number in view
6. Horizontal dilution of precision
7. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel, m
8. Geoidal separation, m
9. Age of differential GPS data
10. Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023
11. Checksum
NOTE
0 = fix not available or invalid
1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid
2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid
3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid (GPS_PPS)
4 = Real Time Kinetic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers (GPS_RTK_I)
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating fingers (GPS_RTK_F)
6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulator mode
The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field.
Position data shown in green in case of 1 and 5; red in case of "0" and "6-8".
AP-12
APPENDIX
GLC - Geographic position, Loran C

$--GLC,xxxx,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 8
| | | | | | | | | | | +--+----- 7
| | | | | | | | | +-- +----------- 6
| | | | | | | +--+----------------- 5
| | | | | +--+----------------------- 4
| | | +--+----------------------------- 3
| +--+----------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------ 1
1. GRI, in tens of microseconds

2. Master TOA microseconds, Signal status
3. TD1 microseconds, Signal status
8. CHecksum
Signalstatus A = Valid
S = SNR warning
C = cycle warning
B = blink warning
GLL - Geographic position, latitude/longitude

$--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | +----------- 4
| | | | +---------------- 3
| | +------+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------------- 1
1. Latitude, N/S
2. Longitude, E/W
3. UTC of position
4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
6. Checksum

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be
set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and
D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not
be null fields.
Position data shown in green in case of A=data valid and A and D; red in
case of V=data invalid, E, M, S and N.
AP-13
APPENDIX
GNS - GNSS fix data

$--GNS,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,xx,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +------ 10
| | | | | | | | | | +---------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +---------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------ 4
| | | +-------+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. Mode indicator
5. Total number of satllite in use,00-99
6. HDOP
7. Antenna altitude, metres, re:mean-sea-level(geoid)
8. Geoidal separation
9. Age of differential data
10. Differential reference station ID
11. Checksum
HDT - Heading, true

$--HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+----+----------- 1
1. Heading, degrees true

2. Checksum
MTW - Water temperature

$--MTW,x.x,C*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+--+----------- 1
1. Temperature, degrees C
2. Checksum
AP-14
APPENDIX
MWV - Wind speed and angle

$--MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 6
| | | | +----------- 5
| | | +------------- 4
| | +---------------- 3
| +------------------- 2
+---------------------- 1
1. Wind angle, 0 to 359 (degrees)

2. Reference, R=relative, T=true
3. Wind speed
4. Wind speed units, KN/M/N
5. Status, A=data valid, V=data invalid
6. Checksum
Data is used in case of A=data valid.

Data is not used in case of V=data invalid.
AP-15
APPENDIX
RMA - Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data

$--RMA,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +---+----------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +---------------------- 6
| | | | | | +-------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------ 4
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+-------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Status: A=data valid, V=blink, cycle or SNR warning

2. Latitude, degrees N/S
3. Longitude, degrees E/W
4. Time difference A, microseconds
5. Time difference B, microseconds
6. Speed over ground, knots
7. Course over ground, degrees true
8. Magnetic variation(see note 1),degree E/W
9. Mode indicator(see note 2)
10. Checksum
NOTE 1 - Easterly variation(E) subtracts from true course

Westerly variation(W) adds to true course
NOTE 2 Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field
shall be set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for
A=Autonomous and D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator
and Status field shall not be null fields.
AP-16
APPENDIX
RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information

$--RMB,A,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,x.x,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 12
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +---------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 9
| | | | | | | | | +------------------ 8
| | | | | | | +-----+--------------------- 7
| | | | | +----+--------------------------------- 6
| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 5
| | | +-------------------------------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------------------------------ 3
| +--------------------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------ 1
1. Data status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning

2. Cross track error (see note 2) n.miles
3. Direction to steer L/R
4. Origin waypoint ID
5. Destination waypoint ID
6. Destination waypoint latitude,N/S
7. Destination waypoint longitude,E/W
8. Range to destination, n.miles (see note 1)
9. Bearing to destination, degrees true
10. Destination closing velocity, knots
11. Arrival status: A=arrival circle entered or perpendicular passed
12. Mode indicator (see note 3)
13. Checksum
NOTES
1 If range to destination exceeds 999.9 nautical miles, display 999.9.
2 If cross track error exceeds 9.99 nautical miles, display 9.99.
3 Positioning system Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
Data is used in case of A=data valid and A and D. Data is not used in
AP-17
APPENDIX
RMC - Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data

$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x.x,x.x,xxxxxx,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | +----- 9
| | | | | | | | | +--+------- 8
| | | | | | | | +--------------- 7
| | | | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | | | +------------------------- 5
| | | | +---+---------------------------- 4
| | +---+---------------------------------------- 3
| +--------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. UTC of position fix

2. Status: A=data valid, V=navigation receiver warning
3. Latitude, N/S
4. Longitude, E/W
7. Date: dd/mm/yy
8. Magnetic variation, degrees E/W
9. Mode indicator(see note)
10. Checksum

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
Data is used in case of A=data valid and A and D. Data is not used in
AP-18
APPENDIX
RTE - Route
$--RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,.....,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +------------ 6
| | | | +---------------------- 5
| | | +--------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------- 3
| +---------------------------------- 2
+-------------------------------------- 1
1. Total number of messages being transmitted

2. Message number
3. Message mode:
c=complete route, all waypoints
w=working route, first listed waypoint is "FROM",
second is "TO" and remaining reset of route
4. Route identifier
5. Waypoint identifier
6. Waypoint "n" identifier
7. Checksum
THS - True heading and status

$--THS,xxx.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | ---------------- 3
| | ---------------- 2
+----------- 1

2. Status
A: Autonomous
E: Estimated (dead reckoning)
M: Manual input
S: Simulator mode
V: Data not valid
3. Checksum
AP-19
APPENDIX
VBW - Dual ground/water speed

$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | +----- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------- 9
| | | | | | | +----------- 8
| | | | | | +-------------- 7
| | | | | +----------------- 6
| | | | +-------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------- 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------ 2
+---------------------------------- 1
1. Longitudinal water speed, knots

2. Transverse water speed, knots
3. Status: water speed, A=data valid* V=data invalid**
4. Longitudinal ground speed, knots
5. Transverse ground speed, knots
6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid* V=data invalid**
7. Stern transverse water speed, knots
8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots
10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
11. Checksum
*= Data shown in green

**= Data shown in red
VHW - Water speed and heading

$--VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +---+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------- 1

2. Heading, degrees magnetic
3. Speed, knots
4. Speed, km/h
5. Checksum
VDR - Set and drift

$--VDR,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+----------------------- 1
1. Direction, degrees true

2. Direction, degrees magnetic
3. Current speed, knots
4. Checksum
AP-20
APPENDIX
VSD - UAIS Voyage static data

$--VSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,c--c,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--- 10
| | | | | | | | +------ 9
| | | | | | | +---------- 8
| | | | | | +------------- 7
| | | | | +---------------- 6
| | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------------ 4
| | +----------------------------------- 3
| +--------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------- 1
1. Type of ship and cargo category, 0 to 255

2. Maximum present static draught, 0 to 25.5 Meters
3. Persons on-board, 0 to 8191
4. Destination, 1-20 characters
5. Estimated UTC of arrival at destination
6. Estimated day of arrival at destination, 00 to 31(UTC)
7. Estimated month of arrival at destination, 00 to 12(UTC)
8. Navigational status, 0 to 15
9. Regional application flags, 0 to 15
10. Checksum
VTG - Course over ground and ground speed

$--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +--+----------------------- 2
+--+----------------------------- 1

2. Course over ground, degrees magnetic
4. Speed over ground, km/h
6. Checksum

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.
Data shown in green in case of A and D; red in case of E, M, S
and N.
AP-21
APPENDIX
VWR - Relative (Apparent) wind speed and angle
$--VWR,x.x,a,x.x,N,x.x,M,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | | | +---+------------------------- 4
| | | +---+---------------------------------- 3
| +--+---------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------ 1
1. Measured wind angle relative to the vessel, 0 to 180, left/right L/R of vessel heading
2. Measured wind speed, knots
3. Wind speed, meters/second
4. Wind speed, Km/Hr
5. Checksum
VWT - True wind speed and angle
$--VWT,x.x,a,x.x,N,x.x,M,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | | | +---+------------------------- 4
| | | +---+---------------------------------- 3
| +--+---------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------ 1
1. Calculated wind angle relative to the vessel, 0 to 180, left/right L/R of vessel heading
2. Calculated wind speed, knots
3. Wind speed, meters/second
4. Wind speed, Km/Hr
5. Checksum
WPL - Waypoint location

$--WPL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +------------ 3
| | +-----+---------------- 2
+-----+---------------------------- 1
1. Waypoint latitude, N/S

2. Waypoint longitude, E/W
3. Waypoint identifier
4. Checksum
AP-22
APPENDIX
ZDA - Time and date
$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +----------- 6
| | | | +-------------- 5
| | | +------------------ 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1
1. UTC
2. Day, 01 to 31 (UTC)
3. Month, 01 to 12 (UTC)
4. Year (UTC)
5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h
6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
as local hours
7. Checksum
$AIALR - Set alarm state

$AIALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +----------------- 6
| | | | +----------------- 5
| | | +-------------------- 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1
1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC

2. Local alarm number (identifier)
3. Alarm condition (A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)
4. Alarms acknowledge state, A=acknowledged V=unacknowledged
5. Alarms description text
6. Checksum
!AIVDM - VHF data-link message

!AIVDM,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| || | | | |
| | | | | | +----- 7
| | | | | +----- 6
| | | | +-------- 5
| | | +------------ 4
| | +-------------- 3
| +---------------- 2
+------------------ 1
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9

2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3. Sequential message identifier, 0 to 9
4. AIS channel Number
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message*
6. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
7. Checksum
*= Message no. 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 12, 14, 18, 19 are used.
AP-23
APPENDIX
!AIVDO - UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report
!AIVDO,x,x,x,a,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | || | | |
| | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | +----- 6
| | | | +-------- 5
| | | +------------ 4
| | +-------------- 3
| +---------------- 2
+------------------ 1

4. AIS channel Number
5. Encapsulated ITU-R M.1371 radio message*
7. Checksum
*= Data are MMSI no., navigation status, ETA, destination, draught,

type of ship, call sign, ship's name and GPS antenna position.
Output sentences
ABM- UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message
!--ABM,x,x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x,xx,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--- 9
| | | | | | | +----- 8
| | | | | | +-------- 7
| | | | | +------------ 6
| | | | +--------------- 5
| | | +--------------------- 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------- 2
+------------------------------- 1
3. Message sequence identifier, 0 to 3
4. The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message 6 or 12
5. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
6. VDL message number(6 or 12), see ITU-R M.1371
7. Encapsulated data
9. Checksum
AP-24
APPENDIX
ALR- Set alarm state

$--ALR,hhmmss.ss,xxx,A,A,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +------------- 6
| | | | +----------------- 5
| | | +-------------------- 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1
1. Time of alarm condition change, UTC

2. Local alarm number(identifier)
3. Alarm condition(A=threshold exceeded, V=not exceeded)
4. Alarms acknowledge state, A=acknowledged V=unacknowledged
5. Alarms description text
6. Checksum
BBM- UAIS Broadcast binary message

!--BBM,x,x,x,x,xx,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| || | | | | |
| | | | | | | +--- 8
| | | | | | +------ 7
| | | | | +--------- 6
| | | | +------------- 5
| | | +---------------- 4
| | +------------------ 3
| +-------------------- 2
+---------------------- 1

3. Sequential Message identifier, 0 to 9
4. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
5. VDL message number(8,14,19 or 21), see ITU-R M.1371
6. Binary data
8. Checksum
AP-25
APPENDIX
OSD- Own ship data

$--OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--------- 10
| | | | | | | | +----------- 9
| | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | +------------------------ 5
| | | +--------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------ 3
| +--------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------ 1

2. Heading status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
3. Vessel course, degrees true
4. Course reference, B/M/W/R/P (see note)
5. Vessel soeed
6. Speed refereence, B/M/W/R/P (see note)
7. Vessel set, degrees true---Manually entered
8. Vessel drift (speed) ---Manually entered
9. Speed units, K(km/h) / N(Knots) / S(statute miles/h)
10. Checksum
NOTES - Reference systems (speed/course):

B = bottom tracking log
M = manually entered
W = water referenced
R = radar tracking (of fixed target)
P = positioning system ground reference
AP-26
APPENDIX
RSD - Radar system data

$RARSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 14
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 12
| | | | | | | | | | +------------ 11
| | | | | | | | | +---------------- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------------------- 9
| | | | | | | +------------------------ 8
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 7
| | | | | +-------------------------------- 6
| | | | +------------------------------------ 5
| | | +---------------------------------------- 4
| | +-------------------------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------------------------ 2
+---------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Origin 1 range, from own ship (see note 2)

2. Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0 (see note 2)
3. Variable range maker 1(VRM1), range
4. Bearing line 1(EBL1), degrees from 0
5. Origin 2 range (see note 2)
6. Origin 2 bearing (see note 2)
7. VRM2, range
8. EBL2, degrees
9. Cursor range, from own ship
10. Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from 0
11. Range scale in use
12. Range units, K/N/S
13. Display rotation (see note 1)
14. Checksum
NOTES
1 Display rotation:
C = course-up, course-over-ground up, degrees true
H = head-up, ships heading(center-line) 0 up
N = north-up, true north is 0 up
2 Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing
from own ship and provide for two independent sets of variable range
markers (VRM) and electronic bearing lines (EBL) originating away from
own ship position.
AP-27
APPENDIX
TLB - Target label

$--TLB,x.x,c--c,x.x,c--c,......x.x,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--- 4
| | +----+--------+----+------ 3
| +------------------------------ 2
+----------------------------------- 1
1. Target number n reported by the device

2. Label assigned to target n
3. Additional label pairs
4. Checksum
TLL - Target latitude and longitude

For non-IMO specification radar. This function outputs event mark position.
$--TLL,xx,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c,hhmmss.ss,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--------- 8
| | | | | | | | +----------- 7
| | | | | | | +------------- 6
| | | | | | +--------------------- 5
| | | | | +-------------------------- 4
| | | +-----+------------------------------ 3
| +----+------------------------------------------ 2
+----------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Target number 00 - 99
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. Target name
5. UTC of data
6. Target status (see note)
7. Reference target=R,null otherwise
8. Checksum
NOTE - Target status

L = lost, tracked target has beenlost
Q = query, target in the process of acquisition
T = tracking
AP-28
APPENDIX
TTD - Tracked target data

$--TTD,hh,hh.x,s--s,a,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | |
| | | | +----- 5
| | | +------- 4
| | +------- 3
| +----- 2
+-----1
1. Total hex number of sentences need to transfer the messages

2. Hex sentence number, 1 to FF
4. Encapsulated tracked target data
5. Number of fill bits, 0 to 5
TTM - Tracked target message
$--TTM,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 14
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 12
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------------------- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | +------------------------ 9
| | | | | | | | | +---------------------------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------------------- 7
| | | | | | | +----------------------------------- 6
| | | | | +--+-------------------------------------- 5
| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 4
| | +--+------------------------------------------------ 3
| +------------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1
1. Target number, 00 to 99
2. Target distance from own ship
3. Bearing from own ship, degrees, true/relative (T/R)
4. Target speed
5. Target course, degrees true/relative (T/R)
6. Distance of closet point of approach
7. Time to CPA, min., "-"increasing
8. Speed/distance units, K/N/S
9. User data (e.g. target name)
10. Target status (see note)
11. Reference target = R, null otherwise
12. Time of data (UTC)
13. Type of acquisition A=automatic, M=manual, R=reported
14. Checksum
NOTE - Target status:

L = lost, tracked target has been lost
Q = query, target in the process of acquisition
T = tracking
AP-29
APPENDIX
Serial interface input ports

Heading sensor
Baud rate is selectable from 4800 bps (non-IMO only) and 38.4 kbps. Complies with IEC
61162-2.
Isolated RS485 Transceiver
RD-A
LTC1535 RD-B
GND
Logical High: A-B> +0.2V

Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V
Log/navigator
Baud rate is adaptive with RX data. Complies with IEC 61162-1.
Photo Coupler
470 ohm
RD-A
PC-400
RD-B
This port is an opticoupler used to isolate I/F terminal on RD terminal.
Absolute maximum rating

Input
Forward current: 50 mA
Reverse voltage: 6 V
Output
Supply voltage: 16 V
High level output voltage: 16 V
Low level output current: 50 mA
AP-30
APPENDIX
Serial interface output ports

TT for ECDIS
Baud rate for output sentences are set on the Initial Settings menu. Complies with IEC
61162-1.
Dual differrential
drivers and receivers
TD-A
SN751178NS
TD-B
Logical High: A-B>

= +0.2V
Logical Low: A-B<= -0.2V
Serial interface input/output ports

Baud rate is fixed at 38.4 kbps. Complies with IEC 61162-2.
AIS Input port (RD-A, B)

RD-A
LTC1535 RD-B
GND

Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V
AIS Output port (TD-A, B)

TD-A
LTC1535 TD-B
GND

Logical Low: A-B> -4.0V
AP-31
APPENDIX
3. Parts Lists and Parts Location

Parts lists
Processor unit RPU-014, Control unit RCU-104/105, Display unit MU-201CR/ MU-231CR
FURUNO Model FR-21x7/28x7 Series (incl. BB series)

Unit Processor Unit RPU-013
Control Unit RCU-014
Control Unit RCU-015
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
2003/10
SYMBOL PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD/ REMARKS
ASSY. TYPE
PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-013

PTU Board 03P9339 AC spec.
03P9338 DC spec.
SPU Board 03P9337
HV Board HV9017
Terminal Board 03P9342
NET Board 03P9332
CONTROL UNIT RCU-014

PNL Board 03P9343
BUZ Board 03P9362
Trackball Assy. TA4726N
CONTROL UNIT RCU-015

PNL Board 03P9344
Trackball Assy. TA4726N
DISPLAY UNIT MU-201CR

PWR Pack RKW-12-13RE AC spec.
DC-DC Board 03P9359 DC spec.
Noise Filter CF-205A AC spec.
MXB-1206-33 DC spec.
DVI I/F Board SCBFRNB-A
INVERTER Board 201PW021-C
LCD Board 201PW023-H
LCD Unit 210NL128102AC31-02
DISPLAY UNIT MU-231CR

PCB BSM-501A
PWR Pack RKW-12-13RE AC spec.
DC-DC Board 03P9359 DC spec.
Noise Filter CF-205A AC spec.
MXB-1206-33 DC spec.
FIL Board 03P9360
INVERTER Board NA19002-4241
LCD Board NA21808
LCD Unit FLC59UXC8V-04
DVI I/F Board BSM-501A
AP-32
APPENDIX
Antenna unit RSB-096/097 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827)
FURUNO Model FAR-2117(BB)/2127(BB)/2817(BB)/2827(BB)

Unit Antenna Unit RSB-096/097

2003/10
SYMBOL NAME REMARKS
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

RF 03P9349
BP 03P9347
MD 03P9244-A FAR-2117/2817
03P9244-B FAR-2127/2827
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-096 24 rpm
RSB-097 42 rpm
RF MODULE
RTR-078 FAR-2117/2817
RTR-079 FAR-2127/2827
MIC ASSEMBLY
RU-9601 FAR-2117/2817
RU-9603 FAR-2127/2827
MOTOR
D8G-516 24 rpm, w/capacitor
D8G-571 42 rpm, w/capacitor
DIODE LIMITER
RU-9099 FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827
CIRCULATOR
RC-3686 FAR-2117/2127/2817/2827
PULSE TRANSFORMER
RT-9023 FAR-2117/2817
RT-9025 FAR-2127/2827
MAGNETRON
MG4010 or MAF1425B FAR-2117/2817
MG5436 FAR-2127/2827
AP-33
APPENDIX
Antenna unit RSB-103/104/105 (FAR-2827W)
FURUNO Model FAR-2827W


2003/10
SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

TB 03P9349
BP GEN 03P9347
MOTOR
D8G-516
Transceiver unit RTR-081 (FAR-2827W)
FURUNO Model FAR-2827W

Unit Transceiver Unit RTR-081

2007/11
SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

TB 03P9349
IF AMP 03P9335
PWR 03P9348
MD 03P9244
RFC 03P9346
MIC ASSEMBLY
RU-9601
MOTOR
109P0824H602 24 rpm
DIODE LIMITER
RU-9099
CIRCULATOR
RC-3686
PULSE TRANSFORMER
RT-9023
ISOLATOR
FX0157
MAGNETRON
MG5436
AP-34
APPENDIX
Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S-BB)/2837S)
FURUNO Model FAR-2137S(BB), FAR-2837S(BB)

RSB-100/101/102
2006/11
SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

TB 03P9349
IF AMP 03P9335
PWR 03P9348
MD 03P9244
RFC 03P9346
MSS MSS-7497 200/220V, 3
MSS MSS-7497A 380/440V, 3
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-098 21/26 rpm
RSB-099 21/26 rpm
RSB-100 45 rpm
RSB-101 45 rpm
RSB-102 45 rpm
RF MODULE
RTR-080
MIC ASSEMBLY
RU-9760A
MOTOR
RM-7398 RSB-098/099 21/26 rpm, 200/220V, 3
RM-7435 RSB-098/099 21/26 rpm, 380/440V, 3
RM-9519 RSB-100/101/102 45 rpm, 220V, 3, 50 Hz
RM-9520 RSB-100/101/102 45 rpm, 220V, 3, 60 Hz
RM-9521 RSB-100/101/102 45 rpm, 440V, 3, 60 Hz
DIODE LIMITER
RU-9426
CIRCULATOR
RC_6584S
PULSE TRANSFORMER
RT-9273
MAGNETRON
MG5223F
AP-35
APPENDIX
Power Supply Unit PSU-007 (for FAR-2137S(-BB)/2837S
FURUNO Model PSU-007

Unit Power Supply Unit

2003/10
SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

TB1
RELAY
HG3_DC12V
Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW)
FURUNO Model FAR-2837SW


2003/10
SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

TB 03P9349
BP GEN 03P9347
MSS MSS-7497 200/220V, 3
MSS-7497-A 380/440V, 3
MOTOR
RM-7398 RSB-104 21 rpm: 200 V, 3, 50 Hz
RSB-104 26 rpm: 220 V, 3, 60 Hz
RM-7345 RSB-105 21 rpm: 380 V, 3, 50 Hz
RSB-105 26 rpm: 440 V, 3, 60 Hz
AP-36
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit RTR-082 (for FAR-2837SW)
FURUNO Model FAR-2837SW

Unit Transceiver Unit RTR-082

2006/11
SYMBOL NAME REMARKS

TB 03P9349
IF AMP 03P9335
PWR 03P9348
MD 03P9244
RFC 03P9346
MIC ASSEMBLY
RU-9760A
MOTOR
109P0824H602
TR LIMITER
TL378A
CIRCULATOR
RC_6584S or RC4910S
PULSE TRANSFORMER
RT-9273
MAGNETRON
MG5223F
AP-37
APPENDIX
Parts location
Display unit MU-231CR (AC specification)
Noise Filter
(AC spec.: LF-205A
DC spec.: MXB-1206-33)
FIL Board
(03P9360)
DC-DC Board 03P9359 (AC spec.)

(For DC spec., PWR Pack
DVI I/F Board RKW-12-13RE is used.)
(BSM-501A)
Display unit MU-231CR, rear cover removed
LCD Unit
FLC59YXC8V-04
Inverter Board
(NA19002-4241)
LCD Board
(NA21808)
Display unit MU-231CR, inner shield plate removed
AP-38
APPENDIX
Display unit MU-201CR (DC specification)
Noise Filte
(AC spec.: LF-205A
DC spec.: MXB-1206-33)
DIV I/F Board PWR Module RKW-12-13RE

(SCBFNRB-A) (DC spec.)
(For AC spec, DC-DC Board
03P9359 is used.)
Display unit MU-201CR, rear cover removed
LCD Board
(201PW023-H)
Inverter Board
(210PW021-C)
LCD Unit
(NL128102AC31-02)
Display unit MU-201CR, inner shield plate removed
AP-39
APPENDIX
Trackball
BUZ Board Assy.
(03P9362) (TA4726N)
PNL Board
(03P9343)
Control unit RCU-014, rear cover removed

Trackball Assy.
(TA4726N)
PNL Board
(03P9344)
Control unit RCU-015, rear cover removed
AP-40
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit RTR-078/079 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827

Circulator
RC-3686
RFC Board RF PWR Board

(03P9346) (03P9348)
Diode Limiter
(RU-9099)
MIC Assy.
RU-9601 (FAR-2117/2817)
RU-9603 (FAR-2127/2127-5A/2827)
IF Board
(03P9355)
Transceiver unit RTR-078/079 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827), upper half
MD Board
(03P9244-A)
Pulse Transformer
(RT-9205)
Magnetron
(MG4010 or
MAF1425B)
Transceiver unit RTR-078 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827), lower half
AP-41
APPENDIX
MD Board
(03P9244-B)
Pulse Transformer
(RT-9203)
Magnetron
(MG5436)
Transceiver unit RTR-079 (for FAR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827, lower half
Antenna unit RSB-103 (for FAR-2827W)
BP Board
(03P9347)
RF Board
(03P9349)
Motor
(DG8-516)
Antenna unit RSB-103 (for FAR-2827W)
AP-42
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit RTR-081 (for FAR-2827W)

Diode Limiter
(RU-9099)
Isolator
(FX0157)
MIC Assy. RFC Board (03P9346)
(RU-9601)
Circulator
IF Amplifier
(RC-3686)
(03P9335)
PWR Board
(03P9348)
TB Board
(03P9349)
Underneath:
MD Board (03P9244)
Pulse Converter (RT-9023)
Magnetron (MG5436)
Circulator (RC-3686)
Motor (109P0824H602)
Transceiver unit RTR-081 (for FAR-2827W), cover opened
AP-43
APPENDIX
Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S(-BB)/2837S)
Behind plate
MSS-7497 Board
(200/220 V)
MSS-7497-A Board
(380/440 V)
MIC Assy. TB Board Motor

(RU-9760A) (03P9349) RM-7398
Behind plate: (RSB-098, 21/26 rpm, 200/220V, 3)
Diode Limiter RM-7435
(RU-9426) (RSB-099, 21/26 rpm, 380/440V, 3)
Circulator RM-9519
(RC-6584S (RSB-100, 45 rpm, 220V, 3, 50 Hz)
RM-9520
(RSB-101, 45 rpm, 220V, 3, 60 Hz)
RM-9521
(RSB-102, 45 rpm, 440V, 3, 60 Hz)
Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S-(BB)/2837S), cover opened
AP-44
APPENDIX
Magnetron
RFC Board (MG5223F)
(03P9346)
MD Board
(03P9244)
Pulse Transformer
(RT-9773)
Antenna unit RSB-098/099/100/101/102 (for FAR-2137S(-BB)/2837S), cover opened
AP-45
APPENDIX
Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW)
Motor*
* RM-7398 (For RSB-104, 21 rpm, 200 V, 3, 50 Hz;

For RSB-104, 26 rpm, 220 V, 3, 60 Hz)
RM-7345 (For RSB-105, 21 rpm, 380 V, 3, 50 Hz;
For RSB-105, 26 rpm, 440 V, 3, 60 Hz)
TB Board
(03P9349)
Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW), cover opened
MSS Board
MSS-7497 (200/220V, 3)
MSS-7497-A (380/440V, 3)
BP GEN Board
(03P9347)
Antenna unit RSB-104/105 (for FAR-2837SW), cover opened
AP-46
APPENDIX
Transceiver unit RTR-082 (for FAR-2837SW)
MD Board Pulse Transformer

(03P9244) (RT-9273)
RF PWR Board
(03P9348) Magnetron
(MG5223F)
RFC Board Beneath plate

(03P9346) MIC Assy. (RU-9760A)
Circulator (RC4910S)
TR Limiter (TL378A)
TB Board Fan Motor (MSS-09B24DH-R)
(03P9349)
IF Board (03P9335)
Transceiver unit RTR-082 (for FAR-2837SW), cover opened
AP-47
APPENDIX
4. Longitude Error Table (on 96 nm range scale)

The longitude lines concentrate on the north pole and south pole, namely, 1 nm is
equivalent to 1 minute at 0 degree latitude, 2 minutes at 60 degrees latitude, 3 minutes at
70 degrees latitude and so on. For this reason, a longitude error occurs on the radar display.
For example, when own ship is at 60N and 135E, even if the cursor indication is 62N and
139E, the real cursor position is deviated to the left (west) side. The table below shows the
longitude error, represented from 0 to 90 at 96 nm from the radar center (own ship).
Real cursor position Real cursor position
R: Error
62N N
Cursor position Cursor position
indicated indicated
96 nm

60N LAT E
135E 139E OS position
Distance error in direction of longitude due to latitude
AP-48
APPENDIX
(nm)

LAT 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
75 0.2256 0.4444 0.6496 0.8350 0.9950 1.1248 1.2202 1.2786 1.2980

70 0.21980213 0.43290201 0.632803 0.8134132 0.96923215 1.09551918 1.1884382 1.24517456 1.26402037
65 0.21229339 0.41810678 0.61115946 0.78556318 0.93600295 1.05790007 1.14755221 1.20224625 1.22034042
60 0.20316898 0.40012949 0.58486463 0.75173456 0.89565021 1.0122297 1.09793265 1.15016811 1.16737294
55 0.19249832 0.37910698 0.55411863 0.71218478 0.84848102 0.95885565 1.03998717 1.08933651 1.10552105
50 0.18036264 0.35519924 0.51915545 0.66721485 0.79485438 0.89818413 0.97406698 1.02021439 1.03525547
45 0.16685429 0.32858822 0.48024119 0.61716701 0.73517843 0.83067689 0.90076355 0.94332783 0.95711098
40 0.15207608 0.29947644 0.437672 0.56242216 0.66990732 0.7568477 0.82060477 0.85926197 0.87168229
35 0.13614047 0.26808546 0.39177186 0.53339693 0.59953781 0.67725844 0.73420069 0.76865661 0.77961957
30 0.11916876 0.2346542 0.3428901 0.44054055 0.52460545 0.59251483 0.6422089 0.67220131 0.68162348
25 0.10129001 0.19943707 0.29139874 0.37433139 0.44568053 0.50326182 0.54532952 0.57063015 0.57843983
20 0.08264056 0.16270211 0.23768966 0.30527334 0.36336372 0.41017869 0.44429984 0.46471615 0.47085389
15 0.06336208 0.12472888 0.18217162 0.23389198 0.27828148 0.31397386 0.33988878 0.35526538 0.35968447
10 0.04360137 0.0858064 0.12526714 0.16073056 0.19108136 0.21537949 0.23289096 0.24311083 0.24577764
5 0.02350833 0.04623087 0.0674093 0.08634588 0.10242699 0.11514595 0.1241207 0.12910605 0.13000029
0 0.00323737 0.0063035 0.00903844 0.01130406 0.01299309 0.01403609 0.0144058 0.0141187 0.01323356
(nm)

LAT 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
75 1.2780 1.2192 1.1233 0.9933 0.8332 0.6479 0.4431 0.2249 0

70 1.24442563 1.18701379 1.09356117 0.96694117 0.81103484 0.3061092 0.43117887 0.21881975 0
65 1.20131324 1.14577786 1.05546143 0.93315023 0.78260251 0.60843159 0.41596331 0.21107193 0
60 1.14905813 1.09582188 1.00932899 0.89225746 0.74821409 0.58162173 0.397582 0.20171772 0
55 1.08805799 1.03752602 0.95551494 0.84457408 0.70813132 0.55038538 0.37617487 0.19082831 0
50 1.0187708 0.97133397 0.89442885 0.79046297 0.66265924 0.51496026 0.35190481 0.17848659 0
45 0.94174265 0.89774948 0.82653562 0.73033596 0.61214392 0.47561599 0.32495654 0.16478648 0
40 0.85754099 0.81733258 0.75235195 0.66465066 0.55696981 0.43265198 0.29553516 0.14983224 0
35 0.76681293 0.73069528 0.63744242 0.59390696 0.49755683 0.38639524 0.26386458 0.13373769 0
30 0.67024897 0.63849695 0.58741521 0.51864327 0.43435714 0.33719779 0.23018583 0.11662531 0
25 0.568584 0.54143927 0.49791741 0.43943239 0.36785173 0.28543407 0.19475522 0.09862535 0
20 0.46259176 0.44026091 0.40463016 0.35687717 0.29854675 0.23149802 0.15784242 0.07987479 0
15 0.35307892 0.3357319 0.30826343 0.2716059 0.22696965 0.17580013 0.11972833 0.06051633 0
10 0.2487894 0.22864776 0.20955062 0.18426754 0.15366517 0.1187643 0.08070304 0.0406973 0
5 0.12684572 0.11982348 0.10624302 0.09552679 0.0791912 0.04106355 0.04106355 0.02056855 0
0 0.01184713 0.01008727 0.008104 0.00605903 0.00411455 0.00111154 0.00111154 0.00028325 0
AP-49
APPENDIX
AP-50
FURUNO FAR-21x7(-BB)/28x7 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR/ARPA

FAR-21x7(-BB)/28x7 SERIES
1. ANTENNA RADIATORS
1. Type Slotted waveguide array
2. Beam width and sidelobe attenuation
X-band S-band
Radiator type
XN5A XN12AF XN20AF XN24AF SN36AF
Length 10 ft 4 ft 6.5 ft 8 ft 12 ft
Beam width(H) 0.75 1.8 1.23 0.95 1.8
Beam width(V) 20 20 20 20 25
Sidelobe within 10 -26 db -24 db -28db -28 db -24 db
Sidelobe outside
-30 db -30 db -32 db -32 db -30 db
10
3. Polarization Horizontal
4. Rotation FAR-2117/2117-BB/2127/2127-BB/2827: 24 rpm or 42 rpm
FAR-2137S/2137S-BB/2837S: 21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz)/
45 rpm (HSC)
FAR-2827W: 24 rpm
FAR-2837SW: 21 rpm (50 Hz), 26 rpm (60 Hz), 45 rpm (HSC)
5. Wind tolerance Relative wind 100 kt
6. De-icer (option) On: When temperature goes down to +5C
Off: When temperature goes up to +12C
2. RF TRANSCEIVER
1. Frequency X-band: 9410 MHz 30 MHz, S-band: 3050 MHz 30 MHz
2. Output power FAR-2117/2117-BB/2817: 12 kW
FAR-2127/2127-BB/2827/2827W: 25 kW
FAR-2137S/2137S-BB/2837S/2837SW: 30 kW
3. Range, pulse repetition frequency (PRF), pulselength
PRF Range
Freq
Hz 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96 120
3000* 0.07s
3000* 0.15s
1500 0.3s
1000 0.5s
1000 0.7s
600
(500**) 1.2s
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 120 nm ranges not available on IMO radar.

* 32 nm w/TT: 2200 Hz ** For 96 nm
4. IF 60 MHz
5. Noise figure 6 dB (typical)
6. Duplexer Ferrite circulator with diode limiter for
FAR-2117/2117-BB/2127/2127-BB/2137S/2137S-BB/
2817/2827/2837S
Ferrite circulator with TR limiter for FAR-2837SW
SP - 1 E3519S01L-M
3. DISPLAY UNIT
1. Screen Raster scan, daylight bright, yellow or green echoes in 32 levels
2. Scanning Non-interlace at 64 kHz horizontal, 60 Hz vertical
3. Display
FAR-21x7 series FAR-21x7 series FAR-28x7 series
Size, model 17-inch color LCD 20.1-inch color LCD, 23.1-inch color LCD,
MU-170C MU-201CR MU-231CR
Display area (mm) 338 x 270 399.36 x 319.49 470.4 x 352.8
Resolution 1280 x 1024 pixels 1280 x 1024 pixels 1600 x 1200 pixels
Effective radar 250 mm 308 mm 340 mm
diameter (H: 64 kHz; V: 60 Hz (H: 64 kHz, V: 60 Hz) (H: 75 kHz, V: 60 Hz)
Viewable range 920 mm 1080 mm 1200 mm
4. Minimum range Minimum range: 20 m w/raw video, + 0-2 m w/digitize error
5. Range discrimination Range discrimination: 20 m w/raw video, + 0-6 m w/digitize error
6. Range scales (nm), ring interval
Range (nm) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.5 3 6 12 24 48 96
Ring interval (nm) 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 16
No. of rings 5 5 5 3 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7. Range accuracy Within 1%
8. Bearing discrimination 0.98 (XN5A), 2.1 (XN12AF), 1.5 (XN20AF), 1.2 (XN24AF),
2.0 (SN36AF)
9. Bearing accuracy 1
10. Presentation mode Head-up, Head-up TB, North-up, Course-up, True Motion (sea or
ground stabilization)
11. Target tracking (TT) Auto or Manual acquisition: 100 targets in 0.2-24(32) nm
Auto tracking on all acquired targets
12. Radar map Nav lines, coastlines, buoys, etc. produced by operator. 20,000 pts
in radar mode, 6000 pts on IC card in chart mode
13. Acquisition zone AZ1: 0.5 nm width sector, within 3-6 nm, desired bearing
AZ2: 1 nm width sector or polygon, desired range and bearing
14. Parallel index line Choice of 1, 2, 3 or 6 lines
15. AIS IMO SN Circ.217, IEC 62388
16. Chart cards FURUNO and NAVIONICS
4. INPUT/OUTPUT
1. Heading signal input - Synchro signal (20-100 VDC, 20-135 VAC 50/60/400/500 Hz),
- Stepper signal (20-100 V)
- AD-10 format
2. Speed log IEC 61162-1
3. AIS data (IEC 61162-2) VDM, VDO, ALR
4. Input data sentences (IEC 61162-1)
BWC, BWR, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, HDT, RMA, RMB,
RMC, RTE, VBW, VDR, VHW, VTG, VWT, MTW, MWV, WPL, ZDA
5. Output data sentences (IEC 61162-1)
TLL, RSD, TTM, OSD, ESP
SP - 2 E3519S01L-M
5. POWER SUPPLY
1. Display unit 24 VDC or 100-230 VAC, 1, 50/60 Hz
FAR-21x7: 24 VDC, 2.3 A; 100-230 VAC, 0.7A (100 V)
FAR-28x7: 24 VDC, 3.2 A; 100-230 VAC, 0.9 A (100 V)
440 VAC, 1 , 50/60 Hz with optional transformer RU-1803
2. Processor unit FAR-2117/2817/2117-BB:
24VDC: 7.6A (8.5A), 100-115 VAC: 2.6A (3.0A),
220-230 VAC: 1.6A (1.7A)
FAR-2127/2827/2127-BB:
24 VDC: 8.8A (9.7A), 100-115 VAC: 3.0A (3.4A),
220-230 VAC: 1.8A (1.9A)
( ): Value for 42 rpm antenna unit
FAR-2827W:
100-115 VAC: 3.2A, 220-230 VAC: 1.6A
FAR- 2137S/2137S-BB/2837S/2837SW:
100-115 VAC: 3.0A, 220-230 VAC: 1.5A
3. Antenna unit S-band: 200/220/380/440 VAC, 3, 50/60 Hz
Model Antenna voltage input (100 kt)
200 VAC, 380 VAC, 220 VAC, 220 VAC, 440 VAC,
3, 50 Hz, 3, 50 Hz, 3, 50 Hz 3, 60 Hz 3, 60 Hz
220 VAC, 440 VAC, (HSC) (HSC) (HSC)
3, 60 Hz 3, 60 Hz
FAR-2137S(BB) 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
FAR-2837S 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A
FAR-2837SW 3.0 A 1.5 A - - -
FAR-2137SW 3.0 A 1.5 A - - -
4. Console 115/230 VAC, 1, 50/60 Hz, 440 VAC, 1, 50/60 Hz (with optional
transformer RU-1803)
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1. Ambient temperature
Display unit/monitor/processor unit/control unit/power supply unit/transceiver unit
-15C to +55C
Antenna unit -25C to +55C (storage +70C)
2. Relative humidity less than 95% at 40C
3. Waterproofing
Display unit/processor unit/control unit/power supply unit:
Front panel: IP56, Rear panel: IP20
Antenna unit: IPX6
4. Vibration 2 Hz-5Hz to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude: 1 mm 10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: Max. acceleration 7m/s2, fixed
7. COLOR
1. Display unit Chassis: 2.5GY5/1.5, Panel: N3.0 (fixed)
Monitor N2.5 (fixed)
2. Processor unit 2.5GY5/1.5
3. Control unit N3.0 (fixed)
4. Antenna unit N9.5 (fixed)
5. Power supply unit 2.5GY5/1.5
SP - 3 E3519S01L-M
8. PERFORMANCE MONITOR
PM-31 (X-band)
1. Frequency range 9370 to 9450 MHz
2. Input power Min.: +8 dBm, Max.: +28 dBm
3. Power output (2nd pulse max output) -36 dBm
nd
4. Power output (2 pulse min output) -56 dBm
5. Step levels (1st pulse to 2nd pulse) 7.5 to 10.5 dB
PM-51 (S-band)
1. Frequency range 3020 to 3080 MHz
2. Input power Min.: -5 dBm, Max.: +15 dBm
3. Power output (2nd pulse max output) -15 dBm
nd
4. Power output (2 pulse min output) -35 dBm
5. Step levels (1 pulse to 2nd pulse)
st
9.0 to 11.0 dB
9. SWITCHING HUB HUB-100

1. Access Format CSMA/CD
2. Switching Format Store and Forward
3. Transmission Speed Half-duplex: 10 Mbps/100 Mbps
Full-duplex: 20 Mbps/200 Mbps
4. Necessary Cabling 10BASE-T: Category 3 or higher STP cable
100 BASE-TX: Category 5 or higher STP cable
5. Max. Cable Length 100 m
6. Ports 8 ports
- All ports auto-MDIX compliant (straight or cross cable,
automatic recognition)
- All ports EMC compliant (STP cable port)
- All ports equipped with 3 LED injectors
(Link/Act, Full-duplex/Collision, 100 Mbps/10 Mbps)
7. Buffer Memory SRAM buffer
8. MAC Address Table 1024
9. Environmental Conditions
Ambient Temperature -15 to +50C
Relative Humidity 95% (at 40C)
EMC IEC 60945
Waterproofing IPX0
10. Power and Power Consumption
Power 100-230 VAC
Power Consumption 100mA/100 VAC
11. Coating and Color N3.0
SP - 4 E3519S01L-M
INDEX
2 system messages ...........................4-26
2nd-trace echo rejector........................1-74 target data ........................................4-9
turning on/off.....................................4-2
A
AIS DISP box .......................................4-2
A/C RAIN adjustment
ALARM ACK box...................... 1-40, 3-23
auto ................................................1-29
ALARM ACK key ................................1-40
manual ...........................................1-29
ALARM box ........................................1-39
A/C SEA adjustment
Alarms
automatic........................................1-28
description ......................................1-84
manual ...........................................1-27
list ...................................................1-87
method ...........................................1-27
output .............................................1-88
A/C SEA box ......................................1-27
primary............................................1-89
Acquisition zone (TT)
Alert box .............................................1-83
acknowledging................................3-23
Anchor watch ...................................1-102
activating ........................................3-22
Antenna
deactivating ....................................3-23
information......................................1-90
reference ........................................3-24
selection .........................................1-91
shape .............................................3-24
ANTENNA box ...................................1-90
sleeping ..........................................3-23
AZ box................................................3-22
AIS
activating targets, all.........................4-5 B
activating targets, automatically......4-18 Barge marker .....................................1-61
activating targets, manually ..............4-5 Battery replacement .............................6-4
AIS DISP box ...................................4-2 Bearing measurement ........................1-34
association .....................................4-19 BRILL box ..........................................1-11
collision alarm.................................4-17 BRILL control......................................1-11
controls.............................................4-1 Brilliance
detailed target data.........................4-10 monitor ...........................................1-11
display criteria ..................................4-4 screen data.....................................1-75
lost target........................................4-14
C
messages, alarm messages ...........4-25
CCRP.................................................1-99
messages, creating ........................4-22
COG......................................... 1-22, 3-20
messages, displaying automatically4-25
Collision alarm
messages, saving...........................4-22
AIS..................................................4-17
messages, system..........................4-26
TT ...................................................3-21
messages, transmitting...................4-23
Colors.................................................1-97
messages, viewing manually ..........4-24
Control description ...............................1-4
past position display plotting
Control unit...........................................1-3
interval ........................................4-12
Course-up mode ................................1-18
past position points.........................4-13
CPA AUTO ACTIVATE box .................4-17
ROT setting ....................................4-16
CPA LIMIT box ......................... 3-21, 4-17
sleeping a target ...............................4-6
CU/TM RESET box ............................1-21
symbol brilliance ............................. 4-11
CU/TM RESET key ............................1-21
symbol color ................................... 4-11
CURSOR DATA box ...........................1-93
symbol size..................................... 4-11
IN-1
INDEX
CURSOR menu................................. 1-10 HL OFF key ....................................... 1-59

D I
Dangerous target................................. 4-5 INDEX LINE key ................................ 1-52
Data sentences INS marker ........................................ 1-61
input...............................................AP-9 Interference rejector........................... 1-43
output...........................................AP-24
K
Diagnostics
Key beep ........................................... 1-82
radar .............................................. 6-10
TT .................................................. 3-30 L
Digital interface..................................AP-8 LOST TARGET ALARM box ....... 3-9, 4-15
DISPLAY MODE box ......................... 1-12 Lost target filter (AIS)......................... 4-14
DRIFT box ......................................... 3-20 Lost target filter (TT) ............................ 3-9
Drop mark M
activating ..................................... 1-103 Main menu........................................... 1-5
erasing ......................................... 1-104 Maintenance
inscribing ..................................... 1-104 battery replacement ......................... 6-4
E fuse replacement.............................. 6-4
EBL parts replacement ............................ 6-3
bearing measurement with............. 1-34 periodic ............................................ 6-2
reference ....................................... 1-35 trackball............................................ 6-5
EBL box............................................. 1-34 MARK box ......................................... 1-55
EBL offset MENU box ........................................... 1-6
assessing risk of collision............... 1-36 Menu tree ......................................... AP-1
measuring range and bearing MODE key ......................................... 1-17
between two targets ................... 1-38 N
reference for origin point ................ 1-37 Nav data ............................................ 1-77
EBL OFFSET key ..................... 1-36, 1-38 Noise rejector .................................... 1-45
EBL ON, EBL OFF keys .................... 1-34 North marker...................................... 1-59
Echo averaging ................................. 1-44 North-up mode................................... 1-19
Echo stretch ...................................... 1-43
O
F OFF CENTER key ............................. 1-42
False echoes ....................................... 2-3 Off centering ...................................... 1-42
Function keys .................................... 1-68 Origin marks
Fuse replacement................................ 6-4 entering .......................................... 1-55
G erasing ........................................... 1-57
GAIN box........................................... 1-26 stabilization .................................... 1-57
GAIN control...................................... 1-26 OS POSN box ................................... 1-72
Guidance box ...................................... 1-7 Own ship marker ............................... 1-96
Gyro readout ..................................... 1-16 Own ship symbol ............................... 1-60
Own ship vector ................................. 1-82
H
HDG box ........................................... 1-16 P
HDG menu ........................................ 1-16 Parts list................................................ 32
Heading line ...................................... 1-59 Parts location........................................ 38
Head-up mode................................... 1-18 Past position display
Head-up true bearing mode............... 1-19 AIS ................................................. 4-12
HL OFF box....................................... 1-59 TT .................................................. 3-18
IN-2
INDEX
PAST POSN box .......................3-18, 4-12

PI line boxes ......................................1-52 SPD box .............................................1-22
PI lines Speed
displaying, erasing..........................1-52 automatic input ...............................1-22
interval............................................1-53 echo-referenced input.......................3-3
number of lines...............................1-54 manual input ...................................1-23
orientation..............................1-53, 1-54 SPEED menu .....................................1-22
reference ........................................1-53 STBY/TX key........................................1-1
resetting .........................................1-54 Stern marker.......................................1-59
PICTURE box ....................................1-64 Stern-up mode
Picture setup description ......................................1-20
choosing .........................................1-64 enabling, disabling ..........................1-82
default settings ...............................1-66 Sub monitor......................................1-105
disabling unnecessary ....................1-67 Switching Hub HUB-100...................1-101
user programming ..........................1-64
T
user settings ...................................1-66
Target alarm
Position ..............................................1-72
acknowledging offending target ......1-40
POWER switch ....................................1-1
attributes.........................................1-41
Presentation mode
deactivating ....................................1-40
choosing .........................................1-17
setting .............................................1-39
description ......................................1-18
TARGET LIST box..............................3-15
PRESENTATION MODE box .............1-17
Target trails
Pulselength ........................................1-24
cancelling........................................1-50
PULSELENGTH box ..........................1-25
copying ...........................................1-49
Q gradation.........................................1-48
Quick start............................................1-2 level (afterglow) ..............................1-50
longer trails .....................................1-51
R
narrow trails ....................................1-50
RACON................................................2-8
reference ........................................1-47
Range
saving .............................................1-49
choosing .........................................1-23
time.................................................1-48
measurement .................................1-31
TCPA LIMIT box ....................... 3-21, 4-17
RANGE box .......................................1-23
Text window setup ..............................1-79
RANGE key .......................................1-23
Trackball maintenance .........................6-5
Range ring .........................................1-31
TRAIL MODE box...............................1-48
Reference position .............................1-99
Troubleshooting
S advanced ..........................................6-7
SART ...................................................2-5 diagnostics........................................6-9
Scrollwheel drive................................1-82 easy................................................6-10
Second-trace echo rejector ................1-74 True motion mode ..............................1-21
Sensitivity...........................................1-26 TT
Serial interface acquisition zone, acknowledging ....3-23
input ports.......................................... 30 acquisition zone, activating .............3-22
output ports ....................................... 31 acquisition zone, deactivating .........3-23
Set and drift........................................3-20 acquisition zone, reference .............3-24
SET box .............................................3-20 acquisition zone, shape ..................3-24
Shuttle ferry .......................................1-82 acquisition zone, sleeping...............3-23
SOG..........................................1-22, 3-20 acquisition zone, stabilization .........3-24
IN-3
INDEX
activating, deactivating..................... 3-3 nav line entry.................................. 5-22

automatic acquisition ....................... 3-5 nav line list ..................................... 5-24
collision alarm, acknowledgement . 3-22 nav line setup ................................. 5-26
collision alarm, setting.................... 3-21 other track plotting.......................... 5-14
controls ............................................ 3-2 own track plotting ........................... 5-13
criteria for selecting targets for radar map, activation........................ 5-3
tracking ...................................... 3-32 radar map, mark and line erasure .... 5-6
factors affecting operation of.......... 3-34 radar map, marks and lines.............. 5-4
manual acquisition ........................... 3-7 radar map, position correction.......... 5-8
past position display attributes ....... 3-19 recording data ................................ 5-31
past position display interval .......... 3-18 replaying data ................................ 5-33
past position display points ............ 3-18 track color ...................................... 5-14
set and drift .................................... 3-20 track erasure .................................. 5-15
symbol brilliance .............................3-11 waypoint editing ............................. 5-18
symbol color................................... 3-12 waypoint entry by L/L input............. 5-17
symbol description ......................... 3-10 waypoint entry with cursor.............. 5-16
symbol selection .............................3-11 waypoint erasure............................ 5-19
system messages .......................... 3-25 waypoint list ................................... 5-20
target data...................................... 3-13 waypoint name and number ........... 5-21
target list ........................................ 3-15 VRM
terminating tracking of targets.......... 3-6 range measurement with................ 1-32
test................................................. 3-30 TTG to............................................ 1-33
trial maneuver, activation ............... 3-27 unit ................................................. 1-33
trial maneuver, description ............. 3-26 VRM box............................................ 1-32
trial maneuver, termination............. 3-29 VRM ON, VRM OFF keys .................. 1-32
TT VECTOR box............................ 3-17
W
vector description........................... 3-16
Watch alarm....................................... 1-76
vector motion and time................... 3-17
WATCH box ....................................... 1-76
TT ACQ MODE box ............................. 3-3
Wiper ................................................. 1-46
TT VECTOR box ............................... 3-17
TUNE box.......................................... 1-15 Z
Tuning Zoom ................................................. 1-58
automatic or manual ...................... 1-16
initializing ....................................... 1-15
TX STBY box....................................... 1-1
V
Video plotter
auto target track............................. 5-15
chart display..................................... 5-9
chart land color ...............................5-11
chart position correction................. 5-10
cursor data correction ............. 5-8, 5-10
displaying nav lines........................ 5-28
graphics on/off ............................... 5-12
initializing memory cards................ 5-30
memory card file deletion............... 5-34
nav line deleting............................. 5-25
nav line editing............................... 5-23
IN-4

Radar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radar

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Radar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

How to discard this product

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action

Wear a safety belt and hard Electrical shock can result.

Do not disassemble or modify the

Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can

Immediately turn off the power at the

Continued use can cause fatal damage to

WARNING DISPLAY UNIT, PROCESSOR UNIT

WARNING ANTENNA UNIT

1.22 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ..............................................1-38

1.39 Brilliance of Screen Data ......................................................................................... 1-75

2. RADAR OBSERVATION ............................................................................... 2-1

3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)............................................................................. 3-1

3.7 Lost Target ................................................................................................................ 3-9

4. AIS OPERATION........................................................................................... 4-1

4.7.3 Removing a target data display ..................................................................... 4-10

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION.................................................................... 5-1

5.10 Waypoints ................................................................................................................5-18

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................... 6-1

APPENDIX ...................................................................................................... AP-1

Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment.

TT, AIS, Radar Plotter and Interswitch supplied as standard.

Compliance with MED and R&TTE Directive

Radar Type and Function Availability

Specification type and function availability (con't)

Signal Processing Functions

Signal processing function Description Section

With FURUNO-supplied monitor

HUB has ports for connection of up to 7 processor units

DC spec * These monitors have been approved by the IMO,

FAR-2117, RSB-096 (24 rpm)

FAR-2117, FAR-2117-BB, XN12AF (4 ft), XN20AF (6.5 ft), XN24AF (8 ft)

HUB has ports for connection of up to 7 processor units

Rectifier Transformer Unit

Console type RCN-001/RCN-002

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

100-115 VAC/ 440 VAC

Console type RCN-003/RCN-004

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

IEC-61162-1 Serial Data

100-115 VAC/ 440 VAC

How to stop antenna rotation

Round Wide Full

1.3 Control Unit

BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

Control Unit RCU-014 (full keyboard)

Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control)

1.4 Main Menu

Main menu operation by keyboard

1 [ECHO] Echo processing functions

Main menu operation by trackball

1 [ECHO] Echo processing functions

1.5 Operation by the On-Screen Boxes

To operate the radar using on-screen boxes, do the following:

Function of left button

Function of right button